JOURNAL & PROCEEDINGS OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. ers New Series, Vol. X 1914, SIRWILLAMJONES MDCCXLVI=MDCCXCIV CALCUTTA: PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, AND PUBLISHED BY HM THE ASIATIC SOCIETY, 1, PARK STREET, CALCUTTA. 1918. oe i aac aa y DATES OF PUBLICATION, Journal, pp. 1-42 Proceedings, pp. i-ii 29th April 1914. at o 43-84 5 7 iii-lxxx 18th June ,, : oe » >, Ixxxi-lxxxiv 30t 53 : es ,» 107-120 a » ixxxv-lx Ist July >, 121-200 i : Ixxxvii-xciv h : 54 », 201-256 - XCV- 2Ist Oct ‘. +9 »» 257-294 Pt xevii-cii 9th 3? ” 295-372 > o9 c iv 30th Jany 1915 2? 7° 33 as ev-Cvili 26th May 3 DIRECTIONS FOR BINDING. The pages of the Journal should be bound first after a list of papers; they are numbered in Arabic numerals. pages of the Proceedings should follow them ; they are pened consecutively in Roman numerals. The Index is paged in continuation of the Proceedings. Plate i to follow page 110 a NS. one See : RAV, me 50 ” VeVi ss 3 29 64 . va ee ae 22 Me , 92 v ix-xi ,, follow 172 ie xii-xiv ,, face 115 a xv-xvii-;,folow ~,, 120 - Pe XVill- 5 130 33 xx 33 > 250 s os a eee >) one 2 XxX1il 33 >? 77 240 = XXiv , - Oe 5 a Es : . 274 a s ,, #20 s Seen .; Ss , 424 ERRATA. In Journal, Vol. X, p. 102.—Edilpur Grant of KeSavasena, eighth line from top :— Read : 34 fadifaat sfuadteaataat: aaa aaaraa yaaa instead of 34. faatfaat sfaadizaataat: ana aaqaraa GaaaTe | LIST OF PAPERS AND ABSTRACTS ARRANGED ACCORDING TO AUTHORSHIP. ALLAN, J. The Legend of Samudragupta’s ASvamedha Coin Type ANNANDALE, N., and MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HARAPRASAD SHASTRI. Relics of the Worship of Mud-Turtles (Trionychidae) in India and Burma .. ee! we 2s as Banergi, R. D. Edilpur Grant of Kesavasena .. as ae se The Belabo Grant of Bhojavarman arid Silver Coins of the Chandella, Madanavarman : : ay BEVERIDGE. H. The Date of the Death of Shah Phi: oer the Ruler of Sind. Sirhind or Sehrind . Buarrasaur, Natint Kanta. A Forgotten Kingdom of East Bengal BIsHWESHWAR NaTH, SHASTR lama en Stone Inscription. of a Meariry® rorenes Samvat 1143 (1086 a.D.) Botnam, A. W. The Ahom Coins of a.p. 1648 . nae <<. at Chronology of the J. aintia Kings ae as ca Brown, C. J. Note on wines Copper nay a Sa ge ees in die Cc, 2. On Two Finds of jeereon On Four Rare Mughal C Brown, J. Coaarn. urther Descriptions of Stone Implements from Yiinnan i Grooved Stone Hammers from Assam and the Distribution of Similar Forms in Eastern Asia .. as - Buremu, I. H.: See Pram, D., and I. H. Burxr. CALDWELL, KENNETH SOMERVILLE. An Improved Method of using OilGas_ .. we - CampBetL, W. E. M, hi spend Coins found in Mite — — me mi ar Medals ex 131 174 195 vill CHAKRAVARTI, NILMANI. Spirit Belief in the Jataka Stories isis ee eh BOL CHAKRAVARTTI, VANAMALL The Nature of moksa in the ny&@ya and vaisesika systems Sea CHATTERJEE, GOURIPATI. On a Demonstration Apparatus for determining Young’s Modu- CLEGHORN, Maupe L. A Note on the Floral Mechanism of Typhonium trilobatum 2. 421 Dry, NUNDOLAL. Notes on Ancient Anga or the District of Bhagalpur pea § Durr, Barun CHanpRA, and Surya Narayan SEN. The Action of Nitric Oxide on Metallic Peroxides suspended in ' Water. Part a = Ae ne 7 EKENDRANATH GuHosH: See GHOSH, EKENDRANATH. GuosH, EKENDRANATH. n the Reproductive System of Atopos, Simroth .. ee Ph GourrpaTi CHATTERJEE: See CHATTERJEE, GOURIPATI. Gravety, F. H. The er and oo of certain Indo-Australian Pas- P 201 The ievelition and Distribution 0 of Indian Spiders belonging to the Subfamily Avicularii 411 Gupte, B. A. ° Kathkari oe os ae is o. 105; HaraPrasaD SHASTRI, MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA, and N. ANNANDALE: See ANNANDALE, N., and MAHAMAHOPADHYAYA HaRAPRASAD SHA Haypen, H. H. Note on nosy Application of the Principle of Isostatic Compen- sation to the Conditions a." beneath the oe pee ae ium ee 275 Henperson, J. R. Note on = Dates of the Maulidi Era of pe Sultan of Myso: Ag 35 | Hipavet Hosa, M.: See Hosary, M. Hipayver. Hosamn, M. Hmayet. ‘Note on a History of Meus Shah called Sirat-i-Firuz Shahi xeviii Hosten, Rev. H. Fr. Jerome Xavier's Persian Lives of the Apostles .. eee Ivanow, W On the Language of the Gypsies of Sales (in Eastern Persia) .. 439 [yer, L. K. ANanrHa Kris A Comparative ‘case wy the ees Customs of the Cochin Castes 295 Jackson, V. H., and A. T. MUKERJEER. Improvements in Measurements with Quadrant Electrometers.. 227 Kanirxar, N. V.: See Mann, Harotp H., and N. V. KanirKar. Kierrer, J. J. Chironomides du Lac de Tibériade ae ee os Oe Lath, Pann A New tea of Shah Alam II . ae os fo 9246 Luoypb, R. E. Presence and Absence of the Gall-bladder in certain Rodents .. 211 Masumpar, RaMESH CHANDRA. The Date of Chashtana ee oh oe ~~ 33 Mann, Harorp H., and N. V. Notes on the Fat of Garcinia indica, the so-called kokam butter 293 Master, A. The Gujrat Mahmi@idi : ae s» 463 Note upon the Eponym o f Chan angiz 470 The Post-Mughal Coins 3 Abeadaesa, or a Study in Mint- marks 153 Mritryunsoy RoyvcHowpuHuri: See RorvcHowpHouri, Mrirrunsoy. Natint Kanta Buatrasatr: See BHaTTASALI, NALINI Kanta. Natu, BisHwesHwar, SHASTRI: See BISHWESHWAR NATH, SHASTRI. Niumant CHAKRAVARTI: See CHAKRAVARTI, NITMANI. NunponaLt Dey: See Dey, NUNDOLAL. D’OrRcHYMONT, ie from the Lake of Tiberias as -« aot Panna Lat: See Laut, Panna. Pram, D., and I. H. Burr. A Ee of the Old World, “so ER : th Descriptions of New Species and of Varieties 5 Page Ramanvusaswamt, S. P. V. Jayamangala ay a ss sa Be 1 RAMASWAMI, an 8. ew species of Diospyros from the obeaggrnes ee Hills aera 5 | Not e on Leaf Variation in Heptapleurum venulosum, Seem oe cd 1D Studies on the Leaf Structure ie ge mt pungens, Willd pt 57 Ramesu CHanpRA Masumpar: See Masumpar, RAMESH CHANDRA. Roy, Sarat CHANDRA. Magic and Witchcraft on the Chota Nagpur Plateau watinad RoyvcHowpHurRI, MriryuNJoy. A Gold Coin of Croesus oe i on .. 486 Sarat CHANDRA Roy: See Roy, SaraT CHANDRA. Satis CHANDRA VipyaBHUSANA: See VIDYABHUSANA, Saris CHANDRA. ScHuLTEN. C. Hot Springs in Raj Darbhanga, Khargpore Hills, District Monghyr .. ae io? ce t 147 Sen, Surya Narayan: See Durr, Barun CHANDRA, and SURYA NaRaYAN SEN. Smira, Lreut.-Cor. J. MANNERS. The ‘* ey or Age Deer of Tibet ae ett UTHWELL, oa A spaig oe of Our Present are. of the Cestode Fauna ritish India and Ceylon 139 Susoor, M. A Note on ae Babylonian Seal in the Central Museum, Nagpur 461 TATTERSALL, WaLTER M ip oda and Isopoda from the Lake of Tiberias. . is Bee Taytor, G. P. A Copper dies from the Nahrwala Shahr Pattan M 479 List Complementary to Mr. Whitehead’s ** Mint pate of the Mughal Emperors of India : 178 hae Orbea Rupee of Edward VII 245 Review. i “A Whitehead: Catalogue of the Coins i % n the Punja ab _ Muse . Coins of the Mugh ae mn 471 Review. W. "Eh. eps “The Copper © Coins of India. Part Bengal and United Provin 477 Tzssirori, L. P A Scheme for the Bardic and Historical Survey of Rajputana.. 373 VANAMALI CHAKRAVARTTI: See CHAKRAVARTTI, VANAMALI. : xi ae ap Page _ VipyaBHusana, Satis CHANDRA. ' The Localization of certain Hymns of the Rigveda .. ot ee a Wricut, H. NELson. i ey" . Bair ata or Barar ae oe oe oe se 250 Novice. Foreign Societies who favour the Asiatic Society of Bengal with their publications are informed that they may be sent either to the address of the Society at Calcutta, or to the Agent of the Society in ot , Mr. Bernard Quaritch, 11, Grafton Street, New Bond Stree AVIS. s Sociétés étrangéres qui honorent Ja Société Asiatique de Bengale de ses publications, sont priées de les envoyer ou directe- ment a l’adresse de la Société, 1, Park Street, Calcutta, ou & ascut 46 la Société a Londres, Mr. Bernard Quaritch, 11, Grafton Street, New Bond Street. ANZEIGE. Auslindische Gesellschaften welche die Asiatische Gesell- span von Bengalen mit ihren Publicationen beehren, werden erdurch ersucht dieselben entweder direkt an die Adresse der Gonellechaft, 1, Pavk Street, Calcutta, oder an den Agenten in on, Mr. Bernard Quaritch, 11, Grafton Street, New Bond Street, zu senden. JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL. New Series. Vol. X.—1914. —--}— -- 1, Jayamangala. By 8. P. V. RAMAnusaswaAmi, B.A., Vizagapatam. In the paper on ‘‘The real author of Jayamangala’’ by Pandit Chandradhar Guleri, B.A., of Ajmer, in the issue for July i913 of the Indian Antiquary, the author came to the conclusion that the Jayamangala on Kamasitra was composed Sankararya, the author of the commentary of the same name on the Nitisara of Kamandaka. I am one with him in so far as he says that the commentary was not composed by Yasodhara, but was simply copied by him after the text when he was too idle for more important work on account of his There is another copy of the same work in that library in Canareese characters which too does not mention the name of Yasodhara. Again the Malayalam manuscript of Jayamangala belonging to the Adyar Library, Madras, does not make men- tion of Yasodhara. Th ipts issimply aan a aradiedeaurencinrs AAAAAal OF HAH 3 qreqadaaaeaziaral...... HaeRtM BATA I The phrase about Yasodhara, viz. faevargatfatwarata Ween fraats atstanazatasiarai, obtains only 2 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. in the printed edition brought forth by Mah iamahopadhyaya Pandita Durgi Prasida. After the above colophon in some manuscript he consulted, at the end of the sixth chapter, where it comes to a close, the following few lines are found :— LAUUAQATTAQUAaT ARIAT aTqaa- qeata sinciantayg wnainmewmit slaragquTlaaaAes Aaa saagafuuaal sfuaafsaca waa | This latter alone is found in the manuscript belonging to Jambunatha Bhatta of Tanjore (Report on Sanskrit manu- scripts in Southern India by E. Hultzsch, Ph.D., Government Epigraphist, Madras, No III), and several others noticed b Prof. 8. R. Bhandarkar, M.A., in Rajputana (Report of second tour in 1904-5, 190°-6, page 48). As the latter part of the colophon is found in in many manuscripts in which the name of to be the Kamasitra was for the first time copied with the Jayamangala for the Bharati Bhandagara of Sri Visaladeva by Yasodhara, a scribe attached to that stint while before that the text and the Cy nogmoned were separ whatever be his name. But there is another Paratiiteals which he has lost sight of, viz. the commentary on Bhatti- kavya. Long before the publication of Nitisaéra of Kamandaka in the Trivandrum Sanskrit Series, Mr. nganathasvami pointed out in his paper on Jayamangala in the Mitragoshthi ! (and all I have done in this paper is simply to combine “the two papers on the same subject), that the author of Jayamangala on Bhattikavya is identical with the author of the g commentary on Kamasitra. The similarities of style polkted 6 t by him are striking. Compare, for instance, the tesdustary verses of the three Je ayamangalas qagqiaaia faa aa yerfad afafeeraqas | M) tele aaA_A atl Saad aafat yay | alaaaa faa alfagrg saa afaq gaan qerat: | Mi aa ife are oid Bi Scuterat aa faz Lite t ufaqa anaafe Valaalay: | i TaARAES » ner ta facet Slat 1 A monthly paper edited formerly by oe SrirknSvatirasienin, M.A., &c., and Sri Vidhusekharabhattacharya at Benares, now no longer issued. The paper on Jayamangala appeared on page 338, No. 12, Vol. II for 1904-5. Vol. X, No. 1.] Jayamangala, 3 [NV.8.] Mr. Guleri has pointed to two passages in the two Jaya- mangalas which show a close resemblance. Compare with these the following note from the Jayamangala on Bhatti- kavya on the same subject. eagat ata sefautaqRAAe TA | AQT VRAS MAT: aaaigiatat afeq wa aatustad wMmAyA aetfaars | It, therefore, comes upon us as a natural conclusion that one and the same person commented on the three works, Kamasitra, Nitisara and Bhattikavya. The conclusion is strengthened by the fact that the commentator on Bhattikavya calls himself qaqaWSISBqaat . Well, then, what is the name of this commentator? He calls himself Sankararya in the Jayamangalaé on Nitisira, and Bhattikavya. The paradox is only apparent. Sankara is none else than Jatisvara, the @rya being only an honorific suffix, and there is not much difference between Jayadeva and Jayamangala. His original name appears to have been Jaya- mangala, as he called his works after that name. Moreover, in the complete copy of the commentary on Kamasutra found in the Library of the Bombay Branch, Royal Asiatic Society (cf. Catalogue No. 1, the Pandit Bhagavanlal Indraji collec- tion, published 1903, page 5), the name of the author is given as Jayamangala. Thus there is at least one manuscript which notes the correct name of the author. Jayamangala appears to have been a Buddhist by religion as in his three works he makes obeisance to eaafaq and aawafeq, synonyms of Buddha. q In conclusion, I may mention that it is on a consideration of these points, that, in the edition of Kamasutra of Vatsya- yana recently brought forth together with the Jayamangala by the Proprietor of the Chowkhamba Sanskrit Book Depot. under the general supervision of Babu Govinda Disa of Benares, the name of the commentator is given as Jayamangala and the colophoa changed into aqugacraaiaia, etc. But a critical edition of the Kamasitra and the Jayamangala, which is the best of the commentaries on it, is still a want requiring filment. Dr. R. Schmidt of Germany, I learn, brought forth an edition of the work, but in that too, the commentary is attributed to Yasodaara. It, therefore, appears that Dr. Schmidt also overlooked the force of the expressive DTaqzaq- BaHIglala . ON OO Nee TOR REA TP ee eOE eM, Soe es Sa ey Oe boyy) sentry ol Go ray ae 2, A Synopsis of the Dioscoreas of the Old World, Africa excluded, with descriptions of new species and of varieties. By D. Prain and I. H. Burkitt. The paper on Dioscorea, here offered, is intended to serve two purposes: (1) to publish in the requisite form diagnoses of certain new species and varieties, and (2) to make immediately available a key to this difficult genus. In the Annals of the Royal Botanic Gardens, Calcutta, our detailed monograph will appear, with rather more than one hundred plates and a full account of the synonymy, distribution, uses and rela- rit of the species here briefly enumerated. The reader will observe that this "paper anticipates the several diagnoses!: he may also note that a correct de sige of Dioscorea polystachya, Turez., D. deleteria, Nor goeringiana, Kunth, and D. vilis, Kunth, are nie given as we eg ES not Srasins nbn they are. D. polystachya is presumedly near to D. japo : it was imperfectly described by heen but his ree is vablnsdichonty in the St. Petersburg herbarium, and w trust that we may shortly be able to examine it. D. pate was described from inadequate material (now apparently lost) : we think that it belongs to the section Stenophora. D. vilis, described from immature material, is one of the section Enan- tiophyllum. PART. | A Key TO THE SPECIES. Section 1. BorpgsreA.—Tuber globular, crowned with and dying behind, but its exact nature has not been investi- g gated. Stem short, not supporting itself by twining, but sometimes flexuous. aves simple, entire. Male-flowers in Only species S ey an SS PS ata | These were published on wo d 5th, 1913 on pages 1589-1599 of Volume V of Mr. Binew? s Leaflets o f Philippi ine Botany. 6 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {January, 1914. Section 2. SrenopHora. Rhizome horizontal, inedible. Stem twining to the left. Leaves simple, but often lobed. Male flowers in small irregular cymes, or in groups of 2—5, or sometimes solitary, along racemose axes: perianth cup- or saucer-shaped, the stamens inserted on the margin of its tube : filaments simple. Seeds winged all round, often unequally so, in abbreviated reflexed capsules. Male flowers not in sessile clusters Male ah not in a thyrsoid panicle. Leaves not lobed. fowuy: in small se gee and 1-2 together. esate exactly co 2) ssi ta ves = Innceolate-ovate-sagittate 3. d oid 4, semaine. (Probably allied to the above, but the male flowers unkn 5. Ridleyt. Flowers in robust -siehecemacintibiin and as many as six together xP 6. birmanica, Leaves lobed. pa trifid re .. 8 membranacea. Leaves with mere ar lobes 9, nipponica, Male. pee in thyrso icles Panicles and pedicels bated? short. i dees saiaiiesg eep with sharp lobes, hehe black 10, septemloba. saves with blunt lobes t drying black ll. quinqueloba. Leaves with very slight Tob, narrowed abruptly from the auricles, bright green 12. Tokoro. pape peenaaies ane Pedicels bony ai long. 13. tenutpes. ually 7-ne Leaves Pacbved, autt abe narrowed weir ove the auricles . 14, enneaneura. Male Edie in very contracted scorpioid cymes, vel 5. tentaculigera. Male flowers in sessile clusters (sub-sessile in D. sik. imensis). Stamens 6. eee hat drying black. r leaves 4 together 16. villosa. Le wee leaves not 4 together. eaves smooth beneath. le flowers strictly sessile 17 Prazeri. (Catena a se ‘the above, differing the shape 0. psules but als eared wers u Hat wn) 18. Clarkez. ers with very short pedicels. . 19, sikkimensis Leaves aith be papillae Tubular part of male flower as wide as long ; sepals obtuse . 20. deltoidea. Tubular of male flower narrow at the m pals ac 21. caucasica Plant bet gw 2 plackich leaves from a cordate angular-acumina ate 22. panthaica. Sone “arying black; leaves abruptly and hortly acuminate Loaves not pelta Bh .- 23. oenea. : es slightly ae ne .. 24. zingiberensis. dikwens ns 3 Fobly fertile. ; Plant drying black .. ne -» 25, Collettiz. Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 7 [V.S.] Plant not drying black. Edge of avy. Leaves relatively small ee .. 26. Morset. Leaves up to 20cm. long .. .. 27. hypoglauca. Edge of leaves very wavy ‘i .. 28. gracillima Section 3. SHANNICOREA. Tubers as far as known de- scending vertically. Stem twining to the left. Leaves simple, cordate. Male flowers in pr te distorted racemes which look like small scorpioid cymes, placed along the axis of a spike-like raceme: perianth saucer-shaped, the ‘stamens inserted near the margin of its tubular part: filaments simple. Seeds with the wing developed on one side only, in elongated reflexed capsules. Leaves = pe as or Bee hans than long. Leaves with n s hai es leer” with white ‘tomentum . 29. yunnanensis. Leave es adele with brown hairs .. 30. Hemsleyi. aves with airs 31. subcalva. Leaves ainpited so that they a are longer ‘than broad. Plant with very sparse . 32. nitens tame ith rather ste white hairs 2 33s i Plant with plentiful tawny hairs ; .. 34, velutipes. Section 4. CompBitium. Tubers produced in a bunch, ss ‘edible. Stem twining to the left. Leaves simple, cordate. Male flowers 1-2 together on a long spike-like raceme (when the second flower is present it is placed cymosely on the pedicel of the first): perianth saucer-shaped, the stamens in- serted near its margin. Seeds unknown. Only species vs ae x .. 35. aculeata. ection 5. LastopHyton. Tubers vere Fi ae dioscorine in ing quantity. Stem twi the left eaves generally compound, but not always Male owerts in ed on them: filaments simple. Seeds winged on one side only, in elongated reflexed or horizontal capsules. Male flowers not very densely packed: stamens 3. Leaves simple. . 36. Kerriz. Leaves pa and compound : hair as abundant mentum .. 37. tomentosa. Leaves compound or if any 5 rae leaves are pre- sent, they are small ones among the flowers. Capsules at asides peflated on the pendulous Capents not more than 18 mm. lon Leaflets relatively —_, up to 10 cm. long. Tubers several, on long etree rather ed Apc ts . 38. Arachidna. bers single or few, not on long stalks. 8 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. — broa .- 40. kamoonensis. eaflets me bemaie ovate 5 APE: 5 ca ander. ie ts relatively large. Plant hispidly ‘hai airy ves .. 42, Pérerrei. lant not hispid hairy. Leaflet 43. pentaphylia. Lea flets je or - or 7, often irregularly divided; tubers a rather 95 44. Kalkapershadii. Capsules 25 mm. long or long 45. Elmeri. Capsules at imei a 44 a right angle to the dependent a Leaflets oa mC To under the acumen. Capsules with m argins r unded . 46. inaequifolia. Capsules with margins aera — 47. Cumingit. Leaflets truncate under the sules unknown in D, Blanes, pectanuitae in D. Scortechinii. Lower surface of leaf with a few hairs and ee bristly... . Blumei. r surface of leaf and Petiole glabrous ¢ x0, Scortechinii. Male flowers’ Beinasly packed : stam: 1. triphylla. their bases : filaments simple. Seeds with the wing developed on one side only, in elongated reflexed capsules. Leaves alternate. — ovate-cordate, drying green ; flower-spikes lon ‘Faber not or little Sones d = elie Freie Tuber much elongat po 88. Leaves pg : ower spike shorter, much anc 3 tuber un ; -. 54. Brandisit. Leaves apceite tuber’ anknews oe -. 55. punctata. Section 7. EnantiopHyttum. ‘Tuber vertical, usually edible. Stems twining to the right. Leaves simple. Male filaments simple. Seeds winged all round, in capsules which are not reflexed, but face forwards. Male flowers i A axillary spikes as not on special ess branches (Nos. 56 to 69). —_ of the leaves set on obliquely, so that he margin of the leaf presents a sinus above Auricles very oblique. — a — a -- 56. Batatas. Leave oe . 57. doryophora. p Hae ony slightly oblique 58. japonica. Auricles of the —< not set on obliquely, or only inconsistently so. Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. [V.S.j Flowers large Flowers small. Leaves almost as broad as pone. cordate. Buds sessile on a broad b Capsules truncate anaes oe ee Capsules obtuse above Buds with a narrow bas Leaves ees than br Network of veins very promine ent. vaaved with the first pair of nerves r the midrib spetiird edt the first pair of nerves re’ m the crane a Network kof veins not pro ovate-cordate, drying gts aaa triangular-co rdat oi Leaves elliptic with _ horn- coloure Leaves linear-h mate f Male flowers in ‘"ikse s simple in the weaker leaf axils, oi — stronger axils disposed in pyramidal Plant ‘ot moderate cA a flowers also of e size; To Plant of aon gr beri with large flowers; root Male hovers in spikes arranged on elongated leafless branches (Nos. 72 to 106). Spikes of male not strongly engi geotro- pic, but taking a position at a right angle or slightly less 8 the leafless branch. e plant on axes which are never y flat- Special flowering branches conspicuously shorter than ibe leaves (unknown in D. pula}. i a not very oblique, often rather glau Caranien very oblique and very ‘gl aucous. . Special flowering branches, when well grown, longer than the leaves. Pubescence leafless axes le flowers of the plant abundant on the which bear the spikes of Stamens 3 a ms ae Male flowers 1—2 mm. apart. Leaves with floccose cor ig ae Leaves without floccose low Male flowers closely Sod. touching or almost tou Listert gen ° Hairs not enwrapping the male ching (unknown in 59. luzonensis. . peperoides. lor. . bico . aspersa. . spicata, . intermedia. 5. Trimenii. Wightii. ye oor gga . hastifolia 70. transversa. . cirrhosa. ~lI — 2. Wallichiti. 3. pulverea. I 77. anguina. 78. 10 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Leaves eee hair whit Leaf iid “elongated, drying red- te pair of lateral v véina sibs near the Leal salto shorter, not drying red-brown; first of lateral — more remote from the margin ves rather aes: hairs brown —— dee , but a very few hai sent at re base of the male in- flo orescence. en reese the biciosasesiaas hit the Leaves 8 gasies ves er nD firm ven ender Leaves ovate or ovate-cord ate. eaves very thin: stems with fine Pe seis below . neat lateral nerves in the first part of to. ourse rather close the mi ‘dri First geht nerves in the first part of their course more remote fro the midr ib: leaves rather narrow- er than in D. nummulari Leaves firm, with, when "ang the network standing out on ian lower urface Pubescence absent entirely. Leaves ep alee a bud rose- coloured zg sa broader. Base of leaf comsponly ob "roundedailenl n the very ites, ate in D. Wattit. Plant wide climbing, with large — ules Eig: of lesser dim sarge with maller capsules ; mare eso Planes very slender; leaves cheusiats Base of leaf cordate or hastate or sub- sagittate. Leaves 5 times as lo ong as broad Leaves only about twice or thrice as long as broad. Leaves hastate; flowers closely P Network not conspicuous Network conspicuous below. Leaves rarely — than twice as long as Leaves three ripen as long as broad ; more elon- y leaves very cReseinser Snsn [January, 1914. ies) i) . trinervia. 67. opp ae 81. pyrifoli 82. Lohert. 3. Soror, 4, Foxworthy. 85. Seemannii. 2) 6. nummularia fo] — . pyrijolia. 87. Merrillii. 88. grata. 89. Wattir. 67. oppositifolia. 68. obcuneata. 90 gibbiflora. 91. Fordiz. =] to . belophylla. 93. belophylloides. 94. Lepcharum. Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. ll [N.8.] Veins not inconspicuous: the first lateral pair of nerves rather eee fe the midrib ; h midrib i in ae in 95. glabra. remote from the midri .. 96. vexans. Flowers of the male plant on axes which become zig- 208 either in life or when dry. Stems roug ith numerous warts; gatiale 97. brevipetiolata. Stems not ‘rough ; : petioles of moderato length. uds large: leaves ovate-ellip . 98. Benthamit. Buds small ; leaves cordate. eaves with the basal sinus rounded bitten out; axes o de vay ve] © thin; buds often elongat ae iis the basal sinus more or less ute. Stenis ape winged, reddish when dry ; root deeply penetrating. Network Pathos distinct on the under surface of the leaf: capsules equal- li lata . myriantha. ; 100. persimilis. Network not so distinct on the under s sules larger than those of D. alata 101. Hamiltonit. deeply penetrating 102. alata. Spikes with a very Peon’ ounced negative geotropism. B ather sma aves thin but the network becoming ne asa prominent er oo they are dry 103. laurifolia. Leaves subcoriace Leaves not seat longer than broad ; net- __ work distinct .. 104, Havilandit. s more e elongated ; spikes long .- 105. Warburgiana. Buds g Fi leaves thin .- 106. deflexa. Section 8. SreNocorra. Tubers unknown. Stem twin- ing to the right. Leaves simple. Male flowers in racemes. Perianth tubular,’ opening wide: stamens 6, inserted in the cee ake of the tube, constructed like the stamens of Steno- swollen below and horned at the back. Female flowers tabidlar Seeds unknown, but 2 ovules present in eac oculus. Only species me ie _. 107. stenomerifiora. PART 2. ENUMERATION WITH DIAGNOSES. Section 1.—BORDEREA. 1. D. Pyrenarca, Bubani et Bordére ex Grenier, in Bull. Soc. Bot. France, xiii. (1866), p. 380. Rorderea pyrenaica , 12 ~=Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1914. Miégeville, loc. cit., p. 374. Central and Eastern Pyrenees. A relic of the Tertiary Flora of Europe, very local and very interesting on account of its wingless seeds. The structure of the tubers deserves investigation. Section 2.—STHNOPHORA. D. FLABELLIFOLIA, Prain et Burkill, in Elmer, Leaflets of Philippine Botany, v . (1913), p. 1593. Luzon in the latitude of Manila. There is considerable doubt in regard to the posi- tion of this species, of which the capsules and underground parts are unknown. It has been obtained by three collectors in the Island of tan i ie (Elmer, 9095! Loher, 6997! 7027! McGregor, 14381 !) D. DAUNAEA, Frain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Be engal, iv. (1908), p. 459. Dawna Hills of Tenasserim. The female plant is at Baie unknown. 4. D.campopiana. This is the third plant of the section Stenophora of which the male only is known. It was collected by the late M. Pierre in Cambodia, and is described here. 1OSCOREA CAMBODIANA. Tuber ignotum, Planta omnino glabra. Caules superiores paitete flavi eee striati, sinistrorsim volubiles. Folia alterna, ovato-deltoidea, sien upte et breviter acuminata, uis- sima, ad onga, 5 cm. lata, 7-nervia: area media a nervorum lateralium prim re terminata late oblanceolata: nervi extimi bifidi # ndariz inter venulas indistincta : pe : 5 ] on maris i in racemvu spi disp simus, triangularis: pedicelli 1-5 mm. gi adie ‘late = Tanceolat ———e p lo ra vati costatus, mm.longus. Stamina 6, in marginem tubi inse tert Biasonts *25 mm. Meee soibect ee Geel Planta feminea ignota MBODIA.—In Monte Kereer; Pierre, 6673! ‘Typus in herbario Horti ier ‘ad Lutetias Parisiorum conservatur. 5. D.Ripieyi. Sarawak in Borneo. As the male plant is unknown its position is somewhat doubtful: but we expect that it will be found to have the saucer-shaped perianth of the tenophoras, and that the male flowers are ae to each oe as in D. daunea and D. cambodiana. It is interesti observe that this j is characteristic of the Re Taps came of the section. Dioscorga Riptryi. Rhizoma ignotum. Caules tenues, inermes, teretes. Fi terna, yk acuminat basi tantum cordata, glabra, ad 10 cm. longa, ad 4°5 em. lata, 5-nervia: area media a nervorum lateralium pare primo tectaiunth clipticn vene secundarie inter se fenestrate nec trajecte: petiolus ad 3 cm. longus, glaber, angulatus. Capsule irregulariter reflexe, vix fi estat basi ad 8 mm. longa Vol. X, No. 1.) The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 13 [N.8.] inclusa ad 30 mm. longe, supra truncate: ale oblique 20—22 longe, 17—18 mm. late. Semina pallida membrana circumcirca alat Borneo. ba principatu Sarawa = au, Ridley, 11710! sine Tes cenarius Merrillit, 1278! Typi conservantur in Herbariis Horti Botanici ad Singapur ot ieatine Conneivitceh ad Manilam 6. D. pirmanica, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Ixxiii. (1904), p. 185. Common in the forest-clad parts of Burma, except the Arakan coast, and extending thence into Yunnan and Northern Siam. 7. D.sp., Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Ixxiii. gee p. 186: Ridley, Mat. Flor. Malay Penins., ii. (1807), p. 84. ‘*Tuba ubi,’’ Ridley, in Agric. Bull. Straits Sethcuaie and F. M. States, 1908, p. 444. Perak in the Malay Peninsula D. MEMBRANACEA, Pierre MS. A very marked species occurring in three aye localities in Burma, Northern Siam and near the Gulf o SCOREA MEMBRANACEA. Rhizoma horizontale, externe atro-cas- irregulares, supra subdistinctz, infra eo bansteatg petiolus canali- ec 18 cm. longus. Flores maris singuli vel bini in racemos spiciformes dispositi (si bini sint _junior in pedic' satio vetustioris insi- dens) : — celli -5 mm. longi vel binz, glabrz, tenuis- simez, basalis ovato- -acuminat a, su perior minor obtusior: bracteolz iia Perianth. maris lacinize long», subligulate, obtusz: tubus campanulatus, glaber, 1 mm. tongs, intra quingue-costatus « ny filamentis adnatis. ee 6: filam in marginem tubi m. longa. Flor ges in paces epoca ad 20 cm. gern dispositi: bractex saber nuissime, 1-5 mm. longe ; bracteole celprsees minores. Sepala Shootin obtusa, sere ae pt 1 mm. longa et ultra. Petala lanceolato-acuta, sepalis brevi Staminodia minuta. Capsule reflex, = 18 mm. pope apice sabnesincntin ale paullulo latiores quam semicirculares, 12 BuRMA ET InDo- Cus. —Ad Gangaw i “6 pipbeag ge ton Eakokke Burmez superioris, Mil/ar in Mus. a bee _ P., 20632! 20633! ! In monte Dinh prefecture ca: beds a, Pierre, 7017! Ad “Vaton in litore maris Siamensis, Pierre, 7ois/205 ‘Prove Chengmai ad Meb-hia. Kerr, 1951! et in monte Doi Sutep P, ad 1200 ped. alc., Kerr, 1245! Typi Pierrea i isi nser- conservantur ex collectiune Kerriana. Kadix nobis nota ext ex a vivis ad Hortum Botanicum Calcuttensem a Millar benevolenter missis 9. D. nipponica, Makino, Lllustr. Flor. Jap. 1. (1891) . 45. D. acerijolia, Uline ex Diels, in Engl. Bot. Jahrb., xxix. (i000): p- 261: Prain et B arkill: in Journ. Asiatic Soc. 14 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. Bengal, Ixxiii. (1904), suppl. p. 7. D. Seer pat Maximowicz, Fl. Pekin in Primit. Flor. Amur. (1859), p. 478. A widespread species occurring from Kwei-chow and poh 3 in Central China northwards into Russian territory on the Amur river and foun in Corea Los Japan as far north as 40°N. ing Maximowicz this apne is almost invariably called D. gene here by Russian botanis Variat :— Var. vERA. Folia infra setulosa, ae glabreseentia. Perianthii tubus floris masculini vix 1 mm. longus, sed ob pedicello ad basin tubi ampliato longior esse videtur. Var. OSTHORNII. olia infra admodum setulosa, supra etiam aimee age ie agri Perianthii tubus floris masculini ei varietatis v Var. JAMESII. “Folia pibaianels Perianthit tubus quam tubus varietatum precedentium paullulo brevior: lobi apice rotun- ati. ietas VERA reperitur in provinciis sinensibus Szechuan, (farges 227 !), ae (Henry, 105! 4769! 5870! 5870B! 7358 !), Pechili (David, 961 !), et in Corea (Faurie, 675! 859! Mills, 293 !), et i n Mongo rov!), et in Japonia (Ma ino! Faurie, 2373 !). Vaphukhe einer paso in provinciis sinensibus Shensi (onrabdi !), et Kwei-chow (Rost- 2127), et base On 14560 !), etiamque in Corea (Mills |), in prt (Jame aack aximowicz! Komarov! Karo!). Varietas JAMESII Foo vitae ro ue unchteia inter Mukden et Kirin (James !). Secunda a cel. Diels sub nomine Dioscorew acerifolie var. Rosthornit descripta est. We 2, haps Thunb., Flor. Jap., (1784), p. 149: Makino, Ill. Flor. Jap., i. (1889), p. 27: Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal. Ixxiii. (1904). suppl. p 8. D. quin- queloba, Miq., Prolusio Flor. Jap., (1865), p- 150, in part: Pranclict et Savatier, Enum. Flor. Jap., ii. (1879), p- 46. Japan as far north as Lat. 37°N: 1} . QUINQUELOBA, Thunb. gees ae A? been chc fy Sel., (1791), t. 15: Mak . Flor. aa (1889), t. 26: Prain. et Burkill, in Teer oe Soc. Berea, Ixxiti. (1904), suppl. p. 9. Corea, and Japan as far north as Lat. 37° N. 12. D. Toxoro, Makino, in Tokyo Bot. peeks iii. soul 112 and Ill. Flor. Jap., (188 89) t t. 24. D. sativa, Miq., Pro fost Flor. Jap., oa p. 323, in part: weanset et Savetier, Enum. PI. Jap., (1879), p. 47, in part. D. Yokusai, Prain et Burkill, in iace Asiatic Soc. pepe Ixxiii. (1904), suppl. p- “ei Japan as far north as Lat. 4 , on Quelpart, off the t of Corea, and in Northern Totraten, This species is very eal allied to D. tenutpes. D. renurpres, Franchet et Savatier, Enum. Flor. fa, ii tas), pp. 48, 525: Maximowicz, in Engl. Bot. Jahrb., Vol. X, No. 1.) he Dioscoreas of the Old World. 15 [NV.S.] . (1885) p. 52: Makino, Ill. Flor. Jap., i. (1889), t. 6: Prain ot Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. cea Ixxiii. (1904), suppl. p. 9. Japan as far north as Lat. 38°N. D. ENNEANEURA, Prain et ee in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Haded: “Isai (1904), suppl. p. D. Buergert, var. enneaneura, Uline ex Diels, in Engl. oe La, xxix. (1900), Pp. 260. Central China, in the Province of Hupeh. 15. D. rentTacoticeRa. A il A curious plant of the Shan Hills, with minute crowded flow DioscoREA TENTACULIGERA. Radix ignot Caules teretiusculi, inermes, glabri, pene vinneteneinih aliiiion: Folia alterna, ovato- pitied tenuia, omnino glabra. acuminata velacuta, apice mucronulata, a m. lon area m vont lebavaivaen terminata ovata; nervi extrem! bifidi; ven secundarize pauce, irregulares, Fates indistin« — petiolus glaber, supra canalicu- latus, ad 3°5 mm. longus. Flo res maris 3—6-n1 in cymas breves densas ch a= u pendulis ad 6 cm. longis; bractex late Hucncuas acuminate, ° J i i ice i lon paululo majores; tubus perbr tamino ‘ia minuta. Capsule curve, ad 16 m Sere at i = alo longiores, apice parolee: pallide soe oe semi-eli — i mina circumcirea alata. Mo 2 rope May ni ad 3500 ped. alt., Lace, 4102! ad piri ny saetee in pte -ipatu Yaunghwe, Abdul Khalil! Typi i in Herbariis Hortorum Regalium ad Kew et Calcuttam conservantur 16. D. vttrosa, Linn., Spec. Plant., (1753), p. 1033. Jacquin, Ic. Plant. Rar., (1793), t. 626. D. sp.,C. H. Wri ight, in Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot., xxxv. (1903), p. “04: Nakai, in sate Coll. Sci. Tokyo, xxxi. (1911), p. 235. Varia Von VERA. Capsula maculata. ar. COREANA. Capsula immaculata, lte polita. eda tas VERA americana est. Varietas COREANA in Corea media “ee est a Carles (sib numero 78!) et Faurie (sub numero 697 ne Uchiya va. Radix ejus ignota manet, quod dolendum est quandoquidem rhizoma D. viliose vere ab rhizomatis specierum asiati- carum longe distat ad. nest babe ra, Prain et Burkill. in Journ. Asiatic Soc. ngal, ] . (1904:, suppl. p. 2. Northern Burma and the northern part of, the Shan States. A species very nearly allied to D. sikkimensi D. Crarket. As the male is unknown, there is some slight Spat regarding the exact affinity of this species: it 16 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1914. may be a variety only of D. Prazeri or D. sikkimensis, differing in the shape of the capsules. D. ARKEI. Radix nobis ignota. Caules glabri, angulati, sinis- trorsim volubiles nibecte opposita, ononday cordata vel longe cordata, tenuiter acuminata, nec margine sinuos , lobis basalibus subangulatis, 8 cm. longa, a Apes lata, sieeve area media a pare primo ner- vorum lateralium terminata lanceolata acuminata; nervi extimi bifidi : venz secundariz reti venicularum paululo magis conspicue : age “ 7 cm. longus, supra canaliculatus, dorso et lateribus angulatus. Flore ignoti. Capsule respicientes, 20 mm. longe, apice retusex, fuscxe > cas née. aneo asperse: ale semi-obcordate, 12mm. late. Semina loculis con- Montes Nacarum.—Kohima ad 5500 _ alt., C. B. Clarke, 41018! Typus in en apud Calcuttam conserva 19. D. stxKimensis, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Ixxiii. (1904), suppl. p. 3. The Himalaya Alba the longitude of Khatmandu to le Bhutan, and fro the plains to 5000 ft.; it has occurred also in the districts of Champaran and Malda, but perhaps only as a casual, the root having been carried down some river and lodged on the river bank. 20. D. prettoipEa, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), no. ee Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 340, in chief part: Stewart, Journ. Agri-Hort. Soc. India, xiv. (1867), p. 37: Hook. Flor. Brit. India, vi. (1892), p. 291, in chief part: Prain et See in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Ixxiii, (1904), suppl. D. nepalensis, Sweet, Hort. Brit., 2nd ed. (1830) p. 522. oe nepalensis, Jacquemont MS. The Himalaya east- ward from the longitude of Khatmandu to the Afghan border, -from 3000 to 8000 ft., and sometimes to 10,000 ft.: also occur- ring near ween in the Khasia Hills, and on the Yunnan- Burma boundary. D. caveastca, Lipsky, in Bull. Soc. Nat. Kieff e the annual rainfall is about 60 to 80 inches. The ‘species differs very little from D. deltoidea. D. pantHatca, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Ixxili. (1904), suppl. p. 6. wots Province of Y in south-western China at 7000—9000 23. D. @nea. The flowers of this species are unknown, but it veitekenats has a close relationship to D. zingiberensis. D. onnza. Tuber te Farges, magnum et ligneum, Caulis glaber, colore cupreo-purpureus, 5 melas, sinistrorsim volubilis, Folia alterna, Vol. X, No. 1.]_ The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 17 [N.S.] cordata, margine leviter sinuata, breviter acuminata, mace glabra, ina pilis gg parese | in nervis prominentibus induta, ad 7 cm. longa, ata, 7-nervia: area media a pare primo nervorum Febdentiers joointnaba oblanceolato nee vata: vene secundarie in rete anastomo- ignoti. Flores feminet in spicas breves dependentes 5 cm. longas com- herb axes fusco-purpurei, ahifitelR: pilis minutis induti : bractez o-rufie, ovato-lanceolatze, acu mm. longe: bracteolex similes, “poker 8 ton Trex, Ri rotund ate, infra Heist os stron a alze 4m CHINA t beerenl- able sosatier-y~ en-keou: “tin in provincia Szechuan, alt. 1400 ped., Farges, 90! Types one herbario Horti botanici ad Lute- tias Parisiorum conservatur, 24. D. zin@rperensis, C. H. Wright, in Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot., xxxvi. (1903), p. 93. D. Henryi, Uline ex Diels, in Engl. Bot. Jahrb.; xxix. (1900), p. 261. name only. The Pro- vinces of Hupeh in central China and Yunnan in oath wosteeh China. A very well marked species. 25. D. Cottzertir, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. oe vi. Sty . 290. D. sp., Collett et Hewsley, i in Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot xxviii. (1890), p. 137. Shan States and in Chine in the Pro. vinces of Stern cagt Szechuan and Kweichow, apparently abundant 26. D. Morser, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 454. Central China in the Province of Kiang-si. plant as yet only found at the eastern end of the central mountain complex of China, but allied to the next. 27. D. HypoGtavoa, Palibin, in Bull. Herb. Boiss ser. 2, vi. (1906), p. 21. Central China in the province of okien. This audi and the preceding are certainly very closely allied. 28: BD; Sena Pew , Prolusio Flor. Jap., (1865), p 324: Franchet et Savatier, Enum. Flor. Jap., ii. (1879), p 49: Makino, Ill. Flor. Tap. is _ (1889), t. 25. Central Japan. Section 3. SHANNICOREA. 29. D. yuNNANENSIS, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, Ixxiii (1904), p- 186. The Chinese Provinces of Yunnan and Kweichow. 2. Di Hunstny yi, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 451. D. precox, Prain et Burkill, 18 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. loc. cit. p. 455. Shan Plateau and the Chinese Provinces of Yunnan and Kweichow 31. D. suspcatva. Plentiful] in Yunnan. Learns Tuber in terram descendens, longum, rufo-fuscum glabri, striati, alterni, einistrorsim volubiles. Folia ie “latenae cordata, abrupte cunea ah acuminata, ad 4 cm. longa, ad 6 cm, lata, 9-nervia: area media a a rar e primo nervorum satenaings derivate seaaee, nervis extimis bifidis: vene secundariz subrecte : petiolus ad 4 cm. longus, supra canalicolatus Flores maris 1-7,.in racemos breves sé secundarios unilateraliter c gregati: racemi ipsi sparsim in axin tenuem angulatum ad 12 ¢ moe longus Ye odum parce hirsutu ecg bractex ovate, wouter 1 onge, glabre, fulve atque rubro-maculate. Per ‘anthii Pos ‘obi ovat, hearer apice Saar 1-75 mm. E hel. ‘> mm. flore aperto excurvati, rubro-maculati : tubus perbrevis. Stamina geet perianthii lobos | bieha sapra ire, lobis breviora. Flores feminet singel vel bini in spicis 9 cm. longis in axin angulatum glabescentem pos bracteze lanceolate, 2 mm, longe. Sepala anguste ovata, tome Bh Eater onga, atro-rubra in sicci- tate. Petala similia, obtusiora. inodia minuta. Capsule oa entes, 25 mm. long, infra iesiiace enpre truncate et mucronate: alze 23 longe te. a g He 26 > 99 > qi B BE i) 5 B m. la LIs. Soe Provincia Yunnan ad Yunnan-fu CuI US’ lo 107! 318 ne in montibus supra Ta-pin-tze (De eeten$ 374! 1826 ‘ig La-ko- chan prope Ta-pin-tze, (Tielavy. 2834!), Pee-tsao-chan, (Delavay, 6654 !), Kiao-ce gar prope fauces Hee chan-m preter 3853 !). Sine locis ad Shaker vantu 32. D. nitens. A species of Yunnan. 9 ix ignota. Caules juniores sparsissime hirsuti, vetus- res gla bre entes palit, oe ree sinistrorsim volubiles. Folia “aa i pe a, infra vis prix in s perparce hirsuta, ': Qu a : longs, glaber vel {a gimp hirsutus, supra canaliculatus, infra carina- Flores maris in racemos breve s secundarios unilaterales 4 mm. longos 8s S vi rotun lati. Stand - beter a. Caps suloe sapiens, ‘tabiosutes, gla- bre, glauce, apice re ad 25 mm. longe; ale fere subrectangulares, ad 22 mm. lon ge et po mm. late. Semina (immatura solum visa) admo- a USTRAL 13,—In Provincia Yunnan, ad Yunnanfu (Duclouz, 784 ‘ ‘Mengize ad 5000 ped. alt., (Henry, 10287 B!), Szem —4500 ped. alt. (Henry, 12338! 12338B t). ae — (Bons d’ Anty, "430 1). Typi precipue in Herbario Kewensi conserva: 33. D. Martini. A species of Yunnan and Kweichow. Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 19 [N.8.] Radix ignota. Caules sparsim pilis tortis albis tecti, longitudinaliter lineati, re pig es en Folia cordata, acuminata, upra glabra, infra subaraneosa, em. longa, ad 6 cm. lata ia: area medi ? ne mz sec rectze, pauce, supra distinct: petiolus a 12 = ‘ongas seg canalieulatus, tus. ade s 1—4-n racem breves mm. ongos aggregati: racemi in axin subarsaenea oa 18 ci ws longum dispositi: bractez tinear! | lanetclasen, acute, subaraneose, longer. Pertanthti maris lobi equales, anguste al, rubro- cnackdlod? tubus brevis, externe iienaate 8. tes na 6, perian nthii lobos vix eequan- tia: filamenta tenuia, eo ululo Ratti gent, ° = nga vate feminet ignoti. Capsu ule respicientes, imbricantes, spars: araneosas ad 20 cm. longas disposit#, basi supra vélis salle gran tg apice rotund: ale sub-rectangulares, ad 28 mm. longe, 8 mm. late, rubro-maculate. Semina inequ broad cas ala vix 1 mm. latai in latere angustiori, 20 mm. 1 ae in ig ea INA See —In ciis Kwei-chow et Yunnan, prope Tsin-tchen in ler tin et “Bodine, 18631), prope Gan-pin in Tilia (Martin et Bodinter, 2517 !), supra Ta-pin-tze (Delavay, spot a Typii herbario Horti Botanici ad Datedas Parisiorum conservantur 34. D.veLuTIPES. A species of the Southern Shan States, D. PES. Radix ignota. Caules juniores pilis fuscis tortis vestiti, vetustione emia gg subconspicue lineati, siecitate castanei, sinistrors volubiles. Folia el Gneate dadtaidéo-s ordata, acuminata, juniora hie Seeds ‘albo-p ubescentia, vetustiora panes entia, infra = ore Diag geet deinde fe im sree ntia a m. conspicuz. Flores maris 1—3-ni in racemos breves ag — ipsos in inflovescentiam spiciformem compositos: axis ad 16 cm. lo , angula tus, pilis albis tectus; bracte anguste ovato- seiisianeas, $B tich STonaaes Perianthium maris crateriforme: lobi externi ad 3 mm. longi, albo- pubescentes : aes interni obtusiores, paululo latiores. Stamina in lobos ane filamenta | mm. longa: anthere parv#, intrors 2 e fulvo-pubescens: bractez ovate, ful vo-pubesce s, 1°75 mm. longe. Sepala triangulari-ovata, exteriora quam rics paululo majora, ‘75 mm. longa, extus dense pubescentia. Staminodia minuta. Capsule ignote. s SHANNORUM, versus austrum, loco non indicato, (Macgregor, ears 78) Typi in Herbario Horti Botanici regalis ad Calcuttam con- ser Section 4. CoMBILIUM. 5. D. acuueata, Linn., Amoen. Acad., iv. (1754), p.131: d Syst. Nat., ed. 13, ii. (1791) p 5. B82: Lam., Encyc. Meth., iii. ii, (1789), p. 232, in chief par Willd.. Sp. Plant., iv. (1805), p- 792, in part: Graham, Cat. ad Bombay, (1839), p. 218: K unth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 398, in part. D. Combilium, Ham. ex Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), No. ei c diacantha Zippelius ex Spanoghe , in Linnae (1841), p. p. 479. D. echinata, oe x Wall., Cat. Lith., 1832), No. 5103E. D. fasciculata, Ha rt. Beng., (1814), p. 72, name only, and Flor. “8 Oe iii esa), p. 801: Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), 20 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. ane, ait 23 in "Engl. Bot. Jahrb., xiii. (1891), 1, D. Tll., (1793), t. D. spinosa, Roxb. ex Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), Nos. pea. 5103D, 5103E: C. H. Wright, in Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot., xxxvi. (1903), p. 91: Safford, in Contrib. U.S. Nat. Herb., ix. (1905), p. 68. D. tilaefolia, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 401. D. tredecimnervis, Pierre, in Herb. propr. D. Tugui, Blanco, Flor Filip. Shel P. 800. Oncus esculentus, Lour., Flor. Cochin-ch., (1790), p. Variat :— Var. Bitrate Folia magna. 13-nervia, pubescentia. Flores ris copiose producti. Tubera clavata, radiculosa, infra i roducta. an Bina be Folia paululo minora, plus minusve pubescentia Flores raro producti. Tubera infra ier producta. Var. FascicutaTA. Folia minora, subglabra. met omnino desunt. Tubera ellipsoidea, congregata, espinos Varietas TILLZFOLIA est planta inculta insularum philippinensium et regionis istius. Flores maris copiose producti, et certe herbari nobis visa specimina pluria praebent. Varietas spinosa culta est at Eivatia. Inter sylvas aoc agricolae varietatam hanc varietati FASCICU- Tata alee geoabi t propterea spinas — se effodere non possunt. name more satisfactorily in 1754: and we appl as used i in that year. This usage is that adopted by many French botan- ists and by the botanists who worked on the Western Coast of Indi Section 5. LasIioHPpyTon. Kerr. Northern Siam near Chengmai. A ogee aisle than the allied D. tomentosa. D. Kerru. Tubera, ut videtur, terram alte penetrantia. Caulis asi roseo-tinctus, inermis, parce pilis fulvis hirsutus. Folia eared ec inati , ad 4°5 em. lata, 5-nervia, nervorum lateralium pare Pn in parte saperiori supra medium terminato , margine ciliata, supra fera glabra, infra pilis sparsis fuscis subpubescentia: petiolus nar hispidus, ad 3 em. longus. lores maris sessiles in a = eeaomg 2 cm. longas singulas vel binas ad axillas folioru rer axis Rar angulatus: bractez ovate, acuminate, tenu margine e subhyaline, glabre: sgt similes, nisi minores et ioe rata latiores. Sepala late ovata, o glabra, viridi-lutescentia, 1°5 mm. longa. Petala anguste clliptien, subobtusa, quam sepala paululo breviora, —— similia. Sta sepalis opposita, brevia: anthera tria ovata: staminodia 3 ‘gece longiora. lores porages ignoti. 14M.—Dvoi Sutep prope Chengmai ad 1400 ped. alt, (Kerr, 1404 !). Typus in herbario horti botanici Kewensis conservatur. Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 21 [V.S.] 37. D. tTomentosa, Koenig ex Roxb., Hort. Beng., (1814), p. 105, name only: Heyne - Roth, Nov. Plant. Sp., (1821), p. 371: Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 289. D. triphylla, Russ. ex Wall., Cat. ith (1832) No. 5101D. D. nullica, Ham. MS. Helin? tomentosa, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 439. India south of the Gangetic Plain, and in Ceylon in damper parts. 38. . ARacHipna. A small obscure species of the dense forests of Assam, north of the Cachar Hills. Its tubers are arranged somewhat like those of D. aculeata, but it is otherwise closely allied to D. pentaphylla and D. melanophyma. D, Aracuipna. Tubera plura, of Hae Jevite carne alba ten- era, ad 5c ep. longing stclones oblique endentes 5—20 cm. longas ter- minantia. “Cinites glabri, inermes, tenues, si seinen volubiles. Folia rna, ternata ; ‘isla Kaelin elliptica, versus apicem ergy pel angus- tata, apice breviter acuminata, glabra, a em. longa, ad 4 cm. lata, penninervia: foliola lateralia inequalia, medio fere uqitlonge ad em. lata; petiolus ad 3°5 cm. longus: petioluliad 5 mm. longi. Flores ignott. Assam. In phe ones Nowgong prope Lumding (Burkill! Kal- ka Pershad, 35581!) Tubera edibilia cibo a Mikiris Lee effodiuntur. Typi in herbariis ad Kew et caloeihens conservantur 39. D, mELANoPHYMA, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 452. D. kamaonensis, Collett, FI. . Prov. ay a (1882), p p- 703, name only. D. sp. Griffith, Posthumous Papers, Journal, (1851), ii, p. 62. The Himalaya from 4000 to 6000 ft., from the eastern border of Kashmir to Sikkim ; in the Khasia Hills, and in the Chinese Province of / 40. D. Kamoonensis, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 395. D. Fargesti, Franchet in Revue Hortic., 1896, p. 541: Bois in Bull. Soc. Bot. oe xlvii. (1900), p. 49: Hackel i in Bull. (1832), No. 5098F : ‘hicls in agi. Bot. Jabrb., xxix. (1900 p. 260, p D. triphylla, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), No. 5102D in part and 3102E. D. Wright in ourn. Linn t., xxxvi. (1903), p. 91. The Hi from Kamaon to Sikkim, ascending from 3000 to 6500 ft.; in northern Siam, northern Burma and the Nejeaiaes "Provinke of Yunnan, Szechuan, Kweichow and Hupe Variat :-— Var. vERA. Bractee ftores masculinos Var. sTRAMINEA. Bractee floribus masculinis aba Folia ad Var. Farcesr. 2B florit linis equilonge. Folia ad 10 em. longa. 22 = Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1914. Var. DEtAvaylI. Bractew perlate, obtuse vel shies vel pau- lum siemens nulate, magne. Flores masculini ma = Var. He ractee perlate, obtuse vel rotundats vel paulum oy stair Se parve. Flores masculini parv Varietas vERA himalaica est: varietas s austro-sinensis (ex provincia Yunnan ee Henry, 9495 C! 11301 ! ! pe era 4816! necnon siamensis (Kerr, 1 ie BD igen Ropes et DELAvA AYI et RYI austro-sinenses ex provinciis Yunnan (Forrest, ihe !), Szoghuian ( Hone ast t 108 | ! dee !), Kwei- ited a azited 3 Bodinier!), Hupeh (Henry, 266! 4486! 7501!): varietas Dra vinciis Yunnan Delisoony 563! 1825! 1828! “3318! 3833 !), Seach uaa (Farges, 227!), Kwei-chow ie = ni dinier! Bodinier, 2408!), Hupeh (Henry, 6419!): varietas wiatwreh ys Yunnan (Henry 9495 ! 9715!) et Kwei-chow (Ohafenton a and Bodinier!). 41. D. TamarisciriLoRa. JD. pentaphylla, var., Ridley, Mat. Flor. Malay Peninsula, ii. (1907), p. 81. D. pentaphylla, Ridley in Journ. Roy. Asiatic Soc., Straits Br., li. (1911), P. 206. The island of Lankawi off the northern part of the est coast of the Malay Peninsula. A species closely allied to D. payacsds and phon as further study. RISCIFL Tuber ignotum. Caulis supra tenuis, pilis sicmplicibus fives sia “Folia neat ter: nata, pilis sparsis supra induta, nervos majores rufo-hirsuta, inter nervos foseo-hits uta : foliolum medium hen et sa longe acum ibid 6e¢ is 5 ad 2°5 1 gt us Beideis quingie : 'Foliola am medium minus uminata, ad 5 ecm. longa: petioli tuligedns visorum oe 25 mm petioluli 2—3 mm. ~ lees, rufo-hirsuti. ores maris ad 45 in spicas singulas vel binas ad 4 longas dispositi: spi in inflorescen- tiam thamea composit2: axis triangularis, hirsutus: bractecz a an at rsute, ad longee : z similes min o- Sepala lanceolato-ovata, extra hirsuta. 1 mm. longa. Petala spa- ialata, schoo glabra. Stamina 3. fanarca. In principatus Kedah insula ae ttl (Curtie, 25 2539 1 '). Typus in : herbario anne conservatus est. cies ob spicas longas inter affines distincta e D. Prerrer. A species of Lower Cochin-China, differ. ng from D. pentaphylla notably in the thickness and stiffness of its felt of red-brown hairs D, Pier Tubera ignota. sity aculeati, pilis ferrugineis dense piloso-pubescentes, sinistrorsim volubiles ob tg alterna 3-5 foliolata, supra pilis paucis rigidis induta, infra den pubescentia; foliolum medium obovatum, acuminatum, basi acutum, ad 15 cm. latum, pen- a r: te, acumi :, ae fore w ‘icaandiens: ' tees exacte ovata, obtusiuscula, extra pubescentia, - longa. Petala anguste obovata, glabra. obtusa, sepalis breviora. Suati 3, brevia, muthevis rotundatis. Flores feminei in spicas deflexas Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 23 [N.S.] subrigidas 20 cm. longas dispositi: axis dense pubescens pilis rufo- iseis : lanceolate, 8 cm. longe, extra pubescentes. Sepala mm sim mino tatem sabglabreses aor es, 22 mm, longe, apice obtusissimz, basi paulum retus semi-ovato-cordate, 7 mm. late. Semina altero latere Cocr In provincia ste 2 hoa ad Thu-dau-mot et Ben-cat (Pierre, sel oi ‘Bao-chauh et Ton-man fed 7020!) ad Hauh-chui in ripis fluminis Mekong (Harmand, 921), ® loco exacto (Thorel, 356 ! Godefroy!). Typiin Herbario ad Toketas. Pecisioenin conservantur. Ag tioriaig ey Linn., Sp. Plant., (1753), p. 1032: 43. D. Lam., Encyc. Meth., i (1789), p 234: Wil lld., Sp. Plant., v. (1805), p. 789. ‘D. “digitata, Mill. Gard. Dict. (1768), no. 6. D. J Ubium scandens, Jaume-Saint-Hilaire, Expos. Fam. Nat., i. (1805), p. 106. From Western India to the remotest parts of Ceylon and ‘to the islands in the Torres Straits. Variat :— Var. Linnat. Tubera elongat1, carne albida sapida. Planta pie albis priecipue in floribus masculinis plus minusve induta. Folia nitent Var. T ett ae _ ilis, at foliat fere glabra. Var. Sunt. Preceden oe similis at folia erisea nec nitentia. Var. Jacquemonriu. Tubera elongata, carne albida sapida. Plt albi pauci in inflorescentia masculina, sed folia glabra. Bul- bille rotunde. Flores jores. r. CARDONIL. Semana similis, sed folia parce pilis rufis in- a et flores mino Var. SIMPLICIF )LIA ti ebro similis; differt foléis firmi- Var. RHEEDEI. Tubera elonga a, gees albida sapida. Folia siccitate subnigrescentia. ate magnopere elongate. In- florescentia parce pilis albis indut Var. MaLalcA. Tubera barns vat elongata, carne sapida. Folia ior Var. HORTORUM. Tubera rotundata, leviuscula, carne albida sapida. Folia tria, latiora, siccitate nigricantia. Var. communis. Tub ra ba be radiculis rigidis horrentia, — — firma. Foliola terna vel quinata, rufo-pubescen Var. Kussox. Precedenti salle: differt foliis takeeacensibum” Varietas Linnast reperitur in Zeylania et in India australi (Wight in Herb. Wall. No. 5102!). Varietas Tawattesu est Thwaites 25' 2869! ex Zeylania centrali. Varietas Sutt in montibus Himalaicis vulgari : nee non occurrit in monti asianis et Nagensium. Varietas Jac QUEMONTII vulgaris montibus supra litore occidentali Indie Varie ARDONIL preecipue i i tas C. ontibus ind regio Chutia Nagpur. Varietas stmprrorrorta adhuc ex montibus Melghat 6 24 = Journal of the Asiatic Society of see (January, 1914. MMUNIS in regione Gangetic ca et in Burma vulgatissima, necnon aliis partibus ssanere Varietas Kussox precipue sikkimensis est. 44. D. KatkapersHapu. This has the appearance of being a hybrid between D. pentaphylla and D. tomentosa. It has been found, but only rarely, in the region common to both. D. LKAPERSHADII Tuber singulum, variabile, nunc teneru carne album, nunc sera carne fulvo-luteum, itidem nunc vaitinalis plurimis ectum, n nune Caulis, ut Pola est D ntosce #qua- m ovat oeamrage subglabre : eee stenshels minores. Sepala she ae mm. longa. Peta vata, potreeeag ula, ‘5 mm. longa. Sta nai breviora. Flores ai minet ign Inp1a. In collibus Chutie:Nagpurenst bus, Orixensibus, Shevaroi. Ad Rungarit et Biru in districtu Ranchi, (Cardon, 12! Kalka P. ershad, 34389 ! 34390 !), Patharch aki in districtu Balasore, (Kalka Pershad a ! 33825!). In montibus Shevaroi in districtu Salem (Perrottet, 1! = 1). D. Kalkapershadii forsan hybrida sit inter D. a daa et D. tomen- tosam. 45. D. Evmert, Prain et Burkill, in Elmer, Leaflets of Philippine Botany, v. (1913), p. 1594. A species of the Philip- se ngs collected in Luzon in the latitude of Manila, and n Neg .. a Var. VERA: doses Shiga iis Capsularum a'e ad 25 mm. longe. Var. puBia. Folia admodum coriacea. Capsule paululo minores, densissime eh A RS ose. Varietas VERA in provincia Laguna reperitur (Alberto ! Elmer, 8265 1); etiamque in provincia Tayabas (Elmer, 9156!): varietas puBIA provincia Laguna (Ramos, 13520 !). D. se. A fragment exists in the Kew Herbarium oollowet | in the Chinese Province of Kwei-chow (Esquzrol, 970 t) which certainly represents a new species of the section Lasio- phyton. It has capsules like those of D. eer but has a dense tomentum on the back of the leay. mi INZQUIFOLIA, Elmer ex Prain et Burkill in Elm ssiions of Philippine Relate: v. (1913), p. 1595. Philippine Islands: Batanes Islands (Fenix, 3659 !), Mindoro (Merritt, 6796!), and Mindanao (Elmer, 10654 41), Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 25 [NV .8.] 48. D. Cumrinem, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 459. Philippine Islands, rather widely distributed in Luzon. 49. D. Brumer. D. pentaphylla, Blume, age Plant. Jav. i. (1827), p. 20. Collected by Reinwardt in Jav Buumet. Tubera ignota. Caules glabri, parce ac “ida » Ssinis- trorsim volubi'es. Folia alterna, 5-foliata, supra glabra, infra pilis parcis in norvis majoribus induta: foliolum medium basi open. vel subrotundatum, apice abrupte acuminatum, venis pinnatis, ad 12 cm. longum, ad 6 cm. latum: foliola externa asymmetrica 3-nervia, bist duobus parte externa versus medio currentibus: petivlus 5 em. long sparsim hirsutus: petioluli ad 1 cm. Flo-es maris i anicul ma rum ramosam dispositi : rami hirsuto-glabrescentes racemi spiciformes ad 2 gi s fer gineo-hirsuti: bractez in pedicellorum apicibus insidentes, late triangulari-ovate, extra dense ferrugineo-pubescentes, acuminatiusculz, | mm. long : bracteole similes minores. Sepala ovata, obtusa, extra et is etree pilis fulvo-rufis in- duta, 1 mm. longa Petala elliptica, breviora, obtu an 3, brevi- ora: staminodia 3, petalis equilonga. Flores feentines i JAvA. Sine loco exacto, Reinwardt! Typus in Herbario Lugdu- nense conservatur. . D. Scortecuinu, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asia- tic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 455. D, pentaphylla, ee et Curtis, in Journ. Roy. Asiatic Soc., Straits Br., (1902), 66, material is wanted of it, of D. Blumei and of D. Cumingii, in order to define them better than we can do at present. . TRIPHYLLA, Linn., Amcen. Acad., v. (1754), p. 131: ae "Nat. Ve 13, ii. (1791). p . 581; Jacq. Collect. ii. (1788), p : , Encye. ga iit (1789), p- wig Jacq.., Ic. Plant, Rar i. (1790). p ’D. a amoena, Wight (by error for D. dz siiney: Toba bey t. SLI. D. alicxecaa: Roxb. MS. in Herb. propr. D. ‘dam mona, Roxb., Hort. Beng., ee p- bs name only: and Flor. Ind. 2 . (1832), p. 805: Hook. f., Flo Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 2 D. demonum, Kurz, in Prelim. wap, Pegu, (1875), scpotakgs = xxii. D. hirsuta, Roth, Nov. Plant. Sp. ; Bes l p- he Blume, isan Plant. Jav., i. (1827), p. 21. i. Dennst., Schliiss. (1818), p. 33. D. anes: Roth, Nor Pant Sp., (1831), p- 370: Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 397. . macrocarpa , Cat. Lith. , (1832), No. 5100. D. Ss aiisees na Blume, ‘Ream. Plant. “aa at (1827), p. 21. D. pentaphylla, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), 50891. D. tomentosa, Kurz, Prelim. Rep. Pegu, nite appendix . sence D. virosa, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), N D. a, Roxb. ex Wale ‘ C Wall., Cat. eee (1832), No. 5099A. "Helmis ; deemona, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 439. A. hirsuta, Kunth, Enum. v. (1850), p. 438. ZH. dumetorum, Kunth, Enum. v. (1850), — 26 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. p. 436. India to New Guinea, occurring just within South-wes- tern China, and in Formosa. Linn:eus in 1753 applied the name ‘* triphylla ’’ toaform of D. pentaphylla: in 1754 he applied it as we use it here. Variat :— Var. pamMona. Planta pubescens Var. RETICULATA. Planta hispido-pubescens. Var MoLuissima. Planta albo-tomentosa. ietas Da=MONA in India communis est, necnon in partibus minime a pacraens insule Jave. Varietas RETICULATA in peninsula in- sulisque malaicis abundans. Varietas MoLLISSIMA i ropa in Balets orientali na australi, in regno Siamiensi, in insulis malaic Section 6. OpsopHyToNn. 52. D. BULBIFERA, Linn., as Plant., (1753), p. 1035: m., Encyc. Meth., iii. (1789), 232: Bailey, Queensland ), p. 1615: Flor., v. (1902 5 rain, lems Plants, ii. (1903), D. crispata, Roxb., Hort. Beng., (1814), p. 72, name only: and Flor. Ind., iii. (1832), p. decemangularis, Ham. ex Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), no. 5106B. D. fe-nyhs Jod Roxb., Hort. Beng., (1814), p- 72, name only : and Flor. Ind iii. (1832), p 804. D. japonica, Thunb. in Herb propr., in part : Wall., Cat Lith., (1832), no. 5107C and 5107D in part. D. oppositifolia, C ampbell, Econ. Prod. Chutia Nagpur sent to Col. & Ind. Exhib., (1886), p. 7. ¢D. papillaris, Blanco, Flor. Filip., (1837), p. 552. D. pulchella, Roxb., Hort. Rese (1814), . 72, name only: and Flor. Ind., iii. (1832), p F ‘ Thunb., Flor. Jap., (1784), p. 191: Kunth, ce, v. (1850), p- 340, in part: Benth. , Flor. Hongkong., (1861), p. 368; and Flor. Austral., vi. (1873), p 460: Seemann, Flor. Vitiensis, (1873), p. 626: Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 295. D. tamnifolia. Salisb., Parad. Lond., (1806), t. 17. D. Tunga, Ham. ex Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), no. 5107D. Helmia bulbi- fera, Kunth, Enum. v. (1 850), p . 35. From India to the remo- ei parts of the Pacific, ascending the Himalaya to 5000 feet : in Southern China, in Southern Japan, and in Northern Saatenlin Introduced into Tropical America and into Africa. Var. veRA. Tuber et ong acride, breves. Folia supra nitentia. Var. SmmBpHA. Preceden — tubero bulbilliaque. Folia longiora, infra nitentia. Ka is magni. Var. KacHzo. Tuber bulbilleeque vix acride. Tuber magnum, nec elongatum, sparsim radicibus indutum Var. SUAVIOR. eecedenti similis tubero. Bulbille admodum Var. Brrmantca. Varietati swtviori similis; sed tuber «ve, carne 1 Var. SATIVA. Tuber = deest. Builbille magne, fere leves, iridi Folia Var. ELonGaTA. Tuber Gaeatien Var. petTormDEA. Folia triangulari ovata. Le Vol. X, No. 1.] Phe Dioscoreas of the Old World. 27 [NV.8.] Burma et colitur, necnon nuper ndia arietas pete in Australia crescit: a clariss. Manson Bailey descripta, nobis parum no est. Varietas DELT IDEA in insula Hongkong reperitur (Bodinéer, 1310 !). 53. D. Rocersit. This species, like D. bulbifera, var. elongata, has an elongated root. We think it possible that both may be hybrids of “D. bulbitera with species of the section Enantiophyllum. D. Rogersii has been obtained in the Anda- man islands. . Rocrersu. Tuber elongatum, carne album nec amaru Caul glaber, levis, teres, purpureo-mac culatus. Folia alterna, Sreteeihte, ad 13 ad il ervia: ven mina m mm. long», SHiabadies "elliptico ovo olden. Peria nthit nee lobi 6, basi ipsa conjuncti, Sa eR ngi, interiores exterioribus pau o angustiores, crassiores. Stamina 6, tria aliis paululo longiora, in eal pe lobo- rum inserta. Fl feominens pes us. ct ULE eosigore MANIC ripas fluminis Rablikchokal, Rogers, 37! e vix D.vulbtfere ee sit. Typus in herbario Horti Regii eine tae conservatur. 54. D. Branpisu. This appears to us to be a hybrid be- tween D. bulbifera and D. glabra. It was obtained by the late Sir Dietrich Brandis in some Burris locality in Burma. D. Branpisir. Tuber ignotum. Caulis glaber, levis, teres, sinis- trorsim volubilis. Folia alterna, glabra, “pon 2 acuminata, & 8 cm. onga, ad 7 cm. la undarie tr mm aten et subrotundate. Flores beresxed ignot In Burma inferiori, loco non tics, Brandis! Typus in orbanie’ horti botanici Galedthinais conservatur. D. puncTata, R. Brown, Prod. se? ee Holl., Agios p. 294, in part: Kunth, Enum., (1859), 390: Benth., Flor. Austral., vi. (1873), p. 46. Obtained i in fhe nor- thern part of Queensland more than a century ago, but not since. It may be a hybrid o of D. bulbifera with D. transversa ; and if so, a Sa may be made between it and D. bulbifera, var. elonga, ee ya ENan TIOPHYLLUM. . Baratas, Decne., in Rev. Hortic., ee 4, iil. (iste: p- ‘a8, and iv. (1855) p. 69. D. decaisneana, Carriére, 28 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. n Rev. Hortic., 1865, p. 111. D. glabra, F. v. Muell., Select Plants for Extra- a-Trop. Countries, Ind.. edit. ( 1880), p- 100. D. japonica, Pépin in Mém. Soc. Imp. et Cent. d’ Agric. (1854), LAD. a sita, Thu opposita, Siebold in Verhandl. Bat. Genootsch., xii. (1830), p.14. D. oppositifolia, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 390, in part : Kawakami, List Plants Formosa, (1910), p. 122. China from Yunnan and Kw angtung to Pechili, generally cultivated; also in Formosa, the Island of Quelpart off Corea, and in Japan to Al”. . Ut een experimentally grown in Europe and in India. Hackel has raised hybrids between it and D. japonica. 57. D. poRyopHora, Hance, in Ann. Sc. Nat., Ser. 5, v. (1866), p. 244: C. H. Wright, in Journ. Linn. Soc. Bot., XXXxVi. (1903), p. 91. D. Rosthornii, Diels, in Engl. Bot. “Jahrb., xxix. (1900), p. 261. D. Swinhoei, Rolfe, in Journ. Bot., xx. (1882), p. 359. Formosa and the Chinese Provinces of Kwei- chow and Hupeh. It Pc probable that it may be a depau- perate form of D. Bata D. saponitca, Thunb., Flor. Jap., (1784), x 51: Sicbold in Verhandl. Bat. Genootsch., xxli. (1830), p. 14: Makino, Ill. Flor. Jap., i. (1889), t. 22. D. Batatas, Pailleux et Bois, ee d’un Curieux, (1899), p. 231. Japan, com- monly to . 37° , China in ‘the south and west, and in the Naga Hills e India. Variat :— var. VERA. Spicarum axes tenues. var. TENUIAXON. Spicarum axes tenuissimi. Varietatam TENUIAXON ex monte Omei in ee Szechuen attulit Faber. Varietas vera per regionem totam reperit 59. D. LuzonENsis, Schauer in Nova Acta Nat. Cur xix. suppl. i. (1843), p. 444. ? D. divaricaia, Blanco, Flor. Filip.; (1837), p. 797. Philippine islands: common in Central and Southern Luzon, and found also in the ae of Palawan. A species well marked by the size of its flowe D. PEPEROIDES, Prain et Burkill in Elmer, Leaflets of Philippine Botany, v. (1913), p. 1597, Luzon and Tonkin. It is closely allied to D. luzonensis; but has much smaller flowers. Better material from Tonkin may show that the plant which we possess from thence, which we here call a variety of D. peperoides, may be a different species. Variat :— Var. veRA. Folia exacte cordata. Var. saciTTironia. Folia minora, ad 7 cm. longa, hastato- sagitta Var. aNcunaTa. Folia cordato-sagittata. Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 29 LW. 8. Hs Var reperitur in Insula Luzon, provinciis Rizal Hiaentk Mrabiee 18821 7007 ! ners 6512! Elmer, 6399! 6400 N, Varietas SAG FOLIA in provincia pS lentes (Ramos, 8178 !). Varietas ANGULATA in Tonkin (pelaabe: 279 1). 61. ICOLOR, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. 7 (a008). 449. China, in the province of Yunnan. The shape of the capsule is very unusual. 62. D. asprersa, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 447. China, in the province of Yunnan. D. spicata, Roth, Nov. Spec. Plant., (1821), p. 571: Fook, f., Flor . Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 291 ; and in Trimen, Ha ndb. Flor. Ceylon, vi. (1898), p. 227, in chief part. Southern India and Ceylon. Variat :— Var. PARVIFOLIA. Folia parva, circiter 5 cm, longa. Var. ANAMALLAYANA. Folia majora, ad 10 cm. longa. Varietatam ee ex ee australi Zeylanie attulit Thwaites! Varietas ANAMALLAYANA reperitur in montibus — et ravancoricis et in Mekcinblion Cochin Coimbatoreque Tinnevelliq 64. : MES eons Thwaites, Enum. ees Zeyl., (1864), p. D. spicata, Hook. f., in Trimen, Handb. Flor. Ceylon, iv. "(1898), p- 277. in part. Gayle. ee and the district of Ma r. This yam seems to be common in the ma of Suiiens near Kandy, and all ‘be hacudaoiyn eo have been familiar with it; but Trimen left notes on it i Peradeniya herbarium under the name of D. spicata ‘which were absorbed by Sir Joseph Hooker in his description of the allied D. spicata. 65. D. Triment. OD. spicata, var. 8, Thwaites, Enum. Plant. Zeyl., Shee p. 326. Collected in fruit by Thwaites in Central Ceylon IMENU. Tuber ignotum. Caulis glaber, _ tenuis, inermis. a is rotundata, glabra, ad 8 cm. longa 4 ta, 7-nervia area ia ervorum latersiacn prim p nceolata vene secundarize i prominentes: rete distinctum: petiolus ad 4 em. longus. Flores ignoti. Capsule basi acute, apice acuminate, 35 mm. longe: ale semicirculares, 25 mm. longe, 15 mm. late, colore fulve. haeoneae circumcirca alata gat fusco-castanea EYLANIA.—Ad Ambagamowa, Thwaites, 3119! et sine loco, Thwattes, aa 66. D. Wuientm, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p- 291. In the extreme south of of India in the district o Tinne- 30 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1914. velli. This and the three preceding species are all closely allied to D. a and may be regarded as sharing a common origin wit D. oppositiroLia, Linn., Spec. Plant., (1753), p. oe es Pare in his Flor. Zeyl. , (1747), no 361; Hook. f Flo if. i ee on D. elliptic, Thunb. in Herb. propr. JD. ovata, Thunb. in Herb. propr., in part. This species occurs commonly throughout India oath of the Ganges, and in Ceylon. It lary only, and sometimes in special seca inflorescences. On one hand it finds close allies in D. spicata, D. intermedia, D. Trimenti and D. Wightii: on the caine it approaches D. triner- via, and more remotely D. pyrifolia. We define three varie- ties. Variat — Var. Tawarresit, Folia pubescentia, lanceolato-ovata vel late ovata, siccitate brunnescentia. Inflorescentie marts axis copiose ns Var. Linnai, Folia glabra, late lanceolata vel ovata. Inflores- centie maris axis elongatus Var. DUKHUNENSIS. Folia, mrs iy late ovata. Spice ice maris axillares vel rarissime in inflorescenta aggregate, glabrz vel fere glabra Va a TuHwAITEsIi zeylanica (Thunberg! fost 147! 219! Thwai- tes, 2303! Gardner, 898!). Varietas Linnai reperitur in Zeylania Walker, ! Rottler!) et in tT Malabar (Hohenacker, 597!) et in districtu Tianevell ( Wight 41), arietas DUKHUNENSIS in omni- bus partibus montanis hccsee peninsulz Indiz reperitur. 68. D. opcunnata, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 293. Ceylon, without precise locality. This species con- : on k D. oppositifolia, and its obcuneate leaves are shaped as those of D. spicata sometimes are: but the leaves of D. spicata are much firmer. It has not been possible to give this species a natural place in the key. HASTIFOLIA. Nees in Lehm., Plant. Preiss., ii. sis); 'p. 33: Benth., Flor. Austral., vi. (1873 ), p- 461. Found near the western ddaat of Australia between lat. P3° and 27°S - TRANSVERSA, R. Brown, Prod. Flor. Nov. Holl. iets p.- "06: Benth., Flor. Austral., vi. (1873), p. 460. %D. punctata, Thozet, Notes on roots used as food, (1866), p pp. 7 and Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 31 [N.S.] 12. Found near the eastern coast of Australia between Lat. 34°S and Torres Straits ; and in northern Australia 71. D. crrrwosa, Loureiro, Flor. Cochinch., (1790), p. 625: Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 401. D. rhipogonioides, Oliv. in Ic. Plant., (1889), t. 1862: Henry, in Kew Bull., 1895, p. 230. D. camphorifolia, Uline MS. in herbariis nonnullis. Tonkin to Hong-Kong and in Formosa. A very marked species, peculiar in the colouring matter of its tubers. Loureiro’s name, were it not for a specimen preserved in the British Museum, would be unrecognisable. 72. D. Watuicui, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 295. D. oe as oe Plant., (1753), p. 1033, i in small Circars, then occurring again through Burma and in the hills south of the Brahmaputra Valley. Variat :— Var. VERA. Capsule vix glau Var. CHRISTIEI. Capsule Senta Varietas VERA eka in partibus Indie peninsularis orientalibus : varietas CHRISTIEI in Burm 3. D. PULVEREA. Yunnan, in south-western China. Per- haps this may prove to be no more than a variety of the last : but until more material is available, its oblique very glaucous = and rather firmer leaves render it desirable to separate PULVEREA. Tuber ignotum. Caules robusti, glabri, inermes parte superiori, glauci. Folia Simic toca exacte cordata vel late cordata, apice acuminata, flavo-marginata, ad 13 em. lata, ad 13 cm Scab apsule in rhachei rigido deflexo ad 20 cm. longo profertx, es rigid, apice retuse, ad 30 mm. longe: ala semi- obcordata, 25 . longa, 12 mm. ata. Semina inequaliter circum- ca alata, ala Saitaana a AustRALis. In Provincia Yunnan, ad Mengtze, alt. 4600 ped. (Reng 6 9288 !). 74. D. precrprens, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p- 293. D. glabra, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), Nos. 5105G, 5105H. D. rotundifolia, Wall. MS. in Herb. propr. In the Naga Hills and through Burma to northern Siam and Laos; occurring just within the Chinese province of Yunnan. D. orpiroutata, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. (ison. p. 292: Ridley, ‘Mat. Flor. Malay Penins., ii. ae 32 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1914. p. 82. D. glabra, Ridley and Curtis, in Journ. Roy. Asiatic en , Straits Br., xxxviii. (1902), p. 66,in part. D. sativa, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832) No. 5108C. Through the Malay Peninsula to Sumatra and Borneo. A species very well marked by the angle at which the male spikes stand. 76. D. Zottinceritana, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 384: Miq., Flor. Ind. Bat., suppl., (1860), pp. 229, 611. Nicobar Islands, the south of the Malay Peninsula, Sumatra, Java and perhaps in the Kei Islands. It is nearly allied to D. orbiculata. 77. D. anauina, Roxb t. Beng., (1814), p. 72, name only: and Flor. Ind. , iii, Eaeaaice 293. D. Combi ‘lium, Ham. in Herb. Wall. pro pr. D. pales. Blume, Enum. Plant. Jav., i. (1827), p. 21, very inadequately described. D. spinosa, all., Cat. Lith., (1832), Nos. 5103G, 5103H. India, in the a and J 78. D. Listeri, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, vi. (1903), p. 452. Upper. ee and the ad- joining hills. A species very close to D. angui D. PotyotapEs, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. ase, p. 294: Ridley, Mat. Flor. Malay Penins., ii. (1907), D. nummularia, Moritzi, Syst. Verzeichn. d. Zol- fae gesammelt, Pflanzen, (1846), Db. OZ: en Syst. Verzeichn., (1854), p. 68. D. pubera, Prain et Burkill, ex ce aa iar. Syst. Verzeichn. Lief. = pore genus No, 1252. Malay Peninsula, Sumatra and Jav. 80. D. TRInzRvI4, Roxb. MS. in Herb. propr., but not ex Wall. D. glabra, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), Nos. 5105D, 51055. D: oo Hook. f. , Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 292, in part ERVIA, Roxb. Tuber alte descendens, ad 1 ongum, carne molle supra aurantiaca infra alba. Caulis tenuis, pe ig basi glaber, apice ghia dems: dextrorsim volubilis, Folia terna, vel suprema in longi, pubescentes, angulati: bractex ovate, acuminate, subglaben, 1 long: bracteole similes, minores. Sepala triangulari-ovat Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 33 (W.S.] obtusa, ineurva, glabra, 1 mm. longa. Petala ers er -ovata, sepalis breviora, glabra. Stamina 6, brevia. Flor 8 feminet 10—16 in spicas plerumque simplices ad 15 em. longas deposit is p bractosz ovate, acuminate, fere br ge Sepa/a tr gulari-ova'ta, obtusa assa, glabra Petala similia 5 mm. longa, minora, Staminodit minuta. Capsule griseo-fusex, rufo-maculate, glabre, pedicello incluso 15 mm. monion.< ale latiores quam semicircu- A ee. iy MONTIBUS ASSAMICIS ARAKANENSIBUSQUE. In districtu Now wgonz d Lumding, (Burkill, 35309! Kalka Pershad, 35575 !). In districtu ‘tenia ad Alni in ripis fluminis Barak, (Gage !). In montibus Khasianis ad fluminem ayaa (Hooker 7. & Thomson !), sine loco, (Mann! ae oor 549!). In montibus cacharicis ad Haflong, (Shaitk Mokim, 184! 273! Ballantine, 31830 ! Craib, 13! Burkill, 33011! 33022 ! 33024 !), ad ge lsesbpe™ (Keenan !). In districtu Chittagong, sine loco, (Bruce in Herb. Wall. 5 05D !). In districtu Sandoway, sine loco, (Mus. R.E.P. 15034 !), ieelaserae sine locis, (Booth in Herb. Nuttall | Rorburgh ! D. pyrirotia, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 384: Miq., Flor. Ind. Bat., iii. (1855), p. 571: Hook. f.. Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), D- 292; Ridley, Mat. Flor. Malay Pen. ins., ii. (1907), p. . cornifolia, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 38: Ridley, Mat, Flor. Malay Penins., ii, (1907), p- Sl, in chief part. D. Diepenhorstii Mig., Flor. Ind. Bat., suppl. (1860), p. 611. D. ferruginea, Thun b. in Herb. propr. Pl i Hassk. in Tijds. Nat. Gesch., ix. (1842), D. ornata, Wall. in Herb. propr. D. preangeriana, Uline ex Harms in Her gd , Hallier in Herb, Lugd. The ecom- mo Dios in the Malay Peninsula: in Sumatra, Java and Borneo ; and occu Te also in Cambodia and Timor-laut : erroneously recorded as having been obtained in the Enea islands by Cuming. Cuming’s plant came from Malacca Variat : Var. FERRUGINEA, 3990 siccitate infra ferruginea, plerumque copiose _ Cabin me Var. VE vlia niouiaans —_ grisea, venis castaneis plerumque co er m-lleo- flavescenti Var. i standin rst. Folia datiebe infra grisea, pilis fulvis nisi ad sc Senora petioli absentibus —— FERRUGINEA frequens oat per regionem: varietas GRISEA ietas DizPENHORSTII reperitur in Gainaae ra et Borneo et aah ergs et Cambodia. 82. D. Lonerr. Found in the island of Luzon, in the districts about the latitude of Manila. Lowert. Pd rots enta, a nobis haud visa. Caules aculeis » glabri. Folia’ cpsiaitin vel s subopposita, pa hastata barbis divergeatibu vel bese to-cordata, vel subovata, plus minusve marginata, ad longa 2 cm. lata supra bairba, AL ex barba ad barbam 4 cm, Ciro 7-nervia: area media a nervorum |ateralium primo pare : n raj lata : spicue: petiolus ad 4 cm. longus. Flores maris 40 in spicas paten- tes ad 4 cm. longas dispositi; spice ips vel in ramos aphy llos vel ad 34 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. axillas foliorum composite: axis angulatus, gud peachow ovate tenuissime, re z, incurvate, rufo-lineolate, 1 mm. longe -bractenks picainedeciion Sepala triangulari-ovata, obtusa, mangine hyalina, 1:25 mm. longa. Petala sepalis breviora, obovata, c crassa. Stamina 6: anther nesta ee. sie entis vince nge. Flores jeinines in spicas post anthesin ad 14 c ongas compositi: axis aie er ag Mateo te ovete-sin tin Se pale triangular-ova ta, cra ad onga. Petala similia, minora. Capsul immature pace gplenciae Pre Beep -2 quam semicirculare 3. NSULA LUZON bee again ang Prope Mangilet in provincia Bataan, (Curran, 5465!). In provincia Rizal ad San Francisco del-Monte haud procul a a Manil la, A ea 1885! 1886 !), atque ad erence (Loher, 1899 !). In provincia Morong ad Antipolo, (Ramos, 6!). D. Soror, Prain et Burkill in Elmer, Leaflets of Philippine Botany, v. (1913), p. 1598. A mountain species of the Philippine islands, found in Luzon. Variat :— Var. VERA. Capsule non ee, yar GLAvCA. Capsule glau Varietatem apt oo. ous Foder haud procul a Nozogaray in provincia Beluee 84. D. Foxworraytr, an ally of the two preceding species and of the two following, which has only been Rollested in the Lamao Forest, Luzon D. Foxwortuyr. Tuber aaa aes non visum Caules 3—5 m i ori inermes, glabri, teretes, virides. Folia epplciee vel subopposita, ovato-hastata vel subo , acuminata, glabra, parum marginata, ad 13 longa, lata et ni arbas, 7-nervia: area media a nervorum lateraliu pare terminata ° ta: ven poeon Dreier po trajectin, inconspicut petio lus ad 5 em. longus. Flor ad 25 in spic eof roche A a spice ipse in ramos scotia ad 2 20 < cm. para composite : angula- tus, glaber: tex ovate, acuminate, tenuissime, reflex: | San teo- lz similes minores. Ala @ conoidea ex basi triangulari. Sepala quadrato-ovata, obtusa, rufa, nec marginibus tenuia, m. a. Petala obovata, sepalis minora. iN 6: anthere subrotunde, filamentis ues ge. Flores feminet ignot uZON.—In sylvis ad Lamao ieee Bataan (Foxworthy, 1558 !), 85. Seemann. D. nummularia, See Flor. Vitiensis, ee. p. 308. ?D. divaricata Sikdenad Plantes Usuelles des Tahitiens, (1864), p. 10. ? D. pirita, Nadeaud, Fiji and perhaps Tahiti. Better material of this species is required in order to ascertain exactly how far it differs from D.nummularia EMANNIT, Tubera Srrclents.: cylindrica, elongata, metralia vel ultra, teak hominis crassa. Caulis basi copiose armatus, ad 4 mm crassus, striatus, glaber. Folia opposite, glabra, ovato-cordata vel | ovata, vol infera sagittatrcordate, acuminata, ad the em. longa, ad 9 ¢ , a Pp lateralium terminata elliptica, Sli cha ail had POR Sy ERS Le ee ee PLD te ene Te fiery At age Sopa g eA LONE NE IE teen RL Ne a BO ee eee eae En ee (APR TE an Te Sah eae oy aay ee ee Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 35 [V.8.] acuminate : ven secundarise plus minppdt: regulariter trajecte, = iolus glaber, ad 5cm.lon Flores maris in spicas aggregatas arilles 3—6-nas dispositi : i er ad 3 em, it circiter 25-flore : axis sons nisi basi, ubi pili perpauci : bractez ovate, ee deflexz, resse, 1 mm. longe: bracteole similes, minores. Sepala fere rain. mucronulata, 1:25 mm. longa. Petala crassiora, elliptico-spathulata, 1 mm. longa. Stamina * petalis equilonga: anther Abi sgl equilonge. Flores feminet ignot In NSULAE ‘mare S.—Frequens, (Seemann, 628! Graeffe '). Yorsan etiam in insula Tahit 86. D. Nummouxaara, Lam., Encye. Meth., iii. (1789), lume, Enum. Plan t. Jav., i. (1827), p. 21 in part: tentuin, xix. (1898), p. 312. Celebes, the Moluccas, Philip- pine islands, New Guinea, and across the Torres Straits to in Eastern Malaya, apparently being as common there as D. pyrifoliais in Western Malaya. D. pyrifolia and D. nummularia or the most part are distinguished without difficulty by their wisklind having different venatio Was ERA. de cio Mere glau Var. pope Capsule plus caine glaucer. Varietas vERA late Varietas GLAvoa reperitur in Luzon (Elmer, 5638! Hallier !). 87. D. Merritt, ae geal in Elmer, Leaflets of Philippine Bot., v. (1913), p A species of the alliance of the preceding six, which ae seca leaves. It has been collected by Merrill on Mount Halcon in Mindo oro, and by Elmer on Mount Apo in Mindanao, Philippine islands. D. aR A slender species of the oe inland. so far only ised by Loher at Montalban in Luz GRATA. Tuber ign aules ’ striati, i mm. diametro. Folia alterna, lineari-lanceolata, equaliter n 8 j glabra, versus apicem attenuata, ad 8 cm. longa, ta, 5- nervia: area media a nervorum lateralium pare o terminata lineari- ‘anceolata = secundarie in rete indis‘incte; petiol glaber, tenuis, | longus. Flores maris spicas foliis breviores positi: axes rosei, param angulati, glabri, ad 26 longi: alabas- tra rosea, usve tri nlagonoide bractee parve, 5 m longe, reflexe, takes cute. epala roseo-tincta, ova obtusa, ‘75 mm. — Petala minora, abneasas crassa. Stamina 6, petalis breviora: anthere filamentis equi ee onge. lores faminet spicas pe sonen aisposits. Capsule apice truncate, Sait copcoraeer eg ad 25 - longe: ale latze, oblique yohindaiee, 20 mm. longe, 15 mm slate. Luzon PHILIPPINENSIUM. Ad Montalban in provincia aaa peters Luzon, (Loher, 7012! 7017 1). Wart, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Kanga iv. Sos p- 457. A wide climbing species of the 36 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [January, 1914. forests of Assam, and of the hills on either side of the Brahmaputra valley, as far west as Sikkim. 90. D. arppirLtora, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., A p. 294: Ridley, Mat. Flor. Malay Penins., ii. 900), p. 8 D. glabra, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), No. 5105B, in part. arn Peninsula, Juve: Celebes and the Moluccas. 91. D. Forpim, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 450. D. Batatas, Benth., Flor. Hong- 2. D. BELOPHYLLA, Voigt, Hort. Suburb. Cale., (1845), p. 652: Prain, Bengal Plants, ii. atete . 1067. D. deltoidea, verte Punjab Plants, (1869), 128, in small part. D. del , Baden-Powell, Punjab Paine: . (186 8), p. 259, i oe “D. glabra, Ho ok. f., Flor. Brit End: , Vi. (1892), p. 294, in part: Collett, Flor. Simlensis, (1902) a i. Sa iia Royle ex Voigt, Hort. Suburb. Cale., (1845), ¢ 65S. 8p. , Aitchison, Cat. Punjab and Sind Plants, (1869) p . 148. A species demanding less rain than most of the et: ‘met with along the Himalaya towards the west as far as the vale of Kashmir, and found also in the Salt Range: eas cohen its distribution, as far as is known, terminates in Sikkim outh- s it occurs on hill crests as far as the Nilgiri Hills: once it has been obtained in the Khasia Hills. BELOPHYLLOIDES, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. wane ie Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 448. The eastern parts of aa rica China. 94. D. Lepcuarum. A curious species which the Lep- chas of Sikkim value as food. D. LercHarum. Tubera 2—4, divergentia, ex parte basali vix I mm. diametro 5—19 em. longa oe at apice rotundata, grisea: caro mollis, alba, esculenta. Caules inerm glabri, striati vel subteretes. 6 em. lata) 7-nervia: area media a nervorum lateralium pare primo terminata > ven fedsadaric irregulariter suboblique trajectze, su pra indistinct, infra satis distinctw: petiolus ad 10 em. longus, sepissime ies zequilo ngus. lores maris ad 40 in spicas 15—20 mm. longas binas ad axillas Ecorkihs oppositarum dispositi : spice ipse in ramos ap nyllos composi axis conspioue angulatus, glaber bractex triangulari-ovate, von xe#, acuminate, longe bracteole similes nisi breviores. Alabastra obovoidea. Sepala obovata basi lata, crassa, 1°25 mtm. longa, Petala obov ta, basi angusta, sepa- lis paululo minora, crassa. Stamina 6: antherx filamentis duplo mino- Vol. X, No. 1.) The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 37 es. Flores feminei ad in spicas dependentes ad 25 cm. longas dinpcaled= ats sa Pre rhabee bractee late ovat, tenues. Sepala triangularia, Shas , Obtusa, 1:5 mm. longa. Petala obovata, apice . -. biog , 2, a » circulares, 20 mm. longe, 18 ceteee satan ataneahs sahacelaans, Semina loculo conformia: ala tite tase Inp1a.—In montibus Himalaicis selsnialitine ad 3000 ped. alt., in regionibus sub-montanis Bengalensibus Assamicisque Birmanicisque. In locis plurimis districtus rt e.g. Ryang (Ribu! Kali! Rees; Rebong (Kali!), Silake (Ribu!), Mungpu, (Hartless, 91 Gage, 34214! 24216! Ribu, 342! See Sorel ea, 34207 !). Labdah (Rus acl !), “Gielle Kola (Russell !), Pashok (Lister !), Tunkling (Lister 1), actrees (Lister !). w ms !), L i ] ean districtu Lakhimpur, ad Niagaon ae Dibrugarh, { Burkill, 32611 !), ad tig (Burkill, 35769! 32666!), ad Saikhowa (Burkill, 35797 !), ad Kobo (Burkill, 35905! 35906 !). In districtu Cachar prope Haflong ip eatin 318°8!). In districtu Bhamo, prope Bhamo (Burkill, 22843 ! 26538 ! Variat :— Var. Folia tenuia. Alex c go head equaliter rotundate. Phebe 2 _— sine colore rubra. Vide Var. BHAMOICA, see S doris fieaieeks Ale capsularum oblique. Planta sicca rufesce arietas BHAMOICA adhur aap vi est in pier Bhamo Sao prope Bhamo (Burkill, 22808! 22814! 22820! 22822! 22824! pig ac 22828 ! 228291 ag ! 22842 !) ubi pee cum D. Hamitionit : t forsan ejusdem hybrida 95. D. q@uasra, Roxb., Hort. ue: Ec Rs 72, name only; and Flor. Ind., iii. " (1832), p , Flor Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 294, in chief abel io Se cae , Ham in Wall., Cat. Lith,, (1832), No. 5105 F. D. oreniins, "Ridley in Engl. Bot. Ja hrb., xliv. (1910), p. 528. D. laurifolia, . 83. ), p. 66. D. Hort. Beng., (1814), p. 72, name only, and Flor. Ind., iii. (1832), p. 72. D. salicifolia, Blume, Enum. Plant. Jav., i. (1827), p. 23, inadequately described. D. Wallichii, ok. f., Flor. Brit Ind., vi. (1892), p. 295, in small part. India, south of che Ganges in the moister parts, the Binaiays from ‘Central ries eastwards, the plains of Bengal, and Assam, in Burma, Sian ssa China, ¢ the Malay Peninsula and the Malay Islands aa ward to Variat :— Var. GRISEA, Folia ovate siccitate infra grisea, velutina. ar. SALICIFOLIA. Folia lineari-lanceolata vel lanceolato-sagittata, subcoriacea, siccitate ge grisea. Var. HasTirotia. Folia | ineari-lanceolata, basi pe soon ot subcoriacea. 38 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. Var. VERA. Folia ovata, tenuia, infra glaucissima, siccitate rufes- centia Fac: LONGIFOLIA. Folia lanceolato-ovata, ad 12 em. longa, ad 4 em. Var. TENUIFOLA. Folia lineari-lanceolata vel lanceolato-sagittata tenuissim ietas GRISEA in Tenasserim, et per Peninsulam Malaicam et raro in easels Sumatra Javaque reperitur, ubi versus D. pyrifoliam transitum priebet. _ Vario tas SALICIFOLIA est D. salicifolia, setcses eo al grac e) , nee Borne Varietas HAsTIFOLIA Andamanica est (Rogers, 278 1). Varictas VERA 2 363 ecw occurrit, nec non in Indo-China et regno Var ONGIFOLIA se at in China australi (Henry, 13540 !), et in Indo- Chi ‘Halones. 298 ! ! Thorel, 287!). Varietas TENUIFoLIA burmanica se (Kurz, 2631! Barbie, 22656 !). . D. vexans, Prain et Burkill, in reine Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 446. Andaman islands where it gener- ally replaces the common Indian D. glabra. 97. D. BReviperioLata. Apparently common in Indo- China. D, BRevirerionata, Tuber ignotum. Caules asperi, glabri, striati. role: ovata, acuminata, opposita, glabra, marginata, ad 10 em. longa, em. lata, 5-nervia: area media a nervorum lateralium pare pe es tra conspicue: petiolus brevis, it e8 as em. longas dispositi: spice i ramos aphy llos longos composite; axis zigzag, glaber, angulatus: bractee ovate, acuminate, fo a racteole similes, Al a ubgl Sepala ovatoc-rotunda, obtusissiina, 1-25 longa, copiose rufo-lineolata. Petal Ito minora, crassiora, obo Ailey £1 onga Stamina 6, i qualia: anthere filamenta exquantes. Flores femin tin spicas singu vel binas dispositi: spic p in ramos aphyl S$ compositz: bractez ovato-lanceolate, acut Sepal triangulari-ovata, crass Petala suborbicularia, breviora. Staminodia min perminuta, apsule parve, abre, breviter pedicellate, supra cordatz : ale latiores quam semicirculares, 15 mm. longe, 13 mm latex, earns rufo-aspersze HIN-CHINA INF FERIOR, ET CaMB DI Sia In aby mors Weta Lopeiastaneus! ad Vikan, (Loco fe : inet, 19821), a 1 Cayi- jerre, O ! Ou-yiem, , (Lecom mpte & Finet, 1926!). In insula Pulu Condore, (Germain, 49!). In insula Phu = c Cambodiensi ad fessor (Godefr oy, 849!), Ad Nawng-kaw, Sriracha n litore siamensi, Kerr, 2047 !). ha Sst in herbario ad ’ Lutetias 5, an eaieting necnon ad Kew conservan 98. D. Benytuamit, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 449. Hongkong D. MyriantTHa, Kunth, Enum., v. (1850), p. 382. Dd, eae Blume, Enum. Plant. Jav., i. (1827), p- 22, very inadequately described. D, esses Botnet Uline in Mededeel. van s’Lands Plantentuin, xix. (1908), p. 312. Java, Celebes, the Mohiaeus and the Philippine islands. ‘ Spi ide epee wr en EE ee ee ee eee E ; PY F y of & 3 Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 39 [N.S.] 100. D. PERsimivis, Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 454. South-western China, south- eastern China and Tonkin. 101. D. Hamitonu, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind. , iv. (1892), p. 295, in chief part: Prain, Bengal Plants, ii. (1903), p. 1067. D, acutangula, Ham. in Herb. Wall. D. acutanguliflora, Steud. : aLaTa, Linn.; Spec. Plant., (1753), p. 1033. D. atropurpurea, D. globosa, D. purpurea and D. rube , Roxb., Flor. Ind., iii. (1832), pp. 797-800. D. Bicantaca, D. Devipata, D. Hurchusia and D. octangularis, Ham. in Herb. Wall. Culti- vated throughout the Tropics, wherever the rainfall is sufficient. It is certainly of eastern origin and was perhaps derived from D. Hamiltonit. Inthe Western Himalaya races exist, here classed by the shape of the tuber and by their colour, knowing only those which are commonly cultivated in Lower Bengal: and Hamilton followed Roxburgh’s lead. Wider knowledge makes it inconvenient to maintain Rox burgh’s and Hamilton’s species even as varieties. D. alata sometimes flowers and very rarely t : ‘ : o races which most of all persist, the others being soon grubbed up by wild animals. Variat :— Var. Tarr. Vene in pagina inferiore foliorum conspicue. Var. veRA. Vene minus conspicuz. Varietas Tari colitur in Kamaon et in partibus adjacentibus mon- tium Himalaicorum. 163. D. Laurirouia, Wall., Cat. Lith., (1832), no. 4111: Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. (1892), p. 293. D. oppositifolia, Curtis, Flowering Plants and Ferns Penang, (1894), p. 83. Malay Peninsula, being common in the island of Singapore, 104. D. Havitanpu. D. cornifolia, Ridley, Mat. Flor. Malay Penins., ii. (1907), p. 81, as regards the fruit only. 40 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (January, 1914. Borneo, in Sarawak. A coriaceous ally of the preceding species. D. Haviranpi. Tubera ignota. Caules glabri, nisi basi in ermes, obtuse a uke. virides vel rufo-virides, dextrorsim volubiles. Folia alterna, atic satis coriacea, latissime elliptica vel fere orbiculata, apice abrupte acuminata, basi plus minusve cordata, supra nitentia nervis venisque modice prominentibus ( frien nervis modie @ prominentibus, a ad 0 em. lon t ia: i i rete — conspicue: petiolus longus Flores maris in spicas erectas 6 cm. lungas Papas Sayers aoe spice ipse in ramos aphyllos Nopendeittes te! sa em. wee er eee axis ans ager Om bractee ovate, acum 2, xin repress, tee: bracteole similes elt? ie Leng Alabas a ibe sited Bepuile ala i lata _— apice rotundata, rufo-brunnea, | mm. longa. Petala satis crass arinata, ore pees breviora. Stamina 6, biseriatim in basin reeling inserta : ots . longa: cneheew paululo longi- ores. lor sid bony igno Taos MALAICA “vorbeva. Es.—Borneo, haud procul a Kuchin in principatu Sark maint (Haviland, 1816 !), pase sine loco, (Ridley mercena- rius, 154! Merrillia icepeietia ks 310! 386! 842!). Billiton, (Riedel !). Banca, (Horsfield '). 105. D. WarspurGiaNna, Uline ex Koorders, in Mededeel. van s’Lands Plantentuin, xix. (1898), p. 313, name only: Prain et Burkill, in Journ. Asiatic Soc. Bengal, iv. (1908), p. 456. Celebes 106. D. peruexa, Hook. f., Flor. Brit. Ind., vi. ope p 293: et Mat. Flor. Malay Penins., i ii. (1907), p. 83. repanda, Blume, Enum. Plant. Jav., i. (1827), p. 22. ae Peninsula, eas and Java. Section 8.—STENOCOREA. 07. D. STENOMERIFLORA. A curious — occurring in the Malay Peninsula, with stamens showing an obvious affinity to the genus Stenomeris. The only male plant seen by us is preserved in the British Museum of Natural History, South Kensington. Another bridge between Dioscorea and ERIFLORA. Tuber ignotum. Caulis glaber, pate nisi asi, comer atrintiis purpureo-viridis, scan It., dext — volubilis. Folia alterna, coriac labra, eiidpsiga, ‘apice te acuminata, infra modice cordata vel majora sagittata barbis rotundatis ga, ad ll ¢ lata Vv a pare primo conte lateralium terminata fere conformis fol propinguitate ne vorum ad marines: ven secundarix oblique trajectie, matgines plus minusve indurati : lek Bo pa supra canialicaihi, ad 5 em. longus. Flores maris racemos spithameos Vol. X, No. 1.] The Dioscoreas of the Old World. 4] [N.S. nune axillares simplices solitarios vel binos nunc in ramos breves eee los producti: axis glaber: bractee ovato-lanceolate, ongse Perianthii maris tubus 1 mm. lo ongus. Sepala triangulari-ova ta, - obtusa, rufo-maculata. Petala sepalis ve eet ovata, = , Tufo-maculata. ina 6: filamenta supra bas ultum incrassata, dein incurvata : i didyme. f inet i emos cm. longos singulos vel binos vel ternos axillares sa ime a glaber, ee cn omic “mira lanceolato-ovate, sca brunnee, ad 1 - longi: pedicelli 5 mm. longi. Perian ium vinidy luteum : bea 1 sith. ‘longus, externe 6-carinatus. Sepala 3mm. longa, PrnInsutaA Mazaica.—Perak, Larut 2000 - alt., meroenarius Kingit, 4160! 5152! 6693! 67461). Selangor, Batu Tiga, (Ridley !). —, Island, Drsvpeoniel ag rind !). Speci les distinctissima, eer anthe $s corn nutas nter quasi med ians Perianthii tubus floris Rete inter Dioscoreas orientales notabilis est. UNPLACED. DioscorgEa Pier aneec 2 Noronha in Verh. Bat. Genoot- sch., v. (1790) ed. 1, art. 4, Diosconza tokenuia Kunth, Enum., v. (1850) p. 402. DioscorEa PoLysTacHya, Turcz. in Bull. Soc. Nat. Mosc 1837, Fak! Vii., p. 158. IOSCOREA VILIS, Kunth, Enum. v. (1850), p. 400. ra EMAAR $ mS = Dy ee . 5 ae : Lee ae fuss (ote Wie RESO ae ee ts te att nigel reat 3y eee ‘ ws eda eA D2” ae Lab Re ee prsiedse Oy 3. The Localisation of certain Hymns of the Rigveda. By MaHAMAHOPADHYAYA SATIS CHANDRA VIDYABHUSANA, D. It is generally held that the hymns of the Rigveda were composed while the Aryans, in the course of their south-eastern journey, still lingered in Eastern Kabul and the Punjab. We which was the seat of the original well. One of the verses referred to runs as follows :— faa qqRsad cat feaifeuaqa ataara eas | * . Ss sagaage fraurag: ara fave qua aati 22 | (Rigveda, mandala 1, sikta 85). It has been translated by Wilson! thus :— They brought the crooked well to the place (where the munt was), and sprinkled the water upon the thirsty Gotama. The variously radiant (Maruts) come to his succour, gratifying the desire of the sage with life-sustaining (waters). €commentary on the Rigveda (mandala 1, sikta 85, verse 10), Sayana relates the story of the well in a pas sage quoted below :— waaatefanr | ata fa: Paear otfsa: at awa S2H ANT | aerate Haatsgiw Ragga 7a a alan zfa- fasta at feat ater wfeerle qanaea aq oe aera Somat afearert quyqfas ante aateRa aTaTaR: | waatisaar sucar a ufamaa i The passage may be translated as follows :— ‘ The sage Gotama afflicted with thirst prayed for water of the Maruts who raising aloft a well from a little distance carried the same to the place where the sage resided. They caused delight to the sage by preparing a reservoir which 1 Wilson’s translation of the Rigveda, page 221. 44 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1914. was filled with water flowing from the well placed before him ‘This natural well of the vedic verse tallies pea vase A with gorges in the Nepal terai. A mud-hill called Gocueurin: in the vicinity of the well, represents the place where Gotama of the vedic verse, resid Another verse of the Rigveda mentions four rivers, which are Indra’s special gifts to the sons of Gotama. The verse runs thus :— aq yamanAY WA Hy Waanafe Ww Ww bo 2 x 2 £ Plate Ill. s. Soc. Beng., Vol. , 1914 Jour. A Vy. T - Plate Jour. As.Soc. Ben g.,Vol.& 1914. os alt Meee ep oe Bc te —_ = v a m a « A.C.Chowdhary, lith. - sp nov. 2 s DIOSPYROS BARBER! Ramas 5. On a Demonstration Apparatus for determining oung’s Modulus. By GourrpaTl CHATTERJEE. This apparatus was primarily designed for showing quali- tatively to a class the elongation of metallic wires when loaded. Later on it was found to be sufficiently accurate for use as a demonstration apparatus with which load-elongation curves could be actually plotted before an audience, and values of Young’s Modulus obtained rapidly to within 1%, provided the radius of the wire was determined with the usual precautions. The use of an optical method for finding Young’s Modulus is not new and was used by Bottomley,' Ewing, and others, but the apparatus designed by those observers was very much more elaborate than the one here described and was intended for accurate laboratory determinations. Fig. I. 1 Phil. 1, Mag. 889, Vol. 28, p. 94. 52 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1914. Description of the Apparatus. The rod AB (Fig. I) which is of greater diameter between E and F is capable of turning with as pee friction as possible between two screw bearings 8,8’. In the middle of the por- tion EF is drilled centrally a hole theouete which passes a glass rod which can be clamped by means of the screw P. Between E and A is a collar which can be clamped in any posi- tion, and carries a concave mirror which throws an image of a spot of light on a distant vertical scale. The left-hand portion of the ape (Fig. I) is the part which is clamped to the experimental wire. It pasties of two brass plates C and D which can be fixed firmly to the wire by means of four screws. The plate D carries at right angles (as shown in the figure) a plate L. To the centre of the plate C and at right angles to it is soldered a rod carrying a sliding weight G which can be adjusted in any desired position on the rod and serves as a counterpoise. On the inner surface of the plate D is cut a very fine vertical groove in such a posi- tion that when C is clamped and G properly adjusted, op centre of gravity of the whole system lies in this groove groove is such that the wire passing along it is rigidly cawsped when the four screws are made tight, but on loosening the screws the plates can be made to slide along the wire with just sufficient friction to support them, the groove guiding the piates vertically. The glass rod is either clamped at a point some distance from its centre or is slightly weighted at one end, so that its centre of gravity lies to the right-hand side of P. Thus it always presses against a steel knife edge fixed at the edge of a slit the wire elongates under a load W, the clamped wishes descend, and the projecting _ descending vertically with them turns the rod about the axis S 8’, ped pigs the mirror 3 The spot of light which i is received o verti- cal scale is thus displaced upwards. (The crabitioakiont “that can be obtained is as much as 200). Uniformity of Magnification. Preliminary experiments were made, to test whether the magnification was uniform over the scale. The clamped plates, detached from the wire, were made to descend vertically by a read off from the graduations of the screw and the deflection of the spot of light on the scale being noted, the magnification of the instrument could be determined. It was found by this method that when the scale is about two metres from the Vol. X, No. 2. A Demonstration Apparatus. 53 [NV .S.] measurements so far as constancy of magnification is con- cerned. TABLE I. Descent of the plate L Position of the ed by the spot of light Magnification. micrometer screw. on the scale. 79 0484 15:0 146°7 0968 22°1 146°7 1452 29:2 146°7 1936 36°3 146°7 2420 43°4 146°7 2904 50°55 146°8 3388 57°60 146°7 3872 64:8 146°9 4356 72-0 147°1 4840 79°1 147-1 5324 86:4 147-4 5808 93°8 147°8 Determination of the Magnification. In determining the load-elongation curve for a metal and finding the value of Young’s Modulus from the curve, the magnification of the instrument was found by a slightly different process to that described in the preceding paragraph. to be plotted the spot of light remains on the scale. The wire is suspended from a heavy rigid stand. At the other end of apparatus CD is lightly clamped to the wire, as described pan. : 1 To 1% or 2%. 5: : 2 This can be effected either by means of a reading microscope or by direct measurement with a pair of dividers. 54 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1914. Sa aS ; 4 i ce oe ea S Ba ene . < iS 4 =e = = 7 ES fa Elongation in Yuo% CM. Fie. I. Example of an Experiment. The following are the sons Meng made in determining the load-elongation curve of copper : Length of copper wire No. 30 B. w. UG. as. 88:5.cme. Diameter of the wire .. *031 cm. Magnification of the apparatus as arranged . . 140. Load in grams. Elongation x 140 in cms. 118 2-0 168 2°8 218 3°6 268 4-4 352 452 7°8—(elastic limit exceeded) 502 522 10°5 542 11-5 592 13:1 644 14:9 700 18°2—(secular change begins) The curve Fig. II shows the load-elongation curve for the specimen of copper wire, as obtained from the above obser- vations. From the straight portion of the curve it is found that when the load is 200 grams the elongation is 3:3/140 cm., whence the value of Young’s modulus is found to be equal to ‘94x 10!? dynes/cm.? The value obtained for the same speci- men by the ordinary laboratory method (scale and vernier) was .89 x 10 * dynes/em oa i | Vol. X, No. 2.] A Demonsiration Apparatus. [NV .S.] No Elongation in 1/78th em. 5 fo ) 200 400 600 800 1000 Load in Grams. Fic. III. Hees ° av —~ ~~ ea at ba: = ae a = is 5 s 3 4 7 S " dS = rs . Pra | a ° 200 400 600 B00 1000 Load in Grams. Fie. IV. 56 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1914.] In using the apparatus for experiments with a long wire, the magnification can be diminished by making the length of the rod between P and the edge of the slit ¢ (Fig. I) sufficiently — long so that the spot of light may remain on the scale for the greatest elongation to be plotted. Figures III and IV are the curves for brass and steel respectively. They are plotted by observations on lengths of over 3 metres of Ha the magnifi- cation of the instrument in each case being 7 eee of brass wire 333 cms. sa eee of the wire ‘045 cm. From Fig. III it is found shat when the load is nary laboratory method was 10-61 x 10 ternpey iin em ength of steel wire used 333 cms. Diameter 034 cm. From the curve when the load is 600 grams the elongation is found to be 8°4/78 cm., whence the value of Young’s modulus is found to be 20x 10! dyne es/em.* The value oo by the ordinary laboratory method was 19-9 x This apparatus is described not because its value as an among lecturers in Elementary Physics. Judging from the degree of accuracy which it affords in determining Young’s modulus it appears that its use may not be altogether pre- cluded in the laboratory, especially for the investigation of those portions of me load-elongation curve for the soft metals, which are beyor e elastic limi In conclus: aioe, . take this opportunity “ ee my gratitude, s Professor E. P. Harrison who has given me the ecessary facilities Sn the Physical Pihckcary of ceipernmced College cat has encouraged me with his valuable advi MP EN FNP ONAN LN INL INL OI T 6. Studies on the Leaf Structure of Zoysia pungens, Willd By M. 8. Ramaswamt, M.A. (formerly Government Postgraduate Research Scholar in Botany, Presidency College, Madras) ; Officiating Curator of the Herbarium, Royal Botanic Garden, Calcutta. (With Plates V—VI.) The subject of this paper forms really one of a series of investigations on the comparative anatomy of the leaves of South Indian grasses undertaken ae me from 1909 onwards, at the suggestion of Prof. P. F. Fyson, to whom I desire to ex- press my thanks for the facilities afforded at the beginning of this study. Four species of the Natural Order Gramineae are known to me as occurring on the sands opposite the City of Madras within a distance of 150 yards from the sea. They are— 1. Zoysia pungens, Willd 2. Sporobolus virginicus, Kunth. 3. Spinifex squarrosus, Linn. 4. Trachys mucronata, Pers. Plants other than grasses noticed in this area were [pomea biloba, orsk, Launea pinnatifida Cass, and Cyperus arenarius, Retz. account of the useful purpose they serve by the extensive and interlacing nature of their shoot and root systems in protecting lands from the encroachment of sand blown continually by sea winds. Although the root system of Zoysia pungens is not so extensive as to entitle it to be called a sand-binder, yet, when we consider the smallness of its stem and leaves, we are at once struck by the wonderful extensiveness of the root-stock and its branches. We may, then, safely say that Zoysia pungens, though not an effective sand-binder by itself, forms a valuable aid to the others mentioned above, in accomplishing their purpose. The four grasses enumerated above are not to be regarded as the only ones of their kind found along the sea- shore at Madras, but merely represent those species which are almost always found exclusively growing on maritime sands and which — collected and studied by me. I propose, in this paper, to discuss some of the structural adaptations Australia and Mauritius. Before beginning to study the pecu- liarities of its leaf-structure, it will be appropriate to give a 58 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{February, 1914. Botanical description of the plant, as found on the Madras Coast—special attention being paid to the lea Zoysia pungens, Willd., is a small much-branched rigid gla- brous grass with a very long, slender, rues sd am root-stock usually 2 to 3 ft. long, occasionally e en 5 ft. long, with interlaced branches, giving off at definite viubervall short, stiff, leafy stems 4 to 8 in. high above the ground, and long thin filiform roots usually nearly a foot long below the ground. Leaves #-1} in. long, spreading dorsally rounded, margins, strongly incurved, subulate, pungent, glaucous-green, quite smooth. Sheath very short. Ligule a very narrow, abun- dantly ciliolate membrane. Racemes 1- oe long, strict, erect. Spikelets red brown, shining 7,th in. elit ag ect. cessfully its survival in the struggle for existence. It will be convenient to consider the nature of the surroundings under the following heads : Soil.—It is a sixties of common knowledge that the soil near the sea is sandy, dry and poorinhumus. The subsoil may, of course, be permeable and may also admit of being thoroughly soaked to some depth at each fall of rain, but unfortunately dries very quickly when the rain is over. In oS to this, the soil of these sandy regions contain always excess of mineral salts derived from the sea in spray or by ; peNetibion. These two factors, viz. scarcity of water in the soil and excess of mineral salts init, are quite enough to reduce considerably the absorption of water by the roots. In fact, they render certain devices, whereby it remains satisfied with the limited supply of water and also counteracts the injurious influence of the concentrated mineral solutions in the soil, managing at the same time to take in its necessary food. Temperature.—The influence of temperature on plants has been recognized as a very important one from early days. these two points vary for different species and even for different functions. Consequently, it is not possible to give any abso- lute figures for maximum and minimum points. However, we may say approximately that the average spi of minimum, optimum and maximum temperatures in the case of meta- bolism of plants are about 10°C, 30°C and 50°C et chest Vol. X, No. 2.] Leaf Structure of Zoysia pungens, Willd. 59 [N.S j The temperature of the sandy beach at Madras may taken as 90 F or 32°C roughly on an average. When dealing with temperature, we should also consider the idan selene? of the particular soil. Under the influence of the sun’s 8 rays, the temperature of at least the superficial layers of the soil rises re somewhere near the maximum limit. This intense surrounding heat is not altogether favourable to the well-being of the plant. Vegetable physiologists have sb geltmaaeya a proved that warm- ing the soil is attended by an increase in the absorption of water and transpiration. Pishettine contrivances are therefore called for and an investigation shows their actual existence. ight. —This is one of the most important externa] factors affecting plant form and structure. Whilst temperature has no great influence in nde pasisn a plant s conformation, light on the other hand plays a prominent part in controlling the structure of plants. Phe effects of light depend not on the amoun scene diffuse light acts somewhat Sedietietalty to it. In arrange themselves. The slightest variation in the light affects them considerably. On the sea-shore, the plant is actually exposed toa glaring sunlight nearly throuzhout the day. How then are the servi eee “corpuscles carrying on their work ? The answer is simply that there must be certain adaptive structures playing the part of light-regulators. Air.—The influence of the wind on plants is partly direct by its stret hing action and by pressure and partly indirect by increasing transpiration. It may of course be doubted whether one. The injury, in this case, will not be much by stress, or pressure, but the continuously blowing wind wil cause an excessive increase of transpiration. Again, the purely mechani- cal disturbance of shaking, due to winds, stimulates the protoplasm i in such a way as to increase transpiration. On the sea-shore, continuous and violent winds are constantly occur- ring. Consequently, the plants growing there freely should possess some adaptations to combat successfully with the above-mentioned injurious influences. Peculiarities due to the action of the agencies indicated above next claim our attention. Adaptations in relation to the above environmental conditions are combined in the 60 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |February, 1914. clearest manner in Zoysia pungens, Wil'd. I shall first very briefly indicate the adaptations in the general configuration of the plant and then pass on to examine in detail the structural peculiarities in the leaf. To begin with, the prostrate attitude of the plant (Plate V, Fig. A) appears to be solely due to the action of high winds prevalent on the sea-shore. The presence of numerous long adventitious roots with an interlacing system of rootlets helps to anchor the plant firmly in the loose shifting substratum and thus offers a protection against violent winds. The very short, stiff, leafy stems do not offer much resistance to the blowing wind. The growing tip of the plant (Plate V, Fig B). is so finely pointed that it quite easily pierces the sand. Moreover, as pointed out by Schimper, these plants have the wonderful faculty of again growing out of the sand after having been covered by it. A tendency to diminish the evaporating surface and to conserve the stock of water is also shown by the rigid, subulate leaf, hard in consistency and with a spiny apex. Epidermis.—Under this heading, we have to consider not only the ordinary epidermal cells but also the ‘‘ motor cells’’ and the stomata. ‘The epidermal cells appear more or epidermis is constantly exposed and therefore requires to be considerably thickened. This exceptionally strong cuticularisa- tion of the lower epidermis, then, is an adaptation agains excessive transpiration and excessive light, as the layers forming the cuticle are filled with air and act as bad conductors between the external atmosphere and the internal structures. Vol. X, No. 2.] Leaf Structure of Zoysia pungens, Willd. 61 [W.S.] Motor cells.—These bands of cells, as their name indicates, serve the purpose of bringing about movement. They are generally found in grass leaves at the base of each groove, if the leaf is a ribbed one, or by the midrib, if the leafis non-ribbed. The leaf of Zoysia pungens is very faintly ribbed. e find the motor cells here lying in layers at the base of each groove. They differ from the ordinary epidermal cells in their greater depth. As pointed out before, the leaves fold or roll themselves, when dryness prevails. This folding or rolling is brougut about by an alteration in the turgidity of the motor cells, causing them to contract and thus shortening the upper surface of the leaf. When the motor cells contract, the ridges are brought closer the surrounding air. This is clearly an adaptation to prevent excessive loss of water by transpiration. the transpiring surface. Consequently, vigorous transpiration is checked. e may then say that in the epidermis there exist several protective devices purposely adapted to prevent excessive light and excessive transpiration. Vascular bundles.—The vascular bundles of Zoysia pungens, in common with other grasses, enter the leaf separately and run parallel from base to apex of the blade along the ridges. Those met with in this leaf are of two kinds—one with two large lateral vessels which are characteristic of the monocotyle- donous type, the other without them. In both types there are no intercellular spaces. In spite of the smallness of the leaf, there are a good number of vessels. Probably these are useful in conveying large quantities of water rapidly when there is an occasional increase of water-supply (e.g. after a sudden fall of rain) and thus fill the water cells which may afterwards yield their contents to the assimilating cells when the supply of water is reduced. Bundle-sheaths.—In nearly all leaf-sections of grasses, each vascular bundle is seen to possess at least two conspicuous sheaths. The inner one is always thickwalled and the outer v 62 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1914. thinwalled. In Zoysia pungens, two sheaths can be easily recognized. The inner sheath is not continuous in the smaller bundles but surrounds only the phloem. In the bigger ones, however, it is continuous. The function of this thickwalled inner sheath is simply that of mechanical protection to the soft-walled phloem. The cells of the outer sheath however are very large and contain chlorophyll to some extent. In places where the inner sheath is joined to the epidermis by a scleren- chyma band, the outer sheath is not continuous. It then presents a V-shaped appearance. The function of this outer enough for this purpose. Consequently, | am disposed to regard this sheath, which sometimes is called by the name of transfusion- tissue, aS a special sort of water reservoir. It is I think in these cells that water is stored, which is sooner or later made use of by the abutting assimlating cells. Here again, we notice another adaptation in the direction of economizing the water- supply. Mechanical tissue—The mechanical tissue, or stereome, consists in grasses, as a general rule, of sclerenchyma fibres. These fibres are known to withstand wonderfully the strain of flexure, traction or pressure. The sole function of these fibres is support. Let us now consider how these bands have a strengthening band at the periphery. This is exactly the case here. The bands of stereome are just below the lower Vol. X, No. 2.] Leaf Structure of Zoysia pungens, Willd. 63 [NV .S.] epidermis and thus form the strengthening agency at the periphery of the rolled-up leaf. Such is the nature of the adaptation for withstanding and warding off the injurious effects of storms and winds. Chlorophyll-containing tissue.—This tissue is composed of & mass of closely packed. irregularly shaped, cells with very little intercellular spaces. By this reduction in the size of the intercellular spaces, the transpiring surface becomes smaller and. aS a necessary consequence, transpiration itself is reduced. These cells lie between the vascular bundles, and the layers of motor cells in most cases forming nearly a ring round the former. This position is obviously of distinct advantage and, in addition to storing the water-supply brought up by the vasciilar bundles, serves to protect them from the intense glare of the sun. The chlorophyll tissue is also restricted in amount and the corpuscles are few in number. This accounts for the extreme scarcity of starch grains in the leaves. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Puate V. A. Part of Plant (Natural size). B. Do. showing growing tip (Nat. size). C. A leaf and leaf-sheath x 4. PuaTe VI. (The leaves were fixed in Absolute Alcohol and sections ut by hand), D. Transverse section of the leaf x about 100 diam. (The crossed lines represent stereome, the circles with d cular bundles, and cones with horizontal and lateral lines, Motor cells. E. Transverse section of the leaf x about 300 diam. (Ep', Lower Epidermis; Ep*., Upper Epidermis : St., stomata; Ster., stereome. C., Chlorophyll-containing tissue. V.B., vascular bundles; L.S., inner sheath; O. S., outer-sheath ; M. C. Motor cells.) Jour. As. Soc. Beng ,Vol.X,1914. Plate V K.P. Dass, del. AC.Chowdhary,|lith. LEAP STRUCTURE.OF ZOYSIA PUNGENS, Willd. oat : i ago eas 2 Wg Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. X , 1914. Plate VI. a Yes C S a B) oe Age; P60) Rey KIN efe Se <<) Ark { = ot RON - . Ya) } Sa ry ee ie oe AY nf oa! dee z ASS ; jes 2 ‘ a IP , a y] Pa. rae ae Soe he 3 one ee Ae = B) PYZ8) oe aay = Py ery @ “3 Be aes NY \ ie he AX % ae eat}; ENS Pe a oe CP Ae eee i BS oe er Ig Pe Ey oe ie f ie ai ere c wee v's OA D isi iss SSO se oe See eee Saagon < EE M.S.Ramaswami,del. A.C.Chowdhary,lith. | LEAP STRUCTURE OF ZOYSIA PUNGENS, Willd. 7. Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Persian Lives of the Apostles. By the Rev. H. Hosren, S.J. At the end of 1912, the Rev. Fr J. De Smet, S_J., drew my attention to the fol'owing passage in Edmuria Mitchell’s Guide Book to Calcutta, Thacker & Co., 1890, p. 105: ‘* Seram- pur College ...... There is a splendid Library, biianiae some rare works, among them being an account of the Apostles, drawn up by the Jesuits for the Emperor Soak I hastened to communicate with the Principal, Dr. rze Howells, who at his next a to Calcutta kindly aie the book with him for my inspecti The eslt: was as gratifying as expected. The book turned out to be a complete copy of Xavier's Lives of the Apostles, about pe history of which I had collected some data. ** While eiro was in the town of Agra [1602], Fr. Xavier, who was atso there, presented to the King a treatise in Persian on the life, miracles, and doctrine of our Saviour Jesus Christ, which the King had himself asked, and which he longed to see. Hence, he showed that he esteemed it much and he Son our Lord After this, og King asked the Father Bo siete book on the life of the Apostl The first life in the Serampur MS , that of St. Peter, is identical with the one pabiense in Persian, with a Latin trans- lation and notes, by Louis de Dieu, a Professor of Oriental Languages at the Cneanty of Leyden, under the title: oe va Biscuriaid: A° CJD JOCKXXIX [1639] |? t p. 108, Louis de Dieu remarks that the Life of Christ, waits in 1602, had been preceded, two years before, by the Tnfe of St. Peter. He refers evidently toa ——— in the text . du freee a grt - ome ze memorables..., IIE. er J.A s B. Se ya - Gue S J., Relacam pO ae 602 et via son. 1605. ev ars eo Vi). S00 scribed in de Backer, Bibl. de a dela C. de oe Séris VI, 7 fon 1861, p. 414: Sommervogel, VIII, s. v. Xavier, ome. 66 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1914. mn qui annus millesimus sexcentesimus a Nativitate D. Jesu, & quadragesimus nonus sublimitatis Epoche scssionis Majes- tatis Imperatorie [Akbar] est,’’ i.e., ‘‘ Until to-day, the year 1600 from the Birth of the Lord Jesus, and the 49th of the sublime Era of His Imperial Majesty’s enthronement.’’ ! There is an evident discrepancy between these two ways of speaking, since the year 1600 makes the 45th, not the 49th, of the Ilahi era The [lahi year must be the correct one, no allu- sion to the Lives of the Apostles being found in the Jesuit Letters until 1602, when, as we saw, Akbar asked for it The Life of St. Peter may thus have been completed in the 49th ae of Akbar’s reign or A.D. 1604. A note sent me by Mr. George Ranking would show that Akbar saw it before his death (1605), together with the lives of St. Andrew, St. James and St. Paul. The complete work was probably not finished till two years after Jahangir’s accession. From the preface of the Serampur MS., kindly translated for me by Mr. everidge, we gather that the Lives of the Apostles was of the Life of St. Peter at p. 94. ‘‘ Usque ad hodiernum diem le u Miratu-l-Quds or Life of Christ, that it was dedicated to J ahan- gir, eal translated by ‘ Abdu-s-Sattar from the ** Firinghi,’’ by which we should understand ‘‘ Portuguese.’ A copy of the Lives of the Apostles, in the ‘‘ National Library”’ of Paris, is described as ‘‘ containing the life and the miracles of the twelve Apostles, translated from the Latin into Persian by Fr. Jerome Xavier, of the Society of Jesus, who dedicated it to Dgelal-Uddin Mohammad Akbar, Emperor of the Mongols.’’* Similarly, John Ury’s Aibl. Bodl. Cod. a manu, folia 215 efficiens. Complectitur opus, Speculum Sanctitatis inscriptum, ubi nimirum exhibentur vita et miracula duodecim Apostolorum, e Latina lingua in Persicam conversa, auctore Patre Hieronymo Xaverio Societatis Jesu, qui opus suum Gelaleddino Akbar, Mongolorum Imperatori nuneupavit. Premittitur quingue paginarum prefatio [Laud. A. 125}. The title is given in Persian: Miratu-l-Quds. This description is partly wrong. Kither the ae is the Miratu-l-Quds, and then it is the Life of Christ; = the Life of the Apostles ; or it is, more probably, the Life of the Apostles, since it is said to contain their lives, and miracles; but, then, Ury mistook for the title of it the words ‘‘ Miratu- L-Quds? ‘mentioned in the l ona with the date of Xavier’s Historia Christi edited by L . p. 536: ** [ Hic liber] Anno palognne: pai secundo a Nativitate D. Jesu, atq: qu uadragesimo septimo sublimitatis Sancti eee finem accepit.’’ 1602=47th av of the Tlahi era, is = f. Sommervogel, Bibl. de la C. de J., VIII, col. 1340, No. Vol. X, No. 2.] Fr. Jerome Xavier's Lives of the Apostles. 67 [W.S.] preface in connection with The Life of Christ, an earlier work dedicated to Akbar. he Serampur MS. bears no date; but we find that a copy of the complete work was presented to Jahangir in 1607 sect of Mahomet. he passage we have just italicised was misunderstood by du Jarric. Guerreiro, whom he follows throughout, notes that the copy presented to Jahangir was interleaved with a number of paintings representing the Emperor’s palaces, and that the Emperor showed himself extremely pleased with the Fathers’ attention. ‘‘ Apresentardo the os Padres hi liuro em Parsio, q tinhao feito das vidas dos Apostolos, cd muitos regisiros de seus passos antresachados nelle, o qual mostrou estimar muito”? * conclude from the foregoing to a chronological error in the Bibliotheca Marsdeniana, p. 305 (cf. J.A.S.B., 1896, p. 113), where a copy of the Lives of the Apostles obtained y Marsden is said to have been ‘‘ composed in- Persian, by P. Jeronimo Xavier of the C. of J. at Agrah, at the Court of the Emperor Jahangir in the year 1609.’’ The date, if it was correctly read, could mean only that a transcript of the work Was completed in 1609. : th the copy of the Bodleian and that of the National Library of Paris are said to have been dedicated to Akbar. Mr. G. Ranking’s note about an incomplete copy once in Akbar’s Jibrary might be taken to prove that what had been written until 1604, viz. 4 lives, was dedicated to Akbar. ; But, what of the copies in the Bodleian and the National Library of Paris? If t ' Cf du Jarric Histoire ........ ALE EIS. : 2 Guerreiro, Relacam Annal.......- de GOR & O07 cers. Lisboa. MDCIX, fol. 158. 68 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengul. [February, 1914. and all, to the catalogues of other libraries. We should judge differently if a complete copy of the Lives of the Apostles con- tained a clear, authenticated statement to the effect that it was dedicated to Akbar ain, we are told that the copy of the Bodleian and that of the National Library were translated from the Latin. On hie is this based? Has not the word Feringhi been misunder- s to mean Latin? In the preface to his Life of Christ, as published by Louis de Dieu, J. Xavier says in one place (ef. Proc. A. 8. B., 1870, pp. 141-142, or Louis de Dieu, Historia sahil p. 9) t that on comparing the Persian translation cum scriptis Latinis, with the Latin (Latin), he was repeatedly dis- satisfied with his work, and kept polishing thetranslation until he judged it worthy of Akbar’ sacceptance. The phrase ‘‘ cum sertp- tis Latinis would not necessarily mean that ‘Abdu-s-Sattar, J. Xavier’s co-translator, who by Akbar’s order had learned Portu- guese under the Fathers, but had, apparently, no knowledge of tin, was not given a Portuguese text to work from; else, how could he conveniently have assisted J. Xavier? Among the scripta Latina with which Xavier collated the Persian translation there must have been the Vulgate. A copy of the Life of Christ in the Harleian (Sommer vogel, viii col. 1340, No. 8) is described as translated ‘‘from the Portuguese,’’! but, the point has per- haps no other authority se a lucky (2) piece of guessing on the part of La Croze (Hist. du Christian. des Indes, 1758, II, 77-78), who sought to rob Xavier of the honour of knowing Persian. The fact is that the Lives of the Apostles was not the only book the original draft of which Xavier sige in Portuguese. Ina letter to the General, Lahore, Aug. 1, 1598, he announces his return from Kashmir to Lahore: ‘‘ We return to the study of the Persian language, and speak it still poorly (mediocremente). [ take up again my work of sire into Persian a treatise I had made in Portuguese ; I mean that I make it again, for the one a had made was ela ‘i Caximir, when they plun- (MS. letter unpublished). The work in a must have been the Atna-i-Hagq Numa erome Xavier, during 20 years the ciiaalics of the idkor ‘Mission, died at Goa (Rachol ?) on June i7, 1617. His compositions, worthy tection of his learning, continued to be sought after in the Mogor Mission and the Christians copied ne or hai them copied by the best calligraphers of the bazars.* Pietro della Valle, that scholarly tourist, who visited Persia | Cf. DE LA age ANIERE, "greece dos MSS. portugueses 8 ewistentes no Museu Britannico, 1853, p. 3: 2 A copy of the Spada mn Vesilate or Aina-t-Haqggy Num, dated 1678, was found in an obscure corner of ths Kunawar Mts., and sent to Csoma Lon Triibner, 1885, p 96 Another copy of the same dated 1740 was trans- cribed for Khwajah ‘Abdu-l-Masih of Hamadan by Ramg’hosan of Vol. X, No. 2.] Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Lives of the Apostles. 69 [V.8.] and India to satisfy his passion for Oriental studies, wrote that he met at Surat on March 7, 1623, a Jesuit lay- brother ! who was going to Agra. He handed ity a letter for the Fathers of Agra, reminding them that he had written to them a first time from. Persia to ask for a correct copy of the Persian books written by the Fathers at the Moghul Court. His intention was to get them printed in Rome. It would seem that his request was not complied with. None of J. Xavier’s writings dia? in the list of Persian books brought by della Valle from ‘I do not know of any other complete specimen of the Lives of the Apostles than the copy of Serampur. Those in the Marsden collection, the ae (?) and the N ational Libealy ; Paris, are perhaps compl ate, The copy of the Life of oe Peter published by Louis de Dieu contained two other Persian treatises: viz. , the death of Hussain, son of the Khalif ‘Ali, and a fragment of Akbar’s é Batavus.’”’ de Dieu concluded that John Romanus, a Doctor and pantie peated had bought the Life of St. Peter during his travels India. On his death, after his return to his country, thea books fell into other hands, the Life of St. Peter and another passing into the possession of John Eligmannus, de Dieu’s friend.? Fourmont had already shown that de Dieu did not publish the whole of Xavier’s Lives of the Aposiles, his Catalogus MSS. Bibl. -Regiae, Codices Persici, No. VI, pointing to a complete copy in 4° ol from the Latin,’’ in the ‘ ‘Royal Li- brary’’ of Pari Xavier’s Lije of St Peter, as published by de Dieu, was placed on the Index, both on account of de Dieu’s ‘‘ heretical ”” notes, and certain unsafe or apocryphal sources made use of by the author.® DESCRIPTION OF THE SERAMPUR MS. The Serampur MS., a volume bound in brown leather on back and corners, measures 0 ™,30 x 0™ a6 between the covers. Saidabad, in the — of fe cagagren oop Bengal CL OC: Rieu, Cat. of the Persian MSS va ., 1879, p. ! Pro ebay Brother Mahou Searaune: who went to Tibet with Fr. A. ~ oo 1624. e” Viagyi di Pietro della Valle .......... Parte III, Roma, Sedan Mbcrxtt Letter from Surat, March 22, Ages pp. 89-90. He obtained at Ispahan a Persian-Italian Vocabular ry of the words in the Christian 1 ine composed by J. Xavier, as also a Christian Doctrine in rine Persian, grep by the same. Cf. Assemani, Bub!. Orientalis, I. 590, Nos. 48 and 4 : ’ CLL. re en genes Petri, pp. 1 : + Cf. Sommervogel, Op. cit., VIII, Col. re, "No. 9, 5 Cf. sbid. 70 = Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1914. The title in gilt letters on the back is: Jesus | and | His | People | Persian ; MS At the end, pasted to the cover: Serampore College | Li- brary | CaseG. Shelf 3. No. 6. Condition of the MS.: complete; fairly well preserved ; the worm-eaten passages have been carefully strengthened with tissue paper; legible throughout. riting : astaliq, in a fine clear hand. Number of lines per page: 25. Material of paper: country-made. Paginaiion: pp. 262; the pagination, marked on recto and verso, being correct throughout. Catch-words at the end of each verso. Pages Contents: Preface =e ey i Te i eter sig is 23 7-57. 2. St. Paul a Ss = 57-134. 3. St. Andrew a ae a 134-146, 4. St. James ge eR es 146-177. 5. St. John ri 177-206. 6. St. Thomas a ae = 206-223. 7. St. James the Less 4 es 223-231. 8. St. Philip 2s a ee 231-234. 9. St. Bartholomew - és 234-242, 10. St. Matthew .. ae ie: 242-250. 11. 12. Sts. Simon & Jude a oe 250-257. 13. St. Mathias! .. = ie 257-262. Titles in red ink appear from the life of St. James. In the beginning of the first three lives, a line has been left blank, for the title. ' Age: No date can be found in the MS. encil-notes: The MS. must have been carefully studied i 0 arginal (p. 121) Galatians; (p. 146) St. James; (p. 156) France; (p. 162) Spain; (p. 177) St. John; (p. 178) Domitianus, (Petrus ?); (p. 183) Rev. ; (p. 215) Krisnu; (p. 217) Brahmana. y ignorance of Persian precludes my diving deeper into the contents of the Lives of the Apostles. There would be little utility besides. Xavier’s manner and style can be studied in The Life of St. Peter, and The Life of Christ published by L. de Dieu, copies of which exist in the library of our Society. may refer in particular to the studies of Mr. Rehatsek (Calcutta Review, Jan. 1886, p. 18), Dr. C. Rieu (Catal. of the Persian ) Acts I. 26. Vol. X, No. 2.] Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Lives of the Apostles. 71 Lf S.] and his son, Sir E D. Maclagan (J.4.S.B., 1896, pp. 110- 113), who quote all the above references, and indicate two other papers by Mr. A. Rogers, which | have not seen, viz., ‘the Holy Mirror or the Gospel of Father Jerome Xavier’ (Asiatic Quarterly Review, July 1890), and ‘A Persian History of Christ and St. Peter by Jerome Xavier, S.J.’ read before the Royal Asiatic Society on March 10, 1896.! Other notices are found in the Catalogues of Persian MSS. of the chief con- tinental libraries. Mr. George Ranking’s Copy of J. Xavier’s Persian Lives of the ; Apostles. r. George Ranking, who for many years was Secretary to re Board of Rxaminemi in Calcutta, has favoured me with the following valuable note (Beech Lawn, Park Town, Oxford. — 10, 1914) :— ? Apostles. I have had it for many years. Itis. unfortunately, badly worm-eaten. It is 8vo. It came, I believe, from Akbar s own library, as it bears his seal in several places, Muhammad Akbar, Padishah-i- Ghazi, 1013. This would be 1604, the year before his death. It contains the following lives, in this order : 1. Life of St. Andrew (foll. 1—12" ).—Foll. 12° and 13° are blank. Foll. 13% —24° are occupied by a discourse which begins sw) cyblarys 0 5256 Co! and ends - O¥l ys &ys5 oy) Kayes g bein! Le jf af ami G Fol. 25 is blank, 2. Life of St. James (foll. 25° —50° ).—Foll. 50° and 51° are blank. Foll. 51° .- 63° contain a discourse which begins gy2yo tye af oghls Bis othe be Cc! and ends — GS plyad 5 sy tro py oriSye wlBi Cpl! ‘ Where was this pacies ? Ido not find it in the Catal. of the _ publications. y also refer to Indo-European Correspondence lane 1870, pp. ail, "2. 72 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {February, 1914. cr! aly s moss ae) ony 1) ced wa U ty (39s) 5 cles alee Ker cswe |) wl ywle Foll. 65° —72' contain philosophical reflections beginning ears) poine whe cl ending — db F ped cgldlaw Gy wate cc! Foll. 72° is blank. 3. Life of St. Peter (foll. 73° —86"; in another hand- writing) 4. Life of St. Paul (foll. 86" , lower half, to 109” ). Here the MS. ends. I have often intended taking this MS. in hand with a view to its publication, but some other work has always prevented me, and I fear I shall never do anything with it now, as I have so little leisure and less eyesight, and part of the MS. is very hard to read.”’ Hindostani Translation of the Lives of the Apostles. The Lives of the Apostles is the only work of Xavier's which I know to have been translated in another Eastern language. I have lying before me a copy of a Hindostani translation. - LITLE: Nuskha-i Kitab-i barah Apustal | jis ka tarjuma Italiyan zaban se | Urdu zaban mem kiya giya a yazat-t published with the permission of the Archbishop of Agra by the Rev. Father Angelo of the Capuchin Order. Sardhana. Printed at the Roman Catholic Orphanage a.D. 1873]. (Om, 23x 0™. 16); paper covers; Arabic characters; pp- 166. From p. 151 to 166 the first figure is a 2. Contents: Preface pp. i-v, followed by 1 blank page. i Peter, pp. 1-38. 2. St. Paul, pp. 38-73. 3. St. Andrew, pp- 73-83. 4, St. James, pp. 83-107. 5. St John, pp. 108-128. 6. St. Thomas, pp. 128-140. 7. St. James the Less, pp. 140-143. 8. St. Philip, pp. 143-145. 9. St. Bartholomew, pp. 145-150. 10. St. Matthew, pp. 251-257 (151}-(157]. 11,12. Sts. Simon & Jude, pp. 257-262 [157}-[162]. 13. St. Mathias, pp. 263-266 | 163}-(166}. The preface agrees in substance with the Persian original. Vol. X, No. 2.] Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Lives of the Apostles. 73 [NV.S.] The Urdi translation, he writes, was not made directly from the Persian; it was a re-rendering of a former Urdi trans- lation made itself in Delhi, which had rema‘ned in MS. The preface, however, was not rendered into Urda at the time of the first translation, but was added to the newer one of 1894, when the book was really printed. A man, who was present Father in charge of the Press in 1894, not wishing to have his name put down on the title-page, asked the printer to ascrib* the printing of the book to Fr. Angelo, in whose time, es- pecially in 1873, many religious books were printed at Sardhana. “But you should not think that this Urdai translation was made from the Italian, us the title says.”’ The editor of the Urda@ translation must have wrongly understood the term Feringhi, used in the Persian text. He translated boldly by ‘ Italian.’’ He may have been misled also by the fact that Bishop Pezzoni’s Lives of forty-four Saints, published before 1853, in 1872, and 1382, was a translation from the Italian. he anomaly of the double date would be minimized if the MS. of the Urdi translation printed in 1894 had been found among Fr. Angelo’s papers, after his death. He had collected largely the writings of the old Missionaries, and had not seen them all through the press before he died. Mr. Butler’s explanations about the double date 1873 and 1894 may be correct. No earlier edition of 1873 is known to of the Serampur MS. Must we suppose that the Persian original used for the first Urdi translation passed into the hands of the second translator about 1894? In that case, where is this Persian original, or where is the original of the first Urdi translation? At Sardhana? At Delhi? Mr. But- ler vainly searched for them in both places. ' there was a first translation made in Delhi, I fancy it urop. Corresp., Calcutta, 1885, p. 434. 74 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. |rebruary, 1914. For the material description which I made of The Lives of the Apostles I am indebted to the help of Aga Muhammad Kazim Shirazi, the Persian Instructor of the Board of Exam- iners, Calcutta. It is also he who passed through the press the Persian ‘e of the preface, and pointed out the textual errors. (Cf. Appendix B.) As for the aakalacoa of fis preface from the Persian (cf. Appendix A), it was kindly undertaken by Mr. H. Beveridge at my request. It is not the only service which Mr. Beveridge has rendered me. His letters on a variety of historical subjects connected with my researches have been accumulating to the size of a volume during the past six or seven years, and they will be invaluable guides to me in the future as they have been in the past In connection with the preface to the Lives of the Aposiles, he notes that the text is not always correct, and that the transitions from one subject to another are rather abrupt. APPENDIX A. PREFACE OF THE LIVES OF THE APOSTLES, TRANSLATED FROM THE PERSIAN BY H. BrvERI IDGE. Story of the Apostles of Hazrat Jesus, and description of their virtues. Praise be to God! My physical body and my mental faculties have again become fit for service. In a fortunate hour, I have commenced the good eee May Almighty God grant its completion, and may the work find acceptance at His glorious Court! books. It happened, however, that though many wondrous that by t ne help and by the Fortune of H) Shahinshah I may write of the marvel, and so complete ‘‘ The Holy Mirror.’? The marvel in question is that, at a time ! [The new learning means, probably, the doctrine to be derived from the ‘ Holy Mirror.’ In that ca = Akbar would be represented as so anxious to get a look at the ‘‘ Holy Mirror” that the author had no time to complete it as he intended.—H. H.] Vol. X, No. 2.) Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Lives of the Apostles. 75 [NV.S.] when the world was given over to idolatry, and mankind had completely forgotten the sacred books and the sayings of the Prophets, and was devoted to sensual pleasures, many of them should have broken to pieces their idols, and have turned away from their old customs, and seized hold of the Gospel, so that they joyfully sacrificed kingdoms, and reputation, and property, and life in order that they might hold fast to the Faith. ur Lord chose out from among them twelve persons, poor men and of low caste, unknown fishermen, and made them Apostles and the shewers forth of the great marvel. They entered upon their task without swords or other means of The Prophet Samuel has recorded in his book that a tribe of Philistines, whose territory adjoined that of the children of Israel, led an army against Saul, the king of the Israelites, and t came into the heart of Jonathan, the king’s son, that he should go out against the host of the Philistines. So he joined to himself one. other person, and these two set out to slay the Philistines. They wrought such deeds that the enemy became afraid and confused, and warred with one another. Many were slain, and the children of Israel were victorious. Samuel says that on this occasion a wondrous thing was shown, namely, learning. They prevailed over them, so that with their own men rush on, and stand before princes; weak travellers and ignorant strangers make the assault, the powerful come forth ream. Now, I say that that image was idolatry, which is tricked out with silver and gold and the like, and the stone 76 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February. 1914. was these twelve persons, who were weak and without power, but who cast out idolatry from the Earth. The reason of this was that, solely by the power of God, and without the help of man, that stone came rolling down. Nor was it without signi- ficance that Hazrat Jesus called Simon, who was the head of the twelve, Peden (Peter), that is, ‘‘stone.’? James and John were brothers, and they were called * Boanerges,’’ that is, sons of thunder ; that i is, they were like lightning, and stones that fell from Heaven, and they broke stones and cast down lofty edifices. Thus did St. Peter and other vice-gerents ne throw down in the city of Rome, which was the seat the Cesars, idol- worship, and the idols which had such pate and such vogue. They also drove away the Cesars from there, and made the city their own seat, so that the true Faith prevailed there, and the Gospel was established. These things were the res sult of Hazrat Jesus’ power. This, then, is the miracle which is greater than all the other miracles which have astonished the wise. In truth it is very wonderful to think by what weapons these twelve men did these things. The power, it is clear, was the armour with which. Hazrat Jesus bade them be clothed , viz., poverty, patience, ‘meekness, love, and devotion.! So also when Saul the king sent Hazrat ‘David to fight with Goliath, whom they call Jalbiit,? of whom the children of Israel were sore afraid, David would not accept the royal armour. On the contrary, ay relied solely on the protection of G and was contented with a sling and five stones. With these he put an end to the pitts to the astonishment of thousands who were present. So also Hazrat Jesus our Lord did not wish that they should have any other armour Ne that of poverty, meekness, humility, patience and love. He said, ‘‘Go ye into the parts of the Earth.’ as am deatitig you. Take no ay with you, and but one garment, for that is necessary (?). And take a staff (2), ena be hopeful, for I am He Who shall defeat the enemies (?).’’ Provided with this armour, they went out into the world, and conquered, and made current the new Faith. The learne d and far-seeing say that the hardest of all things is to win hearts, and these men so turned away mankind from their old ways and so enticed them, that they came to recognize that the idols which they worshipped as gods were devils, and that their belief in them was vain, and that what they had considered the path to Para- ell. i heart and soul the Way of the Cross, and the teaching of the crucified Messiah, whom at first they had considered as a mad- 1 T‘aasab, which, however, is generally used in the bad sense of bigotry. 2 Johnson’s ed. of Richardson gives Jalit w,Jla as the Arabic name of Goliath. Vol. X, No. 2.} Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Lives of the Apostles. 77 [N.S.] man, and joyfully gave their heads for the defence of this Faith. Verily, this victory which Hazrat Jesus won through Majesty.'! I relate this great marvel of my Lord, and I clearly show to what tribe they (the Apostles) belonged and what deeds they did, and to what degree of greatness they attained by their Faith in Christ. spiritual and material sovereignty of the Lord of Conjunction [Timur]. ignorant, of mean condition, and void of power, they brought over mankind to their own side, so that all might know that the works which they did were not done by their own power, but rather by the power which that Hazrat delivered to them. tis proper to know that Hazrat Jesus our Lord gave them the title of His Apostles, that is ‘The Sent.’’ In Arabic they are called Hawari, that is, ‘“ regarded as friends.’’ And there 18 no doubt that they were also His friends. Accordingly, from friendship and love to Him, they with all joyfulness gave their heads for Him, and they were beloved by Him, so that He gave them the power of working miracles, and sent them among mankind and made them exponents of marvels. Hence I in this book call them His Apostles. There were 1 Hazrat. (Apparently what is meant is that the book was dedi- cated to Jahangir). 78 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [February, 1914. twelve of them and one of them was Judas Iscariot. He became rejected, and made over his Master to the Jews, as as been mentioned in the Mirdatu-l-Qads. After the Hazrat had ascended into Heaven, another was, by His orders, ap- piconet in the room of Judas, so that the rae bee “ahoult be complete. One year! after our Lord had ascended into Heaven, He one day descended and ordered that Saul, whose name was changed to St. Paul, should receive the lofty title of Apostle, as will shortly be stated. This man did such great things that Peter. The word Saint is always prefixed to their names (?.e. the Apostles); this word means ‘‘Pure,’’ and ‘“ Arrived at od.’” Though in the Christian books not much is said about the Apostles, either because the learned men of the Faith were always encompassed with troubles, and so were unable to write everything, or because what they wrote was destroyed in the turbulence of strife and opposition, yet what remains is suffi- cient to testify to the greatness which they had received from Hazrat Jesus. I have regarded this as sufficient, and have written accordingly. Prince Solomon has said that a wise son is the glory of his father. Also an object of Hazrat Jesus was that one of His marvels should be the purifying and doing to His disciples. We have ascertained that H.M. [Jahangir] is a lover of Hazrat Jesus our Lord, and is favourable to the design of this well- wisher {the author]. So in the hope that this account of the wondrous deeds of these twelve per- sons, who were at once the children and the disciples of the Messiah, will be favourably received by H.M. the Shadow of God, I have ventured to write it, and hope that with the help of Maul ‘Abdu-s-Sitar it may be translated into a fortunate hour, ame Feringhi [i.e. Portuguese] into Persian, and may be blessed by H.M. and other readers and hearers ai Unintelligible. Is it ne year and ten months? ‘ [This va that the book might be translated into Persian, was Se, in the Portuguese original, bed it ride curious after the trans- ion was completed.—H. H.] Vol. X, No. 2.] Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Lives of the Apostles. 79 [V.S.] APPENDIX B. THE PERSIAN TEXT OF THE PREFACE EpITED BY Aaa MunamMmapD KAztm SnHir4zi. p> 5 ste pace ost ore Saal usral> stay! whine Oo dasio ye 3! tl ists coytlb cobast aS al) cial! al - o& Bhigls cake Cyt lef themed Qy!05 4 ogame wclw yo 9 Node wee 9 - sles (SInF Lhe HAM sifo yy olis 01S AlAT yyy sy SH Me oigtad pge eyo SiS Sat wuts aF Gwodl} Flyo 5! SI cgylns aa ySt aS ad eily we Lod la) aici OS Li, asi} Dad S32? eypac jt ig be asgtod Upamre yee weBdS us g Gute grils wis Wjmac see it IT af yee Sly OS - 99 BL BS oto of Sey Ba o ASI y Fy S55 Cit sy page 80d erie oil p pahe at Ale sumac unt aST jt L tags lagae B30 8 Words a se! dé BS piel weiSt omy xe erty SGmsl® 1) aioe CUS (fd 5 ES wlee aid 58 17 sribiale waa SUF Cosby ct Goel Who SF cams} gymne of y - way cold ino ys ty pail! gtye ” ney cst clysliS 51 dye a9? ghey ey ated plle af lie Csylins ogg) Boye ileme Celayiy¥ Ly o98 198 Ctyel fF Glbe ul peay Wd 5 owls, aig 205 OT 3! wURT ahd 1) yd Ql wlbat 5! we ed) 4 oli Gs} oo nyt 5 Jes le af sia S Ups 3 © Bd3lgd be a ytad yee y *% 35 ,foal& ty de® dd Gr! UG aikatof ' Error in the text. 2 claxy.san 3 (§) worry? 80 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1914. pane ent qbe so 58 pp cdley ty pf stle y biel s shF 9 stl? ay” « oSL JAS Eye ty By Kia eS ee cout aidle Sp Sy | eppeld Byyh a soyst Ctigd US po _protny delgot JS yet is shal 6b abe 2 coat aly att! oe wae? Ao eltel layle y leas, sly saygla gf able Uy Boyd Coty aslo! git y dads SS) cbt oA 59 4 oto Jo ty bat Jol Sle aSitaig. y - 0108 8a5p1 9 - Hoy? Ero & dpb DUS gt abebae 51 af uly 4 dno) th 356 ay ent dye gS I) pl Cpbdlgd ySd0 elle us! wtyms 9 “api hie sae! cor See (BBie ogy Soy BW Shy Cry - 3) SAI typ Ty O94 &igS,2 as slit blsu BaphS LOI JF 501) 9% Cols OF 99 wt vbbgT s dy9F VISE g BS be BD ree SF Coypby oyyd pty 9 SIS a8 Cosh jt prbe ah SoS cll s 5 Jgoxst pst & oe a3} yest ea eee Bows aos coylys » oaday of Sis iS oF 99 aS 997 Spey 08 pall Oy Epmree Lolo Guyo af aslo sage endig U 3S wig de WIB5!99 WIZ} wyASt Uy - HY gl , OHS alow pabe clacile ys able og cotpdry 1) rot Ltuyd Jomo * ph» lib ty wldat g Syd LE olost Gh yy 9 wll yy oT yo glia oH Bbw GIS ayd GolOyo g ObISEY Ly apd Cg Bowed: AF Oyly Cri? alo Gtyd opine cols y US ele isla (104 pli la wale ~ crmat iS) 5) lagymae £15 jf By ee Gl Ghely # dij wyraie 1) Gnoie wl ph gle = Hisge allie 7 ylaydy Widisilge y FOU 0 1 Ae! al Yler~ Sas y Byrd yl ile - aideut ge Gable yliyl ply jo ob f ge wiSG Wyre golof Vo Sissy cry a wldigod 9 ST “ alem § ato WSs & dpdaye 1 R92 ule jf es 1 pales % ys 8 Ns5ee% + hs 5 Oi:T yo § 56 (.0 Vol. X, No. 2.} Fr. Jerome Xavier's Lives of the Apostles. 81 (V.S.] asst Lolly y Wendy af ied ce pet idle, pS ley Gd .y op We Gos aU, sb GI of ys Gaye 2 25 ee comp Ebay oo BS Ht Se oy? Se ole sled oT la Gel prety olor ye Cdl ob TET, ad eye wf Uc oo aatyT a oy: shee Se 1S yl Soe oT aS pry Sve cypiSl ae Con! aieS paral AS OF pS Bajlo0 eit She wT 9 - 5g pre SPF We GP om! my dt adios alle 5h ty este yg SY cpl af cbt Brey Byard g yIyil Sine yt wot S00 (6 IBA wydF (pares aS gg) Cyt} Utd 9 = BS Yl wt Sef _we AF 1) Cygrod aS d925 O28) Gy ly g - 8 days wef vlble Leg? » Wgted 9 x Sin dr O42l g)d0) Corde ye Bay! Sosy Bdj!99 Mp 06) WI pay gsity Dilgd BA ots 7? Ny 99 9% Gl! Wag yd!yp 9d y2 PEE (0 1) Ekin OT Go Glew! 3 af Uhiw y Gy ad wlinet® Gin OSU Los 4 9nd Gm pbs! « odjlall Qe ays Leow ail Lalu , werts clay wide F Lehr g ey cu oy) syels aff edd af dey, 44 5 Sud asd (ob Ly > wl $01) isiT wh Byels3 OMALO Gdts Safin 9 eyo ont e tod g Uzedt Ge ee glyy Bax? ERT yo A a, aS 4) wl pprne 2.8 3} pS, ’>— 00 at rmbt Cyrd Oe? Cgmtl yen BS yf ge Saks eyls Gal g - oplene cmaley vlna ly yidbes,s cyl #* od} Boaslwy AT ty eo we! you er ci plo& Er Bdj!—o G2! plas prey Bo sped we Goatys Cente wae af alle emda 05 Sie pli Jaleo aS (, be JOS Gomte wyda huts oye s BL GHE vB SN bolts wwoll Me LET Ute wyde Gly! “ roll yo es ss py 9 fa obs yao slash at wy! 9 - O92 wheels AF ayers LAL) Soa) crani Sb 9 Slait wyist x alah pyaage pried s yleclle cutoe Coty 88) 198) 51 wT Syary Bojtgo Sle pd Joa! Bud oto Sl® aber jh ty glbly ait wd aiSLS g! wide 3) Casut ee ERS Wave wala y tgs. as wo o> oly ( ais $ de> oly ool gs Sables Fail 595) shoe yg aliy W102 wdol yf Goal mae: 1 asS5 2 Mew bask pee. * sob 5 oadl yar} fee ® yldyy 7 dheits 8 ast bela Vol. X, No. 2.] Fr. Jerome Xavier’s Lives of the Apostles. 83 [N.S.] Spit ede 9 Gy ai Slf ais (B'S ot OIF Gale wyda is 9 Gel Je wy de 3 s7ty8 am) 9 gl ely 5 wl» wh dugl> prlals Lis cytyd le BiglOd Lemage ede aS (gly af oils sordy, o,f wlbs Shixy,! 5) wll y = oy 36 \) ot Bj!y0 ous )$ Jor a> ~ dal) tools 89,5 als urs 9d 5 slide Zs) 9 wSroe Bs line ys it Dy asend cor” 3 alle > 9 wrk} Se | ous Le 79 Sogeys urs Bojtya wl, WIE! yo Dt yballe lle yy 5) aN wldut as gins - © gay’ Sali» pe wt ply wldy x 4ou 553 wl fro po a dle ale oy od wos lea} cad lno ys ly wlaetle 9 dit og! Wty dle ay wtob y yaks as No Seo lat af loll Gul aS Hb aes aglae Uo - ayy gf d9d Cops % Syke wheat yo asd] ay wo3 wlo ashy dy lsat wy os SUI ysy0 csy!y= I hing! Ta ie yas Bylo 59 it! saw} BOYS wlbs as rand uKe 9 * Pee aL} y aged itt Moy! gf cuegd Ae yldy 3) ep? a gy - 5} sola apd (olay pled Gydy 9! ernsre y ghwgoy asl ane! Solin ys wells loys Boyt rel 98 9 Gylpd wyos ty ley! asia = rmsd 2 bog st GUS Gy99 ty lot cuyll « aldle wlylme ibe , B81 - AU (wg ylerns looy2 lS jt Sy Oil Bax! LHS Bolo LE, dS 08} Bt yo yd Ae - Bopane yIOge! ds 1) apd 9 dighod~ Fae ogoye oS ge coho 3! py dae | glenef yam yf aSitit om bef « cuts aT Jle eb j! om % 4 le xo, 9 975 Hop 998 nt Ut soyzSy ai aS 1) Ald S30 = 899% gS Cojgy el Ba Slewf be dito de cota dy AGg - cent able oils ghisngst IBS Cpl ogyve pani Joy ow” Le det be Lis yo gf ali af ass Sy vlore dy? unl # wl Gstof sh pl wa af oiled sordyy pg # opd Go yd 9 09 Lp jt UY 1 ong 2 comity vl 8 do Dydd 455q * Error in the text: the expression 00,8 892 is Urdu and not Persian. 84 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (February, 1914.] Sig Gis pal go otgay Wy sain Sls es 1938 2 PBF oye wht! 5! wil Slat 3! ae sSt g # wldst 53 5) ow Cusles (claw uted - some Od y Spt oF See TL Coit 9 apbye ally eS legmne OIF 0 Cl wit ay ot! Boy sorte is) 9 iso LPSLES y0 pile ar} Gy iene we as Cory yd dp) BID akdys Beye ait ly oaisigs lapre aoe Gyldy) Gasy] dy goile auf le x wos Saige Jlely cpldn yi@lisro Maint y wyloe (SE 9 Snr may: Bhtly toma cota if aF lt Sy ate Coty 1ST #6 crmol yds euse ts yng? af dbo 2x0 wlohe sire 3,2 % pis 5 aiwstd $2 9 SSL gt lamrac dlen UG a 99? wTume wba osteo Fy came |) thy ese ayaa as pbslya boy # Xb ot wtoySl® orl AST dacls yes — camel CIO} pad Foals Gy! dy g? bo oglod Yomac wy aay ee 9 oot Et? wl ped p% 8S WF Bo5ly0 Cth aty® CLAW» came Jlal - pris oS ote sli} Gad oats h std! DE wyda 3} wloySls Bs LIS 51 agrme crcl yo gid! One LY© Coylainay aS axel y # 20 Slee Figo 4 [oiit,d slo eoyebo ya Of byl 8. A Forgotten Kingdom of East Bengal. By Naurini Kanta Buattasaur, M.A. Communicated by Sir AsurosH Mookerseet, Kv. [With Plate VIII,] It is now more than a quarter of a century that two copper- plate inscriptions of a Buddhist king named Deva adga, published a reading of the first plate on pages 40-52 of the P roceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal for 1885. Short 2 # were issued. Though Khadga dynasty was undoubtedly a ree Yhasty, one may well ask whether it deserves the oblivion ich it © i for objects of antiquarian interest in and near the to Comilla, I chanced upon an inscribed image of Nataraj Shiva, and on examining the inscription I found that it was an ing ruins of ancient buildings, temples and forts, large tanks *pparently several hundred years old and innumerable stone dynasty come to a close? These are the questions which we riot to answer in the light of the new materials in our Mr. Lashkar in his article on the Asrafpur plates says— eg aleographic considerations would lead us to place these 86 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1914. inscriptions in ue eighth or ninth century a.D.’ Mitra was als the same opinion. But a careful comparison with some of ‘the inscriptions of the seventh centur ; would readily show that the plates must belong to that period. The characters of the Shahpur image inscription of aus Sena dated in the 66th year of the Harsha Era (672 a.p.)', and the Apshad inscription of the same king? are much more developed than the characters of the Asrafpur plates. Indeed, the charac- ters of these plates are so akin to those of the Madhuban and the Banshkera* plates of Harsha that these four plates must belong to the same period. Further corroborations are not wanting. We know from the Allahabad Pillar Inscription of Samudra Nepala, ete., were on the border of his empire. So we see that there were clearly anes kingdoms in East Bengal at this early period. We cease to hear any more of the kingdom of Davaka, bat that the > kasdons of Samatata continued to have an individual existence is clear from the accounts of Hiuen- Tsang, who visited the kingdom during his travels. It is to be regretted that he does not mention the name of the king of Samatata. From his description, it appears that there were thirty or more Sangharamas at Samatata with 2000 priests. - This is further es ae Lebae by the assertion that Silabhadra, the teacher of Hiuen-Tsang, belonged to the Royal family of Samatata; moreover, It-Sing nee mentions that the king of Samatata was a devout Bud What was this Buddhist Royal Family of Samatata that had given a principal to the University of Nalanda in the person of Shilavadra? We believe it was the Khadga family. The only difficulty in the way of the identification is the menace of Shilabhadra as a Brahmin by Hiuen-T'sang. The title of Khadga is avowedly a Kshatriya title. But Hiuen- arg hams ealls Bhashkara Varman, king of Kamrupa, 4 Brahm If Varman can be a brahmin, I do not see why 4 Kian cannot. Ihave already pointed out the close resemblance of the characters of the Asrafpur plates with those of the plates of Harsha. Thisitself, as we have already said, is a proof that the Buddhist Khadga fa fa mily belongs to that period. The asser- — of It-Sing (673 to 687 a.p.) dispel the least shade of bt. The first plate of Asrafpur states that it grants land to secure I Fleet’s ‘‘ il Inscription,”’ pl, xxix. 2 Ibid., pl. xx 3 Feipaghia fadina Vol. I, p. 67, and Vol. IV, p. 210. Vol. ey No. 3.] A Forgotten Kingdom of East Bengal. 87 Sj the longevity of Rajabhatta, and we know from the second plate that Rajabhatta was the son of Deva Khadga. In the second plate, Rajabhatta himself is the donor, and he gives land from his own private estates for the Triratna. Fortunately, this pious prince is mentioned by name by It-Sing.' It-Sing states that Rajabhatta king of Samatata was an enthusiastic adherent and patron of Buddhism, and that the number of the Buddhist Monks in the capital had risen from the 2000 of Hiuen-Tsang’s time to 4000 in his time, who were all maintained by the king. Rajabhatta’s munificence is apparent in his grant of land to the Triratna from his private estates, even while he was a crown prince, and we are glad to learn from It-Sing that he continued his charity even after coming to the throne. That the Khadga family was really a Brahmin family is apparent from the name of Rajabhatta. It-Sing stayed in India from 673 to 687 a.p.2_ Rajabhatta therefore must have reigned in the last quarter of the seventh century a.D, The names of only four kings of this dynasty are known,—namely, Khadgodyama, his son Jatakhadga, his Tt was the town of Karmmanta, therefore, which Hiuen-Tsang and It-Sing visited. The town was then nearly five miles in circuit. There were thirty Sangaramas in the capital in which nearly 2000 monks lived. Deva temples also were numerous, numbers. In the suburbs of the city was a Buddhist Stupa said to have been built by Asoka Raja. Near the Stupa was a Sangarama containing image of Buddha in green jade 8 feet in height. The ruins of the Stupa and the Sangharama may perhaps still be identified on a little search and excava- tion, for Mahomedan devastation did never reach up to Karm- manta. I personally have never had the opportunity of taking up the work seriously.® ! Watters’ ‘‘ Yuan Chwang,’’ Vol. II, p. 188. * It-Sing Takakusu’s Translation, Introduction. ; ; > In December last I was deputed by the Dacca Shahitya Parisat iS Literary and Research Society of Dacca) to explore the site of the te chee Karmmanta. The stupa mentioned by Hieun-Tsang still = hy arm which contains many ruins, and which, I believe, is the site of the sengharama with Baddha in greon jade apo cn le nl nh image of the Buddhist god Jambhala is still worship in and: hes 1 saswr cs thie Iek f Beharmandal. A very d he is locally known as the Krishnadeva o 88 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Benga’. [March, 1914. The kingdom of Samatata does not seem to have been a small one. That the kingdom extended up toa pretty distance westwards is shown by the grant of land by the kings of of the kingdom of Samatata. The kingdom seems to have included the districts of Tipperah, ree Barisal, Faridpur and the east half of the Dacca Distric Who reigned after Rajabhatta ae how the kingdom fell are at present wrapped in obscurity. A little light is thrown as regards the state of Karmmanta after the fall of the Khad- gas by the new Comilla inscription. The inscription is at the pedestal of an sa eid -armed image of the God Shiva performing the Tandava dan The inscription — him as Nartteswara. The nea of artteswara seems to have been very current in India from the sixth century a.p. onwards. Images of the god are met with all over India. Four of these images are preserved in the Madras eine but all of them are four-handed. The images at Elephanta, Ellora! and Badami? have more than four hands ; the Badami one in particular ia eighteen hands and is quite like the Comilla ima, We give below a ‘transcript of the new inscription and a translation of the same. TEXT. (1) Sremahayatn Chandra Devapadi| ya Bijaya Rajye Asta: ....shna Chaturdasyam Tithau Agia Bare Pushya Nakashatre| Karmmantapala Kushumadeva Suta Sri Bharudeva) Karita Sri Nart- — ce teswara Bhattal.. csc: ces Ashadha Dine 14 Khanitancha BRainikons ae h) Kashanitancha. Madhusudaneneti. TRANSLATION. ( — — In the eighteenth year of the victorious reign of his glorious majesty Layahachandradeva, on Thursday, in the dark Chaturdasi Tithi and in the star —— iu to 4 tine near by where it receives wors ne as Basudeva. ate around consider the name of Beharmandal vest inauspicious. They never utter its name in the morning but alw signify it by the terms,—east village, west village, north village or gary village as the case may be. This is a curious remnant of the later Hindu hatred of Buddhism. gins site of the a pence of the kings of Karmmanta lies near by, surrounded ~* 1 Havell’s. ‘Ideals of Indian Art,’’ pl. xxvii and xxix. Arch. Surv. of West India, Vol. I, by Burgess, pl. xvii. Vol. X, No. 3.]. A Forgotten Kingdom of East Bengal. 89 [V.S.] (2) Bharudeva son of Kushumadeva Lord of Karmmanta made the Lord Nartteswara.......... on the four- teenth day of Ashadhara All the letters engraved by Ratoka. Sculptured by Madhusudana ! In all probability the inscription had a date but the inseribed portion in the beginning of the third section has been broken away and lost, and some letters in the beginning of each line have been rendered illegible by the peeling off of stone. In spite of that the date might have been ascertained by astronomical calculation from the data available in the inscrip- tion. The question would be:—In what year did the dark Chaturdashi Tithi, the Pushya Nakshatra, Thursday and the fourteenth of Ashadha come together. We referred the ques- tion to eminent astronomers like Babu Jogesh Chandra Ray, M.A., of Cuttack and Babu Rajkumar Sen, MA. late Professor of Dacca College, but they both assure us that the coincidence of Chaturdashi Tithi and Pushya Nakshatra is impossible. 1 am at a loss to account for this dilemma. On paleographical grounds the inscription cannot be put earlier than the tenth century a.p It will be seen from the inscription that the kings of Karmmanta had sunk to a very low position. The absence of any royal titles shows that they were mere local chiefs by this time and King Kushamadeva acknowledged the over-lordship of certain Layahachandradeva. p to this time we know of only two Chandra dynasties who might have acquired over-lordship over Karmmanta. These are the Chandra dynasty of Vikrampur and the Chandra dynasty of Arracan. We came to know of the Chandra dynasty of Vikrampur only the other day. Mr. Rankin has published in the Dacca Review of October, 1912, a note on the Idilpur plate of King Chandra, which was communicated to him some years ago by late Gangamohan Lashkara, M.A. Nothing can be said about 1t definitely until the publication of this plate in full with facsimile, but it is apparent from Gangamohan Babu’s brief observations that King Chandra was a Buddhist king and that the characters of the plate are of the twelfth century type. Three Chandra Kings of Vikramapur are known from this plate. N amely, Subarna, Trailokya and Chandra, and there is no Layaha among them. We must look to Arracan for this Layahachandra. 1 Ratoka was the engraver who engraved ‘* all the letters.’ Madhu- Sudana, therefore, must have been the sculptor. e are glad to learn ‘hat Dhiman and Bitapal of Barendri had their rivals in East Bengal. ecently a copperplate grant of Srichandradeva of Bikrampus 90 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (March, 1914. The history of the Chandra Dynasty of Arracan is very imperfectly known. Mr. Phayre in his ‘‘ History of Burma,’ p. 45, has recorded what little can be known of the kings of that dynasty from the Arracanese chronicles. They relate that King Maha-taing-tsandra was the first king of the dynasty. ascended the throne in a.p. 788 and built a new Capital Q The names of these kings are given in full in ‘‘ Numismata Orientala,’’ Vol. II, Part I, p. 42, by Phayre, transcribed from the original Arracanese. These names sound so strange that it is difficult to say what their Sanskrit originals were. _ ome coins of the Chandra Kings have also been found in Arracan, but it is very strange that the names found on them do not at all correspond to any of the names on the Arracanese lists. The names of Barmma Chandra, Priti Chandra and Bira Chandra are known from the coins, but none of them bear any resemblance to any name on the lists. JInder these circumstances it is very difficult to identify keeping with the evidence of paleography. If the identification be right, it may be surmised that the descendants of Rajabhatta continued to reign for 100 years more in Karmmanta and were at last swept away by the rise of the Chandra Kings of Arracan by the end of the eighth Karmmanta who began to rule as a vassal of the kings of | Arracan. Mr. Phayre has suggested that the Chandra Kings were perhaps of foreign origin and that they brought about changes in religion by discarding the popular Buddhism and trident symbol on their coins.? We suspect that they came daughter of the King of Vaisali.* The north-western origin of the Chandra King is also hinted at by their over-lordship over the Kings of Karmmanta. The couchant bull symbol of the Chandra Kings is strikingly similar to the couchant bull symbol of the Asrafpur plates, and this may point to some unknown relationship between the two dynasties. The su . . PPe: sition that the Chandra Kings were Shaivas is corroborated wee ae 1«* Numismata Orientala,’’ Vol. II. Part I, pp. 28-29. 2 «* Numismata Orientala,’’ Vol. II, Part I, Intro., p. 4. 8 Phayre’s ‘‘ History of Burma,’’ page 38. Vol. X, No. 3.] A Forgotten Kingdom of East Bengal. 91 [N.S.] by the Comilla inscription, which is on the pedestal of a Nartteswara Shiva. e country round Kamta is at present known as the Purganah of Patikara. We learn from the Maharajaweng that there was still a royal dynasty reigning in those parts in the latter part of the eleventh century a.D. and in the beginning of the twelfth century a.p. A prince of Patikara was united to a daughter of Kyansittha king of Pegu, and king Alangsithu (a.D. 1035 to a.D. 1160), the fruit of this union, married a ge of Patikara. The existence of a royal dynasty in t Kamta and which was sent to the Asiatic Society of Bengal by Mr. Elliot, the then District Magistrate of Comilla. A reading of it was published by Mr. Colebrooke as early as 1807, in the Asiatic Researches, Vol. IX, p. 398, and it has been reprinted in Vol. II, p. 241, of his essays. A revised reading ought to be published by this time if the plate be still in the possession of the Society. ‘({BUIS140 OY} Jo YANO} OU) B}WIeY peg JO UOL}dWOsU! ese! BABASO}EN OL neat “Some setesbRensrasy © Sooty WAYS ee MURS ue 4 pereaiay Bele me! RUE ERUEUIE VEDEME ¥ me beware WDE MIA ALW1d ‘PI61 ‘X TOA “DONA ‘OOS ‘Sv ‘NnNOofs 9 The Nature of moksa in the nyaya and vaisesika systems. By VANAMALI CHAKRAVARTTI. In an article headed ‘‘ Optimism in ancient nyaya,’’ which 1 contributed to the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, December 1905, Vol. I, No. 10 (N.S.), it was pointed out that the conception of moksa (liberation, salvation) in ancient nyaya was to be distinguished from the vaisesika and neo-naiyayika conception of it, inasmuch as the former contained an ele- ment of pleasurable feeling, while the latter was utterly devoid of every element of consciousness. I had to support this view by a single passage! from the Samksepa Sankara Jaya of Madha- vacarya. Ihave since come across three more passages to the same effect, and these I propose to bring together in this short note. The first passage is from the nydya section of the aaqua- Re, a work which is attributed to Sankaracarya himself. fraraaiquia: arate ¢ faaaea 1 at Salas TY MTS TUES | A Fifsntmatarn qerafaataarg | > AA at aefafecagtiaey eee: | ai fasfa aaa urmacafeatag » Chap. VIII, 41-43. _ ‘In the condition of final release there wili be the expe- rience of eternal bliss without (any perception whatsoever of) sense-objects. I choose to be a fox in the beautiful Vrindavana in preference to that altogether blissless soul-deliverance, which has been taught by the raisesikas, who by means of sacrifices, prescribed in the vedas, and by means of the grace of the araxdfeqatear faufar ued | fe 94 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (March, 1914. Lord !, wishes to attain with great effort the altogether —_— less state of a swoon, a condition of existence similar to that of a stone.’’ (M. Rangacarya’s translation). This passage not only states the naiyayika conception of moksa as containing an element of agreeable oe it also ~ distinguishes it clearly from the vaisesika conceptio second passage is from Gunaratna’ s Tarka- Rahasya- Dipika. It was originally brought to my notice by my revered teacher Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasada Sastri, O.1.E., M.A., F.A.S.B. It runs thus (Dr. Luigi Suali’s edition of weawa sqwa, p. 188). qe gerat ata: wea aetiaag | Ans aq aafaat afa mtaat aqtaete i Translation:—A follower of Gotama (i.e. a naiyayika) would not oe te attain such liberation as is taught by the vaisesikas. ould prefer living in Vrindavana [though this might saat living in company with {such creatures as] the jackals. This passage also makes a clear distinction between the vaisesikas and the res ayikas, with reference to the notion of moksa or liberatior third os is from the well-known Nyaya Sara. It is avowedly a naiyayika work and its author Bhasarvajna Aksapada, Vatsyayana, Vacaspati, etc., in Gunaratna’s Tarka- Rahasya-Dipika. The following Seat will show that at least one school of naiyayikas (including Bhasarvajna) allowed an element of agreeable feeling in the notion of moksa. aie qata wha sfal oh atay quafa anwmfaragat- pe oe Nee ee tWMiCss aaa fafa ae = satel qaaw ata afa | Bibliotheca Indica ed., pp. 39-41. would re to ernie hus :—‘‘ who by means of the grace of the toed, obtained by Se pechirtancss a vedic sacrifices iaisiakpkehsees Retachsntes Vidyabhusan, M. A., Ph.D., F.AS.B., reads ‘qHq aWTSEe’, ‘gure q and faadagai a7. I have accepted the above readings, however, on the strength of Jayasimha Siri’ s commentary. Vol. X, No. 3.] ‘The Nature of moksa. 95 [N.S8.] Translation: -What is [the nature of] this liberation ? Some! describe it thus:—the perpetual existence of the soul, likened to the existence of ether (@kasa) after the dissolution of the world. How [is it possible that such an unconscious, pleasureless state should be regarded as the supreme object of human pursuit ?] [The reply turns on the recognition of the fact that] pleasure is inseparable from pain, and hence it is not possible to shun all pain and enjoy pure pleasure. Moreover, pleasure is not the only object of human pursuit. Men are found to exert themselves for removal of pain as well, e.g. when they try to pull out a thorn from off their feet. [Here ends the statement of the vaisestka and oe position, The author now refutes this position and states his own, i.e. er teally naiyadyika position and concludes}...... Thu have proved that when a person fully and ‘anally rids himself of all pain and gets into a state of perpetual pleasure, then he is said to attain liberation or moksa. These several passages will make it abundantly clear that the naiyayika conception of moksa had not always been iden- tical with the vaisesika cena, as is now almost univer- sally supposed to be the c ! This ‘“‘some ’’ probably refers to a school of naiyayikas, who had adopted the teaching of the vaisesikas. According to the commentator, some = the vaisesikas. w® efa Steal: | v 2 An extract from the commentary will make the passage clear : waa: | Bfearir at qqenauifyaca war) ay agent AMT Hey Te war: sarge aeyred aa fafa: | afe sere aa fafingr TUT: aqfega aet fraimamacie wraals Based AST vafa ser seaart fafnenumeteerq FaseMrarersera vata aame: | eases eee” 10. Edilpur Grant of Kesavasena. By R. D. Banerst, M.A. The discovery of this inscription was announced by Prinsep in 1838, in which year it was presented to the Asiatic Society of Bengal by ies ae sy Lal Tagore (i.e. Kanai Lala Thakura). he plate was dug up on a river bank in the Pargana Edilpur in the Beksieani district of Bengal. Prinsep published his read- ing in the 7th volume of the Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.! He read the king’s name Késavasena. About sixty years afterwards Babu Nagendra Nath Vasu, when editing the Madanapada grant of Visvaripaséna, observed that the king’s name should be read as Visvaripa and not Kééava.’ He relied on the reading of the last words of verse 10— Etasmat kathamanyatha ripu-vadhi-vaidhavya-vaddha-vrato vikhyatah kshitipalamaulir-abhavat sri- pete at which he correctly read as Visvaripo nye His views were adopted by Dr. Kielhorn, in his list of fodiens "india In- scriptions,® who states ‘‘ This name was by Prinsep misread as KésSavaséna ’ In 1907 Dr. ‘Sten Konow, the then Government Ephigraphist for India, enquired about the plate, and then the Society found out that the grant nie missing. Subse equent enquiries produced no result. Some time ago I was engaged in oe the date of Talainanees “am his successors. At that time I was struck by Dr. Kielhorn’s statement, and on examining the fatdimile't found out that Prinsep’s reading of the king’s name is quite correct. In the absence of the original plate, which seems to be lost beyond all hope of recovery, I am obliged to rely on the ape Bb sien by Prinsep, which doctitatsly enough is not a wing but a lithograph from a mechanical estampage. The thograph is as good as that from which Dr. Kielhorn published the Mungir erent of Dévapila *, excepting the spots retouched by Prinse The subsequent discovery of the Madanapada grant of Visvarupaséna has facilitated the revision, as all of the Mises of the former are to be found in the latter. The king’ s nam pocenh realy. KéSavaséna. The word Visvaripa in the 17th line 1 Jou in Beas As, Soc., Vol. VII, Pt. I, pp. 40ff. 2 Tb d. , Vol. LXV, Et. I, pp. Sf. Ibid. Sh " App. p. 88, No. 649. ; Ibid., 5 Ind. poor Vol XXI, pp 2 8 Journ. Beng. As. Soc., Vol. Vil, p. 40. 98 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {March, 1914. is a surname and notapropername. If we take it to be a proper space. In the present grant the name of the king has been incised in the place of another name, which had been scratched cs) ut the space is quite sufficient for new nam very small. It may be that some name with three syllables was erased and Kééava incised in its place, while in the Madana- pada grant a name with three syllables was erased and the name Visvariipa, with four syllables, substituted for it. The genealogy of the Séna kings of Bengal would therefore be :— Viraséna. Samantasena. Hémantaséna. Vijavaséna, Bailalaséna. Lakshmanaséna. BEES | Madhavaséna (?) Visvarupasena. KéSavaséna. The inscription records the grant of a village in the Pawn- dravarddhana-bhukti and Vikramapura bhaga, by the Paramés- vara paramabhattaraka, the devout worshipper of the Sun god, the Maharajadhiraja Keéavasenadéva, who meditated on the feet of the illustrious Laksmanasénadéva, who meditated on the feet of the illustrious Ballalasénadéva, who meditated on the feet of the illustrious Vijayasénadéva. 1 This is clearly the reading of the plate, which, of course, should be corrected into Taradévi or Chandradevi as the case may be, because the verse in ~ Vol. X, No. 3.) Edilpur Grant of Kesavasena. 99 [V.S.] The grant was issued []. 38] from the victorious camp at Jamvugrama on the occasion of the king’s birthda The recipient of the grant was a Brahmana, mane I$vara- dévasarman, of the Vatsa gdtra and a reader of the Védas (Srutipathaka). The term Sadasiva-mudraya mudrayitva requires some explanation. All copperplate inscriptions of the Séna kings of Bengal bear a small ten-armed seated male figure at the top. Evidently this is the lanchana of the Sénadynasty, and the words quoted above show that it was commonly known as the adasivamudra. It may, of course, be taken to mean the very auspicious seal, but we find a description of Sadasiva, a ten- armed form of Siva, in the Mahaparinirvana Tantra, and the coincidence is so remarkable that we certainly have to explain the expression Sadasiva-mudraya mudrayitva as meaning ‘‘ sealing it with the Sadasiva seal. TEXT. First Vide. 1. af a} aat areraara | qesufarcaratuanaaeane- fia@)eyaraaqfaeaa i watafanafaatfearwam- | qalaa- 2. gamit farasne | (¢] vercefenran squat faa. fagatea Taga aaaqactsalsts 7H: | Sigza- fea- 3. aydufetaar fegrfatt: aad saalag TouaaTaT- clit | [2] camiq fafaunfragiaae- 4. afarqraafastateacd Faag ate eu afaz | pow c c ~~ ae ee ee mis Ss. J i ten, Sh Od 5. pecans Ea aces mt tl [ ts] ‘saqraceuiaa He fa aa 2a: ea quifacaiest faxaea ga- 6. wat) adfaraitefawfcadtas: argat eae afafasa facfut fea t BN SS e actual bb of the pe ll. 49f., is Subhavarsavrddhau Firghayuath [a] ka@mana = In Western Bengal, two words are used to denote a birthda: aed sa-pija and janmatithi-pija. 100 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [March, 1914. 7. eat sft caamatfa aiefatiarnt sf sasamiifa auufant sfa aaaaa | fafsaraaata- 8. ut sfu saaqaae Feat aeritasagata aAt ataaa: @afa | (y| atafa fella faaifacefa- 9. afad Stequiadarg heafea quay yaateai Weat aw te: ) setastfaatea ag fe- 10. qeaatara ctaeqary ge ara fam rare feafu tq alarfaate: o [¢] Baq wRAaTaAIAAA- ll. ayafieusqrmmieufanmalttacuaaeiaaat 2m | aeatuadifa wifarafcesager- 12. at gar deafeuencwfafantanty Ffcfea: | [9] Sarat ste + araar afaaat auitbyat swa- 13. XC aa ta ag: aerfafuety ctaacteae: | utast sfa a faa: afesawetatar- 14. za a it 0 (s] “SS J bad 4 ols nd eaqutatys thal ein 34 gaa seus tietaaumeint 15. arane seomqaacfadtetaaaerd: | ara aaufqarfaat wa A AAS aa 16. fx fatramegemans fraaa aa: ) [e] qa aHUAT “dfaufaat aaa afane qa a4 qaifaar qeuatale 7. wa ohfaa: | waerq aang feqruaueraeaat awa: Pafanmatincaag a faraeat au: 4 [ee] aaa- 18. qas Ua Mlacfag WARNE Ta ReGMIG | a faqu- Gt Ua Saurst favafa aa vcraatautf y [22 | ats azure ! Two letters erased after gegt | Vol. X, No. 3.] Edilpur Grant of Kesavasena, 101 [V.8.] 19. 30, WRMGTM aa: fated ata: graeTt feNt Az- maretent eft: | aat aargagafady aet fafa auer at sratfa qa: Gat a aqET aw sawTT fea: n [eR] awa efaumraqaquianeaqifadaray- at AS fadace mez faacargaagt tartar | Tiay au: TATHIRERatsys B- aeagaw: ae FatsqwMAMAara Burrs | [23] afaata afasurfaxuager aatat fered at faafa aequfia fag amagag | a@laycty arfearta faced aeat: quart aera Starsalea] @ (?) aw afeat wafaaitfaat » [ie] cavat afatecafcaratea qanfquT | Tawsata: vfauequragge afu: ) (.y] fama faqafaat ae festa ga: wast easter wats aawa | Tafequal yataaefa satieeatyst aq grata fexmaraty UT qrataqatawaray | [xy] BR AAG LSFLSTATTTL emaneraaia fan ae ufegeqqe etfanaa | a¢ Fefacgafa afmacn ofa aa faaeeigc- ufaqufaatapafgtarad 4 [ye] saatyaaaare tafue- aa: wae feui caaraamice aaa Ff Siu fagraarag | taizafzerea: feats seq FeFTUI- aaMEEfant aaafa gtatfa taqae o [2s] atfase: ufesiifaas afcat wemettesaeaaTrRet AURA: GABA: Glee: | AAT Al. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (March, 1914. queen carat wiita qalaat aera sea laaaAsa- eran Bafa | [te] AaHEMals HARA iE- Second Vide. aiafae tata ufearnufas ofa saTEataat | wa[q ureuatucsafadisratfanarge fasate Sar: afa- afaeMigiaraate aa | (Re] farafeta faaarqtaa StRATAT aat fastfaafage: guaTsaratya: | waTe e- fuatfani sfuadicanigal: aaqaanaagTaata aatay) (22) waafa arenfasaa wa aTAa aiqa- fa af SH aetaawaraar |) [22] wagMfarne- fraiaT aaatei wernt: ufe feeca: Gheatafatie: | aratqataratad faa east eet we WT fagfeadawa: Feta: | [a3] Daataaamayeys St- caae HAASAN ATTA WATRAGQHMGAaTAay: | fagat eft asiasaattagfesnza: WaRoTRATI- faurfananaaiaet wet | [Re] see wy WequlA- PASISMI HAMAITMaIa Beuasy- Hu UpMeqe Mafenseaza greta aaw BIT- wia afer faugpaxe Near MaeRAea- Zaylelqwla SAMA Maa Bla ge4 aywlegqe Saas Zagiciquia saw suawia wauta asufa aqufa wrasaaifaata Saquansfanreniee satay ofaag- ERRATA. In Journal, Vol. X, p. 102.—Edilpur Grant of KeSavasena, eighth line from the top :— Read 34. fadifaat ufuadicantaal: sam aaqaa TAA instead of 34. fadtfaai sfaadtcaniaat aay aaataa GAARA | Vol. X, No. 3.) Hdilpur Grant of Kesavasena. N.S.] 53. 54s, 55. 103 Hi AGPAMSA WIMMAIIAIHL WLAAL WLAHI- za uqHate aeinfuas afc a ag UFt Meaemaq Faasazauer faafar: 4 SHINAI AT AGH CHlLIUTHR WAGs X- aA asiyeiea aS ATiatyfaniea aela@arafa asiet afun atscfun aa ¢- wa mafenaifaafearea atfhaa cuenfar ee qTaTART aA agQig ARIA GIST AA faat SMARTS ZUZANA ASM ateat- Wis wae HMaaiy Taha aarfenta a fa- feaney Haat aur Wasaeayernatfa az FARATTUTA oo eee eeeeee eee ATAUSTUTSH ya aaalaigia: atar efaa gigeura atfaaafaat y: dat ufea ugat ... wyPagra: at- Al Sut agaifanuel ... arapatat sq aut sfas aainateat ceq eafaaea gua. azet Hatay waa aqatia aad catahaT aufa: walefacor enatact: aaaw- MT UATE AIST BYaraaifaaa Bagugsaw ea afa waa saan Fafa aaa araq fea ara weafeagiiea arfaar qaanatcaafen aaqrafaca4r qaataifanfanaa eet anita aregaatae waiazar agar S14 WAY U_UaL yerex Zam yast- 4 amuatae aul equate naw aca: Tae qaaItsy aa wea aarAtfaneAa: URS Faas HMTTBIMAAT TS THT weuatra Bfautse (1) a at Fax Saya aT- 58. dt oo 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {March, 1914.] quia watfnaqrar qafaet cataiata weteat afeenaiaa ... .., aMaWwattaa Gath: aa wartarafeeqat (at) wiaaafe aco agaty aa taqaag uifatuchoarfafrcowea acH Wayarg wate Weattag | waft as gaatqufad: watat | arentcafafaast aerate faaraet: afacismma ata: aaa ufamta 1 ala a: ofazenfa asufd gata | wit at waa- mim faad qimfaat ) aefrager car cfr: anafef: | aw ae az afawy ay act WA || SE ai waza al at eta agaia | afasrai afader fuefu: asuea | ufe aa aeetfa et facia afa: | SAA Blqaaty aaqaehaeq | Ha SIA aSTATAT aaTaAga waq | Kfaaanaafacatsi faa- aqtamy aquaifaag | anafacqereagaal ate yaa: wealaataatan | aata gaatfaatfad 9 eRAMaaTa: BlAaTa ZI MeASATTA: Sea SlaAeaacata Bl AAT TR «-- aqiaufa | saa aca | de Peles ...... ue ee Se 11. Kathkari. By B. A. Gupte. Communicated by MaHaMAHOPADHYAYA Haraprasap SHASTRI. Sir James Campbell, the editor of the Bombay Gazetteer, to which work he devoted the best energies of his life, derives the word ‘ Katkari’ (Catechu-maker) from Kath (Catechu). But K.C.M., writing in the July number of the ‘‘ Indian Antiquary,’’ page 206, states that the derivation is ‘‘ thoroughly untenable.’’ r. K. C. M. following Rajwade’s Marathi essay derives the word from the word ‘ Karaskara’ used in Baudhayana, Karna- pretation of the word ‘ Karaskara,’ that is what ‘Kara’ means. But deriving ‘Kathkara’ from ‘ Karaskara’ in the following way (Karaskar-Karachkara-Kachkara-Katkara). But the elim- ination of ‘‘R”’ in this way is against all rules of Prakrit Grammar. It is only in modern Marathi that ‘*S”’ changes into **C,’’ but not in the Marathi Prakrit. His appeal to Panini is of no avail to him, for that eminent Grammarian says that ‘‘ Karaskara’’ means only a tree. Even if it is not a Sutra but a Gana, there too it means a “‘ Vriksa’’ or tree. If it meant a tribe or a country it would have been ‘‘ Karakara.’’ So *‘Kath’’ in Marathi means ‘‘ Catechu’’ and ‘‘ Kara ’’ means *“one who does’’ and so ‘‘ Kathkar’’ means ‘‘ Catechu-maker.’’ t was no business of his to indulge into antiquarian vagaries about the derivation. 12. Grooved Stone Hammers from Assam and the Dis- tribution of Similar Forms in Eastern Asia. By J. Cocern Brown, M.Sc., F.G.S. [With Plate I.] Grooved hammers and axes are perhaps the rarest of the numerous Neolithic stone implements recorded from Eastern Asia. Only one specimen of this type appears to have been described from India. It was found by J. Cockburn together with a number of other stones under a sacred tree at Alwara, two miles north of the Jumna, and thirty-seven miles south- ed by J Rivett 1883, pp. 221-230). _ The original specimen referred to above is now in the British Museum, though a cast of it is preserved in the Indian Museum. During an examination of the large collections of prehistoric remains preserved in the latter institution, I have __ There are at least two belted stone hammers in the mag- hificent prehistoric collection of the Madras Museum which I 108 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. _[April, 1914. had the privilege of examining last year. They were both alli, Kudligi | Taluq, Bellary district; it isa broad, round-faced hammer made of pink granite. The round face is much broader than the butt end, and there is a very distinct constriction round the middle of the hammer to enable it to be attached to a haft or withy. The specimen is unfinished, and was evi- dently rejected by its maker owing to a false blow which smashed a large piece out of the edge of the striking face. The second specimen was found on an old copper smelting site at Rupavati, fifteen miles south-east by south of Damnaga, Baroda. In its general shape it is very near the former one, but it has been completely finished and polished, though after- wards greatly injured by much usage. The deep and highly polished belt groove remains nearly entire, and shows that great care must have been taken in its manufacture. It is fashioned from a grey gabbro In spite of the extended list of this type of belted hammerstones now brought forward, the fact remains that such implements are of the greatest rarity, and are only very occa- sionally found amongst the thousands of other Neolithic artifacts in which certain parts of the Indian Empire abound. A commoner type of hammerstone from the United and Cen- tral Provinces and from Central India, is not grooved at all, though often covered with circular indentations, wien may pethaps have served for holding the weapon in the greyish, bluish or reddish-grey quartzite; one from a dark, fine-grained, schistose diorite. Each specimen has been formed by splitting an elongated, ovoid, water-worn pebble into two pieces, across its transverse diameter, and then grinding down the fractured end until it assumed a smooth, slightly convex surface. The groove or belt is cut into the implement roughly two-thirds of the distance between the face and the pebble butt. In each case it is broad and well marked though not deep. In than the ates one. — specimens were found along with others by Mr. W. Penny, a tea-planter of Bishnath, ais a district, Assam, in dicted a ditch on his estate. They Vol. X. No. 4.] Grooved Stone Hammers from Assam. 109 [W.8.] the Indian Museum in 1908, through the Viceroy, Lord Curzon, It is interesting for the sake of comparison to enumerate briefly the occurrences of similar forms from other countries in Mr. 8. Couling, a medical missionary of the English Baptist Mission in Ts’ing-chou Fu, Shangtung Province, in the vicinity f x Laufer (Jade, A Stady in Archxology and Religion, Field Museum of Natural History, Publication 154, Vol. X, 1912, stone hammers and by others as net sinkers. Grooved stone axes are common in North America and seem to be very generally distributed through the United States. An excellent example is preserved in the Indian Mu- seum collection, and figures are given by Charles Rau (Smith- sonian Contributions to Knowledge. The Archeological Collection of the United States National Museum in charge of the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C., 1876). There is no evidence to prove that the grooved-stone axe cas: €s not lessen the probability that in certain other archeological types America borrowed from Asia. aR NS 8 eee NN Oe RS BO he ies Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol X, 1914. Plate I. GROOVED STONE HAMMERS FROM ASSAM. 13. On the Reproductive System of Atopos, Simroth. By EKENDRANATH GHOSH. [Read at the First Indian Science Congress, January 16, 1914.] The genus Atopos was constituted by Simroth (5) in 1891 for the reception of three species of slugs included in the genus Vaginula, Latrille, which Rc, the type-genus of the family Vaginulidae. Later on, Heude established a new family, ae for the anole ies of the present genus and a few others. Babor established a new subgenus Podang for Atopos schildit, which differs from the other species of the genus in some minor details. Since the establishment of the genus, a good number of species have been described from time to time, but the anatomy has been studied in a very few instances o only. Simroth des- cribed and figured the main anatomical features of the three spe- cies he established, viz. A. sempert, A. leuckarti and A. strubelli. Later on Collinge (1, 2) while describing some new species of Atopos from Malaysia briefly described the gross anatomy of A. maximus and A. sarasini and illustrated his descrip- a big specimen (probably A. maximus or another species closely allied to it) from m Tavoy. I should specially mesg that received all the specimens from the Indian Muse The reproductive system of Atopos consists of the following parts :— 1. The hermaphrodite gland is a small lobulated hooey lying on the ventro-lateral aspect of the anterior end of the digestive gland. Two types of hermaphrodite gland may be recognized as follows :— a) A distinct DerneaDire te gland separate ‘from the al- bumen gland. This type occurs in A. maximus, A. sarasini, A. siete and in another species (not named) mentioned in the In A. sanguinolenta, the hermaphrodite gland is a big Sita body lying in contact with the albumen gland. n A. sarasini, the gland lies embedded in the albumen gland, he quite distinct from the latter. compact gland inseparably connected with the albumen gland so that the zi, gland is divisible into two 112 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {April, 1914. portions,—an acinar portion ee glandular portion) and a albuminiparous portion. This type occurs in all the athe species. The hermaphrodite gland consists of a large number of acini held together by connective tissue. Each acinus consists f a wall of thin fibrous layer lined ey a single layer of flat- tened fusiform epithelial cells. These cells give rise to both ova and spermatozoa so that both the: sleiiveilts are developed side by side in the same acini. ee described the gland as ovary in his species, A. and A. sarasini. But in all the species I studied I nave Saks both the ova and spermatozoa after careful histo- logical work. 2. The albumen gland, in accordance with the types of the paneer grime: gland, is also represented in two forms:— the first type, it forms an elongated irregular mass sur- rounding the hermaphrodite duct, which may be coiled in various ways. The gland surrounds the duct, and is intimately connected with it. In the second type, the albuminiparous portion pea of irregular masses of simple racemose glands which open rately, sometimes at fairly long intervals, into the erie eee duct. The hermaphrodite duct is a fairly stout tube which me forwards for a shorter or longer length to end in the ex- ternal aperture on the right side in the groove between the foot and the margin of the mantle at a little distance from the opening of the combined tube of the penis and the right Simrothian gland. he receptaculum seminis is a pyriform sac opening into the hermaphrodite duct by means of a narrow stalk. The hermaphrodite gland has no connection with the penis. Simroth described a vas deferens from the hermaphrodite gland to the penis, but in all other species, described both by Collinge and eee no such structure was found. The penis is a stout tubular body lying in a sheath with ‘which it is connected at the free end. The penial sheath is fusiform and dilated at the proximal end, vee is narrow down to a tubular structure opening into the exterior behin d = right lower tentacle in conjunction with the right Simrothian giand. the base of the right hatinercte ae This has been termed vas deferens by Collinge (2), but it aera to the flagel- lum described in Helix. The retractor penis muscle is a fine strand which arises from the posterior end of the penial sheath and passes b Vol. X, No. 4.] The Reproductive System of Atopos, Simroth. 113 [N.S.] wards over the hermaphrodite gland to be attached to the body-wall behind the latter. 8. The Simrothian glands, one on each side, are two tubular glands opening into the exterior at the base of the lower tentacles, the right one being united with the penial sheath just behind the external opening. Each Simrothian gland is divisible into three portions in all-the species. ey are as follows, starting from the free proximal end :— (a) The free portion of the tube, which is much coiled in some species but loosely so in others. It generally lies beneath the buccal mass and salivary glands. A very narrow portion forming a fractional part of the process is present; the muscular strand, however, has appeared. Moreover, there is an additional stouter portion intervening between the second and the third (last) portion of the gland. _ The arrangement of the generative organs and the ducts in the present genus is closely similar to those in the Cephal- aspide (Opisthobranchia Tectibranchia) and corresponds to the first type of duct described by Lang. s an important point to note that, considering the formerly associated in the family Vaginulidae. It has rightly n removed from that family and placed in a separate LITERATURE. 1. Collinge, W. E. ‘‘ Report on the Non-operculate Land Mollusca,’’ Fasciculi Malayensis, Zool. part 11. 2. Collinge. W. E. ‘‘On the Non-operculate Land and nh eloaaas Molluscs,’’ Journal of Malacology 1902, Vol. IX, 3. Ghosh, E. ‘The Anatomy of Atopos (Podangia) sanguinolenta, Stol., MS.,’’ Records of the Indian Museum, Vol. II, part II, No. 17. 4. Ghosh, E. ‘ Mollusca, I; Rathouisiidae,’’ Records of the Indian Museum, Vol. III. Zoological Results of the Abor Expedition, 1911 12, Part III. ,-_ Simroth, H. ‘* Uber das Vaginuliden genus Atopos, ae eae f. Wiss Zool. 1891, Bd. III, pp. 593-616 T. XXVII. Plate XII. Jour. As. Soc. Beng, Vol.X, 1914. Vol.X, 1914. Bs Jour. As. Soc. Ben A.C.Chowdhary, hith. HEPTAPLEURUM VENULOSUM, Seem. Plate XIV. A.C. Chowdhary, lith. HEPTAPLEURUM VENULOSUM, Seem. _ Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol.X, 1914. 14. Note on Leaf Variation in Heptapleurum venulosum, eem, By M.S. Ramaswamt, M.A. (Cat.), B.A. (Map.), Officiating Curator of the Herbarium, Royal Botanic Garden, Calcutta. [With Plates XII—XIV.] he late Mr. C. B. Clarke in his account of the Natural Order Sesieat in the Flora of British India when dealing hss ane genus Heptapleurum has put H. venulosum Seem. un nder consists of those having twice digitate or digitately decompound Observations made on shrubs of this species growing in the Royal Botanic Garden, Sibpur, tend to prove that this distinction, at any rate as far as this species is concerned, cannot always be relied upon. The leaves of Heptapleurum venulosum betw a compound le af Bee two leaflets and a twice Maitate leaf containing 24 leaflets (i.e. 8 ternate leaflets). The chief lines of variation, however, are :— (1) Frequent changesin the shape and size of individual leaflets. (2) Increase in the number of leaflets (from 2 to 24). (3) A gradual transformation ig a simply digitate to a twice digitate arrangement The accompanying three plates were drawn from specimens collected on two shrubs and show the more interesting varia- tions. As nothing has been published regarding this wide range of leaf-variability in this species and as it is desirable that this should be on record for the use of Systematic Botanists pier , I venture to present this small note for the considera- tion of the members of the Society. EXPLANATION OF PLATES. Plate XII. ge fected show Hi variation in shape, size and mber of leaflet Plates XIII XIV.—The various intermediate forms found ie n a compound leaf (consisting of two large leaflets and a small one) and a twice digitate leaf (consisting of 24 leaflets, i.e. 8 ternate leaflets). 15. The ‘*Shous”’ or Big-horned Deer of Tibet. By Lreut.-Cot. J. Manners-Smitu, V.C., C.V.O., C.L.E. [Presented at the First Indian Science Congress, January 16, 1914.] [With Plates XV—XVIL.] In writing about the above animals I must disclaim at once any pretension of being a Scientific Naturalist. In regar to such points as relate to technical questions of species structure and so forth, I must refer to the accepted authorities, who have written and described the various species before, and shall rely particularly on the accounts given by Brian Houghton Hodg- 8 to 70 years ago, and as recently as 1912 by R. I. Pocock, F.R.S., of the Zoological Society’s Gardens in London. name ‘‘Shou’’ is I believe used by the Tibetans indiscriminately for the 3 species of deer about to be described. (1) The stag known to Natural History as ‘‘ Cervus wal- lichii.’’ (2) The stag named by Hodgson ‘‘ Cervus affinis.”’ (3) Thorod’s deer or ‘‘ Cervus albirostris.’’ For a scientific description of these species it is only neces- sary to refer to Mr. Pocock’s full and careful paper No 30 of the Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, 1912. The stag (Cervus wallichii) which is the principal subject of his paper was imported into Nepal in 1909, and was kept at large at an elevation of about 6000’ from that time until presented to His Majesty the King-Emperor in December, 1911, with a collection of other Nepalese and Himalayan animals. In this connection I would also refer to the notes by Brian Hodgson No. 5 of the Journal of the Bengal Asiatic Society, dated 1551, and No. 117, dated 1841. The earlier note was but the later one about 7 years after he had retired from that post, and taken up his abode in Darjiling in order to carry on his natural history and other scientific work. 118 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [April, 1914. It will be seen that in the first instance Hodgson jumped to the conclusion that in his specimen of stag’s skull and horns which he obtained in the Nepal Tarai, he had dis- g which he had seen when in Nepal was a similar ‘‘ Shou ’’ to that the spoils of which had just come to his hand through Sik- kim from Tibet. Hodgson did not see, or describe, the skin of the Shou which he obtained in the Nepal Tarai; and the only Shou skins he ever seems to have described are those with @ small white caudal disk, and a dark mesial line running down. e picture which he gives of his Shou the stag of the Saul forest, in connection with his note No. 117 of the B.A.S. Journal, 1841, and the description of the horns of the Shou or Tibetan stag (Cervus affinis) in his note No. 5 of 1851, wi n ll I think be found on comparison to apply with equal ex- actitude to a specimen in m session of the Shou now known i 0 fr The left antler in that case is the normalone. I think, there fore, that it is quite possible that the skull and horns which Vol. X, No. 4.] The ‘« Shous’’ Deer of Tibet. 119 [W.S.] Hodgson first saw and described while in Nepal came from Western Tibet and belonged to a ‘‘ Shou ’’ from that part of the country, and that the specimen would have rejoiced also in a large white caudal disk had the skin been present with the other spoils. The Shou known now as Cervus affinis is I think the stag specimens of Shou obtained by Major Iggulden near Lhassa during the Younghusband Mission were all of Cervus affinis, and not of wallichii. he last and third kind of Shou in Tibet is the brown stag known as Thorold’s Deer, or Cervus albirostris. The live specimen now in Nepal, of which the photographs (pl. XV, fig. 6 ; and plate XVII) give a good idea, corresponds fully with the is said to have been caught near Hokku Djong about 80 miles to the S. E. of Lhassa. Turning now to the second species of Shou or Cervus affinis of Hodgson. The three photographs (on plate XV, fig. a; and plate XVI) give an idea of the appearance of a young stag in his third year. He was imported to Katmandu for Maharaja Sir Chandra Shumshere via Lhassa in 1912, with the Thorold’s deer, and is also said to have come from the vicinity of Hokku Djong. Except upon the living specimen in Nepal I have never before seen in Nepal a skin of Cervus affinis, i.e. that of a Shou with the small white caudal disk and dark mesial line dividing it and the tail. All the skins that have previously been shown to me by the Maharaja have had the big white caudal Cervus wallichii. My inference from this fact is that the Shous found in Tibet to the North of Central and Western Nepal are probably all wallichii and not affinis. (b) Cervus albirostris. . TAX 218d | ‘PIGBI 'X TA “Bueg ‘0g sy ‘uimor *sLIjSOJ1g]e SNnAII~) aa! : 4 on 4 WAX 9? ld | PIGI “XK PA *F80g 0g sy ‘unos 16, The Belabo Grant of Bhojavarman. By R. D. Banerst, M.A., Indian Museum, Calcutta. [With Plates XVIIL—XX.] The copper plate on = the oo record is incised was discovere uhammadan cultivator in the village of Balnbe or Belaba in the district of Dacca. It was purchased from him by Babu Pramatha Nath Dutta, B.A., of Dacca. A Hosa of the text prepared by Pandit Bidhu- bhushan Goswami, M.A., appeared in the Dacca Review for August 1912, with a translation by Messrs. S. N. Bindes, M.A., K. K. Sen, M.A., and N. K. Bhattasali, M.A., a historical introduction by Mr. Bhattasali, and a preface by Mr. F. D. Ascoli, M.A., I.C.S. A small photograph of the inscription appeared i in the next issue “Of the Journal. An improved ver- sion of the text and translation by Mr. Radha Govinda Basak, M.A., Lecturer in Sanskrit in the Rajshahi College, appeared in the Bengali monthly journal Sahitya for Sravana and Bhadra of the Bengali year 1319. Mr. Basak’s edition of the text is not free from mistakes, and he was obliged to se fn in two Supervision, and the photograph of the seal was taken by Messrs. Johnston and Hofimann of Calcutta he inscription is incised on a single plate of copper and consists of fifty-one lines of writing, of which 26 are to e found on the first = and the remaining 25 on the mead. The royal — attached to the top of the plate. The plate itself measures 103” in length and 93” in breadth. The seal is round in ae with a row of round beads running along ~ circumferences. There is a small rosette above the topmost bead. e impression on the seal consists of two concentric circles, the outer one of which is higher and thicker than the inner one, and a circular sunken areainside. This 122 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (May, 1914. 3”, The seal is referred to in the text of the inscription as ‘the seal of the wheel of Visnu’’ (L. 48). ext of the inscription is divisible into the usual parts :— a (i) The metrical portion giving the genealogy of the King; (ii) the prose portion containing the names of the donee and the object of the grant; (iii) the imprecatory verses ; an (iv) the date. The metrical portion consists of fourteen and a half verses and supplies us with the following account :— «“The sage Atri was the son of the Self-existent-one. The moon was born from the rays which issued from his eyes (v. 1). From him Budha son of Rohini and from Budha, Pururavas, son of Ila, who was the chosen husband of Urvasi, was born. He procreated Ayus, and from him was born Nahusa, who was equal to Manu and from him was born Yayati. He received Yadu as his son. In the royal family which spread out from Yadu, Virasri and Hari were born many times (v. 3). In this family was born Hari who was a part incarnation of the lover of the milkmaids, the stage manager of the Mahabharata, the Great Krsna (v. 4). These Yadus gn (v. 6). From him was born Jatavarman, who had married Virasri, the daughter of Karnna (the Cedi King), and spread his sway in the Anga country, defeated the King of Kamarupa, man (v. 12). From them was born Bhojadeva (v. 13). The inscription is written in protobengali characters of = late eleventh or early twelfth century a.p. It refers itsel to the reign of PaRaMa-VAISNAVA-PARAMESVARA-PARAMA-BHAT- TARAKA-MAHARAJADHIRAJA SRI-Buosa (DEVA), who meditated on the feet of MamaraAgapHidsa SAMALAVARMMADEVA, and was issued from the victorious camp of Vikramapura. It records the grant of the village of Upyalika pertaining to the Khandala of the eight gacchas of KauSimbi, in the mandala of Vol. X, No. 5.] The Belabo Grant of Bhojavarman, 123 [N.S8.] Adhahpattana of the Paundrabhukti to a Brahmana named Ramadevagarmman, Santyagaradhikyta, of the Savarnna gottra, a student of Kanva sakha of the white Yajurvveda, whose pravaras were Bhrgu, pani Apnavan, Aurvva and Jama- dagni; and who was a great-grandson of Pitamvaradevasarm- man, an inhabitant of the village of Siddhalain Northern Radha (Uttara- Radha) who had emigrated from the middle country (Madhya- Deéa), grandson of Ts gach ihade Caan en and son of Visvaripadevasarmman. The grant was issued on the 14th! day of the month of fats in the fifth year of the King’s reign. The principal importance of the grant lies in the bringing to light of a new relations to the already known ones. Previous to the discovery of this record it was not known that the sarc in their ing themselves for three generations at least. The following genealogical table shows the relations of the new dynasty with the Palas of Bengal and the Kalachuri-Haihayas of Tripuri :— PAtas, Kavacoris. YApavas. Mahipala I, Gangeyadeva, Nayapala, Karnnadeva, Vajravarmman, Vigrahapala II1l—m. Yauvanagri, Yasahkarona, Viragri m.—Jatavarmman, | ee | Mahipala II, Sirap&la IJ, Ramap@la. Gayakarnna. Samalavarmman. Besides this, the inscription proves that for three genera- tions at least in the 11th or 12th centuries 4.D., Eastern Ben- Yadavas got hold of a strong place named Simhapura. This place appears to have remained a Yadava stronghold for a Simhapura. It gives in detail a description of a dynasty of adava king of Simhapura consisting of twelve princes in dhe ee ions. ' It should be noted that Prof. EAD Basak reads the date as 19th 1 Srdvana pind: Vol. I, p. 10. 124 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914. Sainghapuram rajyam-adyugad dadhatam Si1-Senavammanamarajarsih prakramen-asit, II—V, 2. This shows that in the 6th and 7th centuries a.p. Singha- ura or Simhapura was regarded by the Yadavas as their ances- tral territory. The place has been indentified by Dr. Bihler with the Sang-ho-pu-lo described by Hiuen-Thsang.'! Simhapura is common as the name of towns in ancient India and we have another ‘‘Singhpoor or Seehore’’ in Malwa.* The inscription does not state definitely who founded the kingdom of the Yadavas in the extreme East. The genealogy of the family begins with Vajravarmman, but there is nothing to show that he was a king himself. We have more definite information about his son Jatavarmman who is said _to have had aspirations for Imperial power. The words vitatavan sarvea -bhaumasriyam should be taken with great caution. The phrase most probably indicates that he (Jatavarmman) acquired independence. From the same verse (v. 8) we learn that Jatavarmman married Viraéri, the daughter of Karnna, so he Karnnadeva on one side and the Palas Mahipala I, Naya- pala and Vigrahapala. A description of the war will be found in detail elsewhere.’ He is also said to have defeated a ; e person named Govarddhana. Two men of this name are to ound in contemporary records :— ing of Kausambi whose name has been read Dvorapavarddhana by Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Sastri and which seems to be the copyist’s mistake for Govardhana.° (2) A Brahmana general of the King of Southern Bengal ' Beal’s Si-yu-ki, Vol. I, pp. 143-147. 2 Forbes, ‘*‘ Rasmala,’’ p. 348, * Mem. A.S8.B., Vol. IlI, p- 22 (I. 9). + Mr. Radha Govinda Basak felt uncertain about this word and Mr. Nagendra Nath Vasu reads Pandresu (Paundresu) instead of y® 2ng?2u). 5 Palas of Bengal in the Memoirs A.9.B., Vol. V. § Ibid., p. 37 (II. 6). Vol. X, No. 5.) The Belabo Grant of Bhojavarman. 125 [NV.8.] or Valavalabhi, whose son, Bhavadevabhatta, was the minister of Harivarmman.! It should be noted that the King of Kaugaimbi mentioned in the Ramacarita of Sandhyakaranandin was not a king of Kausambi in the Madhyadesa (Kosam near Allahabad) but a minor prince of Bengal, because the Belabo grant proves that there was a KauSaimbi in the Paundra bhukti. It is most probably the modern Pargana of Kusumba or Kusambi in the Rajshahi District.? Jatavarmman had ason by Viragri, named Samalavarmman. At this point at least one new name is introduced. This is Udayin. By aslip of the pen tasya instead of tatha has been written at the beginning of the tenth verse. There are some more mistakes or omissions in the verse which makes it ver difficult to understand it. Mr. Basak takes the word Udayin in its literal sense and makes the other name Jagad-vijayamalla an adjective of Manobhi (Kama) but he fails to interpret the real connection between verses 9 and 10. Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Sastri and Babu Nagendra Natha Vasu, who has merely quoted the former’s opinion, take Udayin and Jagadvijayamalla as proper names, and relying on the name ‘* Malavyadevi’’ assert that Udayin is the same as the Paramara Udayaditya who defeated the Kalacuri-Cedi King Karnna and identify Jagadvijayamalla with Jagaddeva or Jagdeo, the youngest son of Udayaditya who served under Jayasimha-Siddharaja of the Chaulukya dynasty of Anahila- patak i i and the tenth verse is not intelligible if ‘‘Udayi’’ is not taken as a proper name. The word ‘‘ Jagadvijayamalla’’ is more difficult. It can easily be taken to be an adjective of Manobhii and at the same time it can be said that it is a proper name. The last view is most probably the correct one dayi’s son is mentioned in verse 10 and so it is quite natural to expect the name after it. The name Malavyadevi has led Mahamahopidhyaya Haraprasad Siastri to place the people named in these verses in the Malava country or modern Malwa. But the difficulty caused by the difference between ot the names Jagaddeva and Jagad-vijayamalla cannot be so Vijayamalla than Jagaddeva, and we find two kings of this name in the Chalukya dynasty of Kalyani. But here we do | Epi. Ind., Vol. VI, p. 203. eee 2 W. W. Hunter, Statistical Account of Bengal, Vol. VIII, Rajshahi and Bogra, p. 304. 126 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914. in-law of Saémalavarmman, must remain an open question so long as fresh material is te available. ame of the ti in which the village granted was Delta than it does at present. The land granted measured 1 Pataka and 9} Dronas. Among the names of officers we find a new name Pithikd-vitta. The name of the composer of the verses of the grant is Purusottama. Two persons of this name are known to have belonged to this period according to Mahamahopadhyaya Haraprasad Sastri. One is known from the Sadukti-Karnamrita! and the other for his Supplement of the Amarakosa,? Haravali, etc. The only other point of interest in _ grant is the 4th verse. Here the use of the term amédvatara raises some doubts. Perhapsit socfiete a veiled Soca to Harivarmman. . Devout Vaisnavas regard Krsna as a full incarnation and mae not style him amsdvatara. But it should ES noted that the Visnu Purana refers to Krsna as the am{avatar The characters are Bengali characters of the ith century A.D. The principal rate is the use of the Nagari an e after the 9th in line 17. The 14th verse has been very care- lessly beans Single letters have — — in many cases. Cf. m in 1. 22 and bhavatam in 1. 3 I edit the inscription from the original plate :— TEXT. Obverse. 1. Om Siddhi [h] 4 Svayambhuvam-ih-apatyam | munir-atri [r] divaukasim | Tasya yan-nayanam tejas=ten=4 2. -yata Candramah ui (1). Rauhineyo Vu(Bu)dhas = tas- mad = asmad = =aila-Pururavah [1] Jajfie svayam-vrtah kirttya . ¢-Orvvas asya ca bhuva ca yahw ). hes py-ayum samajija- nan-mManusamo rej fine tato amide fj K -palo Nahasas *-tat maharajo “Yayatih sutam [1] S-opi prapa yandum * tate Ksiti-bhu- 1 Notices of Skt. MSS., Vol. ITI, P. 138 : 2 Aufrecht Cat., Vol. I, p. 342. 3 Read Nahusas. + Read yadum Vol. X, No. 5.] The Belabo Grant of Bhojavarman. 127 [W.8.] 5. -jam vamé-oyam-ajjambhate ’ [\] Vira-Sris = ca Haris = ca yatra yad- bhasah* pratyaksam-ev-aiksatu ® || (3). . Gopi-sata- kelikarah Krsno mahabharata-sutradharah _ one eerie vata- rah pradur-vabhav-oddhrta-bhtimi-bharah u (4). Pum- i apo trayi na ca taya hina na nagna iti trayya [fi]-c-Adbhuta-sangaresu ca rasad-rom-odgamair- varmminah [1] varmman-oti-gabhira-nadma-dadhatah Slaghyau bhujau bibhrato bhejuh Simbhapurari guham- iva mrgendranam harer-vandhavah [n] (5) 10. havad-atha kada acid-yadavinarh camunam samara- gai en mangalam VAJRAVARMMA [ | Sama- a iva ripdnam soma-vad =vandhavanam kavir-api ca eae panditah panditanam ti ((). A- 12. TAVARMMA tato hee a iva Santanoh dayavra-. tam ranah krida tyago yasy 13. -tsavah w (7). Caan tases prthu-Sriyam parinayan- Karyyasya VirnaSpiyaw y-Ongesu prathayafichriyam paribha- vam 14, satan rneecel: ities age Ud Nindan- Divy 4-bhuja- Sriyam vikalayan yam kurvan $Srotriya- 15, aeeckivais vitatavan = ya sarvabhauma-Sriyam f\ (8). Virasriyam-ajani Simalavarmmadeva 6. Siimaitjagat-prathama-margala-nimadheyab fy] kim- varnnayam y-akhila-bhipa-gun-opapanno dosa manag-api padam na krtah prabhur-mme u [9]. 1 -resu [i] yaS-candrahasa- prativimvitam s svam-ekam mukba sammukham-iksate sman (10). Tasya Malavyadevy * 19. sit=kanya _trailokyasundari jagadvijayamallasya vaijayanti manobhuvah t (Ll) + urnne-py-ase 20. -sa- bhipala-putrinam -avarodhane [j\]_ tasy =asid= agra-mahisi s-aiva Samalavarmmanah (12). Asi- 21. -t=tayoh sunur*ih-anuripah Skri-BaoyavaRMM- obhaya-varhSadipah [1] Patresu ora daSasu ye- : 2. -na sneho na luptas =ca hatarm tama’ =ca " (13). Ha dhik [ka]stam-aviram-adya-bhuvanam bhiyopi kam rakgasi- -m-utpat-oyam- -u{pa]sthitostu kusali , lavdha (#) dhiyal u (14) Iti yam guna-gathabhis-tusta- . -va purusottamah [1] majjayanniva Naa Aeon -may- Snande mahodadhau iti (15) Sa khalu Sri VikRaMaPU A Samavasita sidan skandhavarat Maharaja- ahinija ‘Set SAMALAVARMMA-DEVA 1 Read °ujjrmbhate. ? oe ped valuta. 3 Read aiksata. + Read siin 6 Read kim. 6 Read Simajjaya’. 7 Read Maha’. 128 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914. _ — PARAMA-VAI3 NAVA-PAR mPpcvARA-PARA FANAMA FARA 26. MABHATTARAKA MAHiRiJADHIRAJA SRimaD- Baosa[H| Second Side. aT. Heaps hero amen Adhahpattana-man- dale Kausamvi-agtagaceh a-kha- 28. nala-sai{ vada} Upyalika-grame — guvak-Aadi- sameta.- sapade-navadron-ad 29. -ka-pa ae. samupagat-asesa-raja-rajanyaka- rajii-ranaka-ra- 30. -japut ese tow purohita pithikavitta-mahadharm- madhyaksa mahasandhiv 31. -grahika mahisenspati mahamudradhikrta anta- ranga vrhaduparika mahaksa 2. -talika mahapratthara mahabhogika maha-vyihapati mahapilupati ma -nastha td sadhika caur-oddharanika nauvala-hasty- asva-go-mahis- ajavik-adi- vyaprtaka pcan dandapasika dandanayaka viseyapaty-adin anyamés-ca sa -la-r: po east aig [2] dhyaksapracar-oktan-ib- akirttitan katte Bhatt. a-jati- -yan janapadan ksettrakaramé-ca vrahmanan vrah- eh tapise yath-arham-manayati 37. vodhayati samadisati ca matam-astu bha [va] tam | sabia ca apts bhimir-iyam sva- 38. simavacchinna trna-yuti-gocara-paryanta satala sod- desa simrapanasd sa- guvaka-nalikera sa-lavand sa-jalas ha [li] sa-gartt- osara pcpacitmet & pari- 40. -hrta-sarvapida acada-bhada-prave$a_ akificit-pragra- hya samasta-raja-bhog ga-ka- -ra hiranya-pratyaya- sahiti Savarnna-sagotraya ee .Cyavana-Apnuvan 42. -rvva-Jamada agni-pravaraya Vajasaneya caranaya Yajur-vveda-Kanvarsakhdhyay - : Madhyadesga bg al gaa Uttara-Ridhayam Siddha- fe-grimiye Pitamva (ba) ra-edeva 44. Sarmmanah Aabattee yn Jagannatha devaSarmma- nah setae bo Visvaripadevasarmma 45. -nah putraya Sintyagaradhikrta Sri-Ramadevasarm- mane | Stimate Bhoja- 46. -varmmadevena punye ahani vidhivad-udaka-pirva- am krtva bhagavantam Vasudeva-bha- 47, -ttarak am-uddisya mata-pitror-Atmanas-ca punya- yeti aaiare acandrarka-ksi- 8. -ti-samakadlam yavat bhu (bhi)-micchidra-nyayena Senet ess scliseeroernpinle dah tamra-Sa- Vol. X, No. 5.) The Belabo Grant of Bhojavarman. 129 [N.S.] 9. -sani-krtya ~D ee a mmrso nw Bhavanti c-Attra Sag dara Sloka 0. a-dattam- erailitd am-va yo hareta vasundharam sa- een ri (kr) mir-bhatva pitrbhih sahapa- . -cyate » Srimad adiya samvat 5 Srat ED caics 14 [n] Ni Anu Mahakea ni [Wi] eee ee eee eos PLATE XVIII. 1914. Jour, As. Soc. Beng., Vol. X. SEAL OF THE BELABO GRANT OF BHOJAVARMAN. Jour. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. X. 1914 PLATE XIX. ee ee i, Me > ie aries are ze Si HAMAMAAI ACO ATM ATTA AME ath PUAVROMIAAMSMGaAIse Naat Peri: mg etme e TIE NAN AN GASET ea a (HE dag aha SAAS DART aa a4 HMAM ARS 5 42 he 6; rs “HaiMIASa, AAGMBE GY ITFEA: pas ete eH cla SF tfla AMAIA AAG: RASA AAR A di ; if BS ANS TAS ome smal aad uid 44 TAFT AGM ZUM STAT AM el Ea AGRE RAR < Ae See tee e ; ass int «a a el 1a Nass Sawa nee eta AI Ste eae Pls? HET gine d MGA ‘ Ga a: ah laa otal a MIA AADAA NASA GW age nasa Tam vig Mag ngann eae wi huanadiaga aay FIDATAAS ARIA RANATA ayer Suan aga ok ELEN Guay a panei BELABO GRANT OF BHOJAVARMAN FIRST SIDE Jour. As. Soc.Beng., Vol. X, 1914, 3 Sha aK oh nats ang. eee Sea alld x ial aC aa Ad nia aiaga TAY atime nies ¥ z panache AY Zea Ana Ada Uzaa nae RU A Z| agen Ze cere ala aaa aia maaan aes du as asa scstan Wad (ANIA ds faa: MM As E RE SE insite aa ib iat § BCS efalcg) PRAM AT MIAN MANA A ¢ AIIAMHS 17. Relics of the Worship of Mud-Turtles (Triony- chidae) in India and Burma. By N. Annanpaue, D.Sc., F.A.B.S., and MAHAMAHOPA- DHYAYA HaraprRaSAD Suistet, C.I.E., M.A., F.A.8.B. (Read at the First Indian Science Congress, January 17th, 1914). [As my friend Haraprasad ShAstri and I naturally regard mud-turtles from entirely different points of view—he as a sanscritist, I as a zoologist —I have arranged these notes as a kind of dialogue in which the two authors express their opinions quite independently.—N. A.J. I. Mud-turtles kept living in shrines at the present day. _ The practice of keeping tortoises living in shrines as sacred animals is probably one of wide distribution in the East and 1s not now confined to any race or cult. Both land-tortoises and aquatic species are thus honoured in China; at Penang Trionyx live in a semi-domesticated state. The first of these because the form is only known to occur in the Central Provinces and Orissa in the river-system of the Mahanaddi. The large bathing-tank in which these animals are kept is connected with any of the larger temples for which the town is famous. The tank covers an area of perhaps half an acre and _ |! Ree. Ind. Mus., vol. VI, p- 252. Before this subspecies was dis- tinguished I thought that the Puri turtles might represent T. hurum (op- eut., p. 155), but I had not then had a clear view of them. 132 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (May, 1914. The Brahmins attached to the shrines are in the habit of inviting pilgrims and other visitors to feed the turtles with sweetmeats made of parched rice and palm-sugar. To attract provided ; but they often decline to make an appearance. They are less shy in doing so at dusk than by daylight. season. Dr. B. L. Chaudhuri informs me that there is another tank in Orissa in which tame T'rionyces are kept. i refused him permission to take away any of the turtles on any consideration, but they probably belong to the same race as Puri ones, for this race is found in the river Mahanaddi at Sambalpur. The pool at Mandalay in which mud-turtles are kept is in the famous Arrakan Pagoda. It is much smaller than the tank at Puri and entirely surrounded by buildings. Many of served in museums. They come when called, and eat curry a rice thrown into the water. They are tamer than those uri. a zoological point of view the Mahommedan mud- F turtles of Chittagong are much the most interesting of those we é , Museum the skeletons of the specimens on which the original description of the species had been based. I redescribed in 1912.! As Anderson’s account of the 1 Op. cit., p. 164, pl. V, fig. 5. Vol. X, No. 5.] The Worship of Mud-Turtles. 133 [N.S.] external oer gabon of this species appears to have been based on pecim either dried or preserved in spirit, and as nothing ataver’ has hitherto been known of its habits, I give here some notes on those I saw alive in 1912. They live in a large pond mph se to the shrine of Sultan Bagu Bastan (a saint who is said to have lived in the eighteenth century) about five miles eon the ive of Chittagong. The Mahommedans will neither kill a nor permit them to be killed ; they believe that they are in some way connected with the saint. Their tank is surrounded by several flights of steps leading down to a platform a few inches under water, an the turtles are so tame that they come to feed when called, placing their fore feet on the edge of the platform or even climbing bodily upon it and stretching their necks out of the water. The largest are tamer than the smaller ones. Some wooden screwers held in our hands. They greatly preferred the chicken to bananas, which as a rule (but not always) they rejected. The only sound they emitted was a low hiss. When undisturbed they remained at the bottom of the pond half buried inmud. A man connected with the shrine told us that they left the water every evening and climbed asmall hill, on Soe they slept. He said that they laid their eggs on the same hill during the ‘‘rains’’. People sometimes found dead écvties and buried them. The oldest individual were said to be about 150 years old. The largest turtles had a carapace at least 3 feet long and of extraordinarily massive appearance. This was greatly in- creased by the fact that there was always a deep longitudinal to others, the stain had a cidkoily taibarctitie appearance. The carapace itself was almost smooth, bearing only a few indistinct prominences posteriorly. The heads of very large turtles was much broader, and the snouts blunter, than those of well-srown but not very large individua The normal colouration of well- -orown turtles was as fol- lows :—Dorsal surface of carapace copper-brown indistinctly marbled with a darker shade and a little iridescent in some apne’ than between the eyes. The co oppery colour of the cara- pace was brightest in half-grown individuals. In some such individuals the black markings of the head already predentin 134 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914 ated over the green areas, and in all very old turtles this was the case, so that the colouration of the head might be described as black with small greenish spots, which tended to disappear altogether with age. The smallest turtle seen had a carapace rather over a foot long. It was diversified above with black and yellow vermiculations which formed an incomplete reticu- lation; it bore traces of four large blackish ocelli with pale disease or injuries. [(N. ANNANDALE.] II, Some instances of the use of mud-turtles in worship and icono- graphy in Northern India. (a) Altars (Vedi) raised for Vedic sacrifices are generally built on bricks of various shapes, sizes and forms; but when the ground is prepared for building an altar, they make arather deep depression at the centre of the area covered by the altar. In that depression they put a mud-turtle and give it food to last till the end of the sacrifice and the destruction of the altar. If the turtle is alive, the sacrifice is regarded as ausp!- cious ; if it dies, inauspicious. There was such a Vedi (of course without the tortoise) in existence at the house of the being represented by the lower part of the animal. The second of the group is the Mantri or minister. He is of the same shape as the Raja, but smaller in size and has two companions. _. he t there are fifty-five figures of tortoises and two more, but they Vol. X, No. 5.] The Worship of Mud-Turiles. 135 [NV.8.] (a Sanskrit encyclopaedia of the 6th century A.D.) kings are enjoined to rear up tortoises and turtles with the following auspicious signs :—The colour should be either like that ofa crystal or silver variegated with lines of blue. The shape ing sun with spots (most likely black) like mustard. such a tortoise is kept in the house it increases the great- ness of the king. The tortoise which has a body black like ; is y is the second member of the Buddhist Triad, but Dharma is always represented as a stupaor mound. The eartiest stupas re of a semi-circular shape, but in the course of time the 18 &@ small stupa of the kind in the Indian Museum. The wor- shippers of Dharma I believe associated the five-niched stupa 136 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{May, 1914. with some totemistic form of tortoise-worship, and now as they have forgotten that they are Buddhists, they worship the tortoise-shaped deity as Kurmartpi Bhagavan. [HARAPRASAD SHASTRI. | III, Some general considerations, Chelonia play an important part in Hindu iconography mainly in two connections (if they are actually distinct), viz. the Tortoise Incarnation of Vishnu and the myth of the Churning of the Ocean. Both are frequently illustrated in the stone-carvings of temples, in the wood-carvings of proces- -of both subjects the tortoise is highly conventionalized and cannot be recognized as a representation of any particular type of chelonian. In every case, however, in which it is recog- nizable, it clearly represents a Trionychid, with its round, flat carapace devoid of any external plates, its very long neck, comparatively small head and tubular nostrils. In some cases in which the figure is unusually elaborate I believe that the actual species that has served as odel is Chitra indica. This species is distinguished from all other Indian forms by the peculiar shape of the head and by the proximity of the eyes to the tip of the snout. It appears to be represented even In some sculptures from Madras. ! Mr. Baini Prasad of the Government College, Lahore, has recently obtained a imen from a small stream on the Indus system neat Ferozepur.—June 25th, 1914. Vol. X, No. 5.] The Worship of Mud-Turtles. 137 [V.S.] and Bihar, because most of them are used as focd and some are more highly esteemed than others.! The largest and most powerful species is Chitra indica. It is apparently the species that i is regarded as the ‘‘ vehicle ’’ of the goddess of the Jumna,” just as the crocodile is the ‘‘ vehicle’’ of Mother Gan ges. Su ch evidence as is at present available would, therefore, seem to suggest that the ‘‘ tortoise ’’ of Indian iconography is not one of the Jand-tortoises Pietadigiian but a mud-turtle representatives of the family probably share or shared in the respect due to the me assumed in an incarn ation, but it is ate even to kbtack boats with blows. Its carapace alon e may attain a length of at least six feet. It is, therefore, an animal that would naturally attract both the attention and the respect of a primitive people. [N. ANNANDALE.] ADDENDUM. Note by Mr. H. E. Stapleton on the Chittagong Turtles. The correct name of the saint (not * place > T think) known te you a8 ‘‘Sultan Bagu Bastan’’ is ‘‘ Sultan Bayazid of Bastam.” ‘Bastam’ (or ‘ Bistam’) is a town in Persia, and the exercises The mausoleum, which i is some 5 miles out of Chitta- 1 See Chaudhuri, Rec. Ind. Mus., vol. VII, p. 212. Various species of tortoises are all ee: as clean food for Hindus. There are Hindus Ww abso hard shell above and a hard cartilage below. It has a ridge on its back. It is the species called Dhoor in Mr. B. L. Chaudhuri dhongoka (Gray). The eggs & oo considered a delicacy. These are found inside the tortoise in the for a garland several yards long. There is another cong called Su ae a 5 coat land-tortoise, which is also eaten by the r classes. to (that is, ‘‘ wooden”’) is sal Baro the i i c e individuals of ie species may often be observed in the water from Gar ian it passe nes railway bridge at Allahabad, a short ores below the = ey the Jumna and the ur1, loc 138 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914.] gong, has a tank close by which is full of turtles locally known as Mddaris and fishes called Gajaris Darge Ophiocephali—N. I have not yet found out what these words mean, but Shah got hold of a Persian History of Chittagong which, I hope will give further information on t u The saint, I believe, did not die in Chittagong, but is buried somewhere up-country. Probably, the shrine was formerly a Hindu or aboriginal one which was taken over by the Muhammadans. [H. E. S. 1-7-1914.] SNS A RAR AAA AN OE 18, A short account of our present knowledge of the Cestode Fauna of British India and Ceylon, By T. SoutHwELL, A.R.C.Sc. (Lonp.), F.L.S., F.Z.S., Dy. Director of Fisheries, Bengal, Behar and Orissa ; ; Honorary Assistant, Indian Museum. [Presented at the First Indian Science Congress, January 16th, 1914.] The Cestoda are a group of worms commonly known as Tapeworms. There are about 3,000 species known. They are all parasitic, and the adult forms invariably live in the intes- tine of the animals infected. They are introduced into carnivo- rous animals by their Leg and into herbivorous animals by means of water and esides being of considerable scientific reper enee, they are a group of animals stot entirely devoid of human interest. The orient pearl of Ceylon is, in reality a pseop agin laid round the dead remains of a cestode larva It is reported that in Abyssinia, owing to the practice of eating raw beef, every human individual, whether male or female, is Selected with worms from the fourth or fifth year of age. The same remark is, to a great extent, true of the Esqui- maux, the Buratis, and of the late American ‘slaves. Taeniasis, or Taenia helminthosis, is very common inGermany. In India human infection is much rarer, hia, to the fact that the flesh of animals is not extensively eaten. Indian animals generally, are, however, usually heavily infected, particularly sheep, goat and 2 ultry. he range in size within the group Cestoda is remarkable. Ee peices granulosus Soares 1786), Rudolphi 1805, a worm inhabiting the intestines of the dog and other similar animals, rarely measures more than 1 to 2 mm. in length, whilst Taenia saginata, Goeze, 1782, a human parasite common = Europe, occasionally attains a length of 10 metres (over 33 fee As all adult members of the group live in the itedina! Cavity, they are in every case provided with hooks or suckers, or both, to enable them to attach themselves to their host. From this head, a chain of segments or 7B 22 cia ich is produced. ese, as the mature, may drop off singly or in clusters. In most cases each segment is hermaphrodite and contains a single set of male and female reproductive organs n the genus Dioicocestus, Fuhrmann , 1900, recorded from a stork (Plegadis guarauna), and a diver (Colymbus dominicus), the entire strobila is either male or fem Beddard has recently recorded (P.Z. s., London, December, . 140 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (May, 1914, 1912) a peculiar asexual tapewerm (Urocystidium gemmiporum), from eh rodent, Fiber zibethicus. mentation of the strobila is absent or indistinct in cer- tain of the lower forms of Cestoda, and also in the following genera Triplotaenia, Boas, The family Fimbriaviidae, Frolick, 1802. Tetracisdicotyla , Fihrmann, 1907, Typically, each segment possesses a single genital aperture situated laterally. These pores may be unilateral, or regularly, or irregularly, alternate. Genital pores appear to be absent in the genus number. obT o+! Mubarak on the reverse is a ten- tative reading, the stroke form- ing base of the kaf being alone visible. Type B.—Period 1231—1232 a.m. App. 47a. and 49a.0. wts. 127—118 grs. Obverse. Reverse. % gle ast s date | oe je sh pls number. 160 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (May, 1914. Type C.-—Period 1234—1236 a.u. App. 53a-c. wts. 121—116 grs. Obverse. Reverse. glo yy I Urgle date number. cngls aiwo obT oom! v JBBRAS, Vol. XX, No. LVI, p. 439 and plate. a similar types of Aurangzib and ‘Alamgir II will, I believe, un- hesitatingly pronounce in favour of the second ‘Alamgir. The sizes i and vary from an imperfect circle to an uneven square. The cerial paisa (pice). The mint marks to be found on the copper pieces will be discussed later. The coins (2) (mint marks and comments). i remarkable variation of mint marks, as a mine which might profitably be dug in. I was, in fact, forced to make my differ- entiations by mint marks or not at all. The immediate cause of my attention being turned to the matter was the sentence that I have quoted from the Bombay Gazetteer that Mr. Dun- lop, the first Collector of Ahmadabad, finding the commerce of the city much impeded by the want of coin, obtained per- mission to reopen the mint at Ahmadabad. Coins of the period subsequent to the British occupation were known to exist both in Dr. Taylor’s cabinet and in other collections, although no definite ascription of them had been made to Mr. Dunlop § Vol. X, No. 5.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXII. 161 [N.S.] Mint. It struck the eye on looking through Dr. Taylor’s cabinet that some coins of the later Mughals bore the ankush expected to contain coins which were obviously not Mughal. I therefore made a special search among the so-called sikkais of Ahmadabad, which are to be found in large numbers in the silver dealers’ shops. ‘These sikkais I found to be struck with extraordinary uniformity, so as to exclude the date both of the Hijri years and of the Mughal Emperor’s ‘‘ julis.’’ The result was that only about one coin in a hundred yielded the requi- site data, and it will be understood that a perfectly complete series was hard to obtain. A list of the known coins of the Ahmadabad Mint of and after 1165 4H. is to be found in the Appendix, which to a large extent explains itself. Its indebtedness for the years between 1165 and 1200 a.n. to Dr. Taylor’s cabinet will be see occupy this position. The last Mughal marks are those of Ahmad Shah (v. app. No. 1) and of ‘Alamgir IT (v. app. Nos. 5 n 6) e former resembles a sprig of a tree and is chiefly noticeable, because it appears to be reproduced on the copper coins Nos and 49a and b of the Appendix. This mark ay, h stands upright and not slantwise like the ‘‘ sprig. — may be made with Wright I.M.C. Vol. III, Mint mark o. 94. L ark on coins Nos. 5 and 6 in the Appendix is not especially distinctive. It bears a close resemblance to that on British-minted coins, Appendix No. 51, though the two marks ] The next distinctive mark is the ankush of which our earliest specimen is Appendix No. 2. It definitely replaces the sprig in the sin of juliis. Mention has of the evidence, which leads us to believe that the ankush is purely a Maratha sign. It seems conclusive enough. n the origin of the sign light is thrown by the Hon’ble Mr. Justice Ranade in his article on currencies and mints under Maratha rule in J.B.B.R.A.S., Vol. XX, No. LV. He remarks on page 162 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914. 199, “the Ankushi rupee, so called on account of the ankush or elephant goad which it bore on the inscription, was issue y the Rastes from their mint at Vai.’’ I do not know of any but the Ahmadabad rupees bearing the ankush, The quota- tion, if it refers to them, is doubly interesting. In any case, it provides another authority for the connection of the ankush mark on coins with the Marathas, Mr. Ranade gives other relevant information on page 198 id. ‘‘In the Peshwa’s own mints Malharshahi rupees appear to have been the standard. They were called Malharshahi after Malharrao Bhicaji Raste as stated above. This Raste family was at first a great banki firm, and Malharrao was the brother of Gopi Kalbhai, wife of Balaji Bajirao (Peshwa). When the Karnatic was conquer n A.H. variations of the ankush are introduced. only account for these by supposing that they are private in te If so, changes of head of staff must No. 33 the ankush with ar a The corresponding Hijri period is 1211—1212. The discrepancy need not, however, detain us- Vol. X, No. 5.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXII. 163 [V.S.] and No. 34 should read 42 or 43—1215 for 40—1215. The Hijri dates wanting on Nos. 32 and 33 are more probably 1214 and 1215 than anything else. I have said above that the mark at was maintained almost continuously until 1229 4.4. The exceptions are Nos. and 39 App. which bear the word tra in the place of at. The dates later a return was made to academical exactitude. The next coin (No. 42) tbe first of Akbar’s reign has the julus year to correspond with the Hijri date, and further the correcter symbol at (i.e. at+ the abbreviation sign |) is used instead of #1 for the first syllable of the word araaais. In No. 44 we note an additional sign, which seems to read w. Its meaning is obscure. It is only ossible to suggest it may stand for Khan, which in Gujarati frequently is so he resumption of the lease of Ahmadabad from the Gaikwar is marked by the issue of No. 46 without the sign 41. In its place is a sign like the spectacles on a cobra’s hood. Justice Ranade in the article referred to a few pages bac makes no mention of this mark, but it appears ona silver coin in my cabinet bearing the date 1244 in Maratha figures. The coin bears a very close resemblance to the Maratha Chhatra- pati(v. Dr. Abbott’s article in J.B.BR.AS., Vol. XX, No. LV) and its main ‘‘lieu de provenance >? ig Poona, although my specimen was discovered in Ahmadabad. These facts, it is true, do not throw much light upon the mark in question, but far useful as to suggest that it denotes an issue of the Peshwa rather than of the Gaikwar. 164 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {May, 1914. The ankush persists on this coin. It appears also on sub- sequent silver coins with the differentiation of two streamers attached until 1232—10. The ‘‘cobra’s spectacles’’ are now absent. Omitting for a moment mention of the copper coin of this epoch, we find No. 50 marking the restoration of Ahmadabad hmadabad was formally transferred to the British Government and the coins henceforth issued bear nothing but a simple conventional rose inthesinofthejuliis. This bearsa very close resemblance to the mark on Nos. 5 and 6 and in fact is identical with it save that it is somewhat more coarse p 8 gests that the British are inheritors of the Mughal Empire and rom the fact that rupees and half rupees of certain dates are found missing, it is probable that no coins were minted of these dates. This does not mean that the mint stopped issuing coins, but that no trouble was taken to change the dies. dates found are 1233, 1236, 1239, 1241, 1242, 1243, 1244, 1248 and 1249. Half rupees are listed in the Appendix of all these dates except 1239. It is possible that Nos. 55 and 58 are not of - 1236 and 1241, but probably these years were on the die, as after the first two or three years of British occupation, not more than one regular year was ever ascribed to a Hijri date, so far as can be determined. And the existence of both rupees and half rupees of certain dates and the absence of both denomina- tions of others certainly supports the view that the change 0 ates was made not regularly, but from time to time. Vol. X, No. 5.] Numismatic Supplement No, XXII. 165 [N.8.] the city was minting a series of coins of a particular stamp. The recognition of Shah Jahan III (v. app. No. 8 and 9) is not on the same footing. In his case, the death of ‘Alamgir the second was accompanied by the actual proclamation of Shah which claimant would prevail, and it causes no surprise to find ledged as Emperor. For the coin of Bidar Bakht I have referred to, we have, I think, an exact parallel in Nadir Shah’s issue of 1152 a.H. It is well known that Nadir Shah had no connection with Gujarat. He conquered Dehli and imprisoned the Emperor. d the Maratha Rangoji. * Neither of them was likely to recognize a foreign invader to the extent of striking coin in his name. Nadir Shah is said to have converted a portion of the plunder of Dehli into coin at Shahjahanabad, and from the similarity of style of the Ahmadabad to the other pieces of the invader, II, a.R. ahad, and the other a.z. 4, both with the plain ankush mark. The Marathas did not therefore cease coining as I have Su either issued coins under the names of the two rival Emperors at once or antedated the Shah ‘Alam issue, when the claim of that Emperor was ; Gs =] os endi a venture here to differ from Dr. Taylor (Coins of Ahmadabad J.B.B.R.A.S. 1901) who is of opinion that N&adir’s coin was struck at Ahmad 166 Journal of the Asiutic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914. probability seems to be on the side of the Ahmadabad as well as ins with other ‘‘ mint’’ names being all struck at one time in Dehli. It is a curious coincidence that Ghulam Qadir minted the ing of the coins referred to by Nadir Shih and Bidiir Bakht. I attach considerable importance to the differences of style of execution in the coins from the normal Ahmadabad type, as apart from these two exceptions, the Ahmadabad mint keeps to a uniform style for the century 1138 a.m. to 1237 a.H. and a few years after, Surat, 1913. A. MASTER. 167 “_ALSLII-IITA SLIT 9 | ier “1 8 RO Be vy ‘SDYIDADY ° | poqnpyuly sispuatine unyy uswopny st = IA t wie} a "ON | snorAoid Ul 8B AUIBS SI YIBUL OY IBY} SUBOUI “pr ** "pe Heese BO es fe Set GS FBR ae SS Ces A a ‘OLIT 0G 9snur Yor XXT] AV sey 4 | pus (745MM) “O'W'T 042 Ul 4eq3 SI f ON UIOD rig ITA-I | & | OLIT | ° Ky "‘PNGDPOUYP kLa}Ue UBIY ULwopT dh of I | & | OLtI | fe a é ‘€ pus | & & UV SI G9IT 88 BOLT INQ Surly OU oq UL o4KC hr : ITX-IITA oe ee ‘(4osaduy fo {yoyeq uo | | Ayourmou) poqopowiyp sainjidpo unify uswop si Ill 6.) GOTT tee e so 10% WV snyny 1eddoy ae eee | 4 | o- | ee be | | lv Oe IlA-] | Bd COTE Te A ay TA | 99Tt | a ‘poqoppuyp fidnoso spyipavyy ay f, | a | | | ‘seinsy URTIOYT “HABA, VATA, ul syguoyy = ‘“yond4s | (orga UiggtH poled 9 F oOIT |" Ustg pray | | ‘SHUVWAYY | SV Wy -aosed wig | ‘Paqnys ASUNLAYIO SSAJUN LAAZS SUL0D YF Vol. X, No. 5.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXI11. [V.8.] ‘UaLAV GNV GOT] ‘AVaVaGVWHY JO SNIOO “XTAONUddV [May, 1914. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 168 ee = “pr iy AI 10G1I-A 0021 | 82 pe we W | 3 ‘oosT Og ASMA YOM —Jy HV \v = ATI Ne 4 ‘ W | Iz gor Bee ae hae IIX-A ¥e | 961” a L106 des + “pe "* AL 96II-A S611 | £2 | “61 | * . La . ee fs. a | ie a ppiausgy fig pqnpowiyy fo aimadvo qT F611, pe IIX-A & | OTT | | at eae ae : i ee ee zi “a OWL ; a . : ee : “KL LI | pe IIX-A 08 | BOI le a1 it x, “po 1IX-A (ol | ssit | . : . 7a Ae Beige ei. ee See (ae Lote - mw) ae ae Art} oi ent S “ONT &t $er oe Ph | GAY ORUigA PSIT | SE Car s | L 8 aie op | aneett csit Boga - i ee voodnaf}*- ‘pm {°° ALE€SII-A Sst! Of ee opary, ais) w al ee ae “pr wate | I enn e “ , 16 = pe ee? | Lt | Shit | cr ueyep yeag| £ is | ‘seinsy ueWloyy ‘IB UIT uUlsyguOW, = yonys wy cy. ‘osroduigy ‘'SNUVWaY yoryas UIYyIA pone | ; 169 Vol. X, No. 5.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXII. [NV.S.] *sind00 YIBUI Jo esuByo oy} YolyM ul aBod oug SI “YW GE 7849 OJON ‘peqspemyy jo yno ‘zou1eA0s s Bayseg oy [Jom Avul gg [ensn sv Suors st oyep'y VW CULL, NG Be 68 ee “ADNYIDE) OF PLQDPOUY PY sasDa) DNYSaT : ‘ A er | SIél a ao a te ‘ysnyue edurs oy} 07 Unger oy} 930N | hy ae Le mt | oe | wv pee ** | 6081 | ff a ae ‘([jenuue | eq 0} Ulees YSnyUe oY} JO SUOTIYwIIBA OY) | k | tee | gg i | | | We: ae ‘ode ae 8 | 80aT ‘4001109 0q P[NOM GE JO FE OSBd SIYZ UI SoeII0 | | AJOA BUIODEq YUIOd SIyy WOAy SoZeP “YW OU, | | ‘Ul poy Usceq sey ynq ‘efqisia you sI ysnyue ey} jo uoMsod puvy-qjoy ey} Jo ejoym ey, | We s& | LOGI | | | pace \v bike ITx-I -€ | 90GI | | | | ‘uBy jo ssouTjus Aq yno pepModo yavyy | ** 16 88) °° AT GOGI“A 1021 | 66 | 061 c061 me ae its AI-I 66 | “g8010}UI Jo YaBUL JoYyZO OU SRY 41 8B UOAIS JOU SI DIUM cp “OAT UO ABOTO SI YrVUT oy} 9Nq ‘PP ‘ON WO eTQIsIA you st M oY ITV [May, 1914, sty Jo avot YIGp OY} UT PoIp IT WeTY, Yiag se YAVUL OYY JOYSIVAO TOYZVI SIOABISUE SIP CY] ‘osvey oy Jo [emouos oy ye Aof jo Ors -soudxe UB YJIM poyTeUl o1e pue “Y V eurEs oY} JO OZST-GIZIT AIqvqoad oae suLOD OMY OSE], YI Of pognpnwyp fo espe smaua. DaYseg Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 170 | ‘goe1109 Mou SI Ived “yy "YW OG] | Ls. | IVY FUT | 2 | = 171 Numismatic Supplement No, XXII. Vol. X, No. 5.] [NV.S.] jo Adoo w Ajqeqoid ‘gj a0 Z{ eq prnoys ‘yy" v| quawmUsaQoy) | ysuveg 02 pogqopouypy fo 4afsuv.y Duo | te i I "| S861 499.0) 02 PHQYpPYUYP 4900 puny 0} JUaWULeA~OH | | ysyug yun wonywy fig spou yawmaaby | | : Tx eee ed y4 | cezt Aquiqeqosd ye urst ty | de fe | ILA @ESI-XTI 1€21 | i | 1 ‘uDMywpH 07 ppoppyuyy satojsas vmysaq ‘paubis nuoog fo fqnasy, ff : TA | ’ C&Sl *(gourqeo Aur Ul suloo 10440 wodj poytiea A[QUonbesqng) ‘13 PEL ysIOM Bee "pe | set | OL | Bear esei0aAy * h Ajaeopo st yavor oyejduroo = > | h ae OL | ster ey, “e30[du100 you pue urod eYy Jo. espe ey} uo ole syuBUI esoyy, ‘ested Jo snjng or Alqeq -oid ynq ‘Z[ Jo [1 °q pjnoys ‘yy ‘eednas § | ** “pr : | —I | 6&1 setae ia Lp se gerne : OT | 1861 | | “gsred Jo snp | h ed | 6 aa | iv | ** TTA O6@I7KI Ozei | 6 | ** *¢ Ajqeqoad ‘oy JO G 9q Pfnoys “YW | deo hv ae 8 | O&SZI ‘poqppyuyy 4aa0 | | sayny pnysag MpnywyH YUM Soa Alay asna’y | ‘fr Be a: | 6 | 686T ste | . [May, 1914. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. Li2 ‘eodna § | : ‘IzBY) Jo BA oy} MOjeq eull] BI AOY OFBp—zZz 10 1% eq pynoys -eedna § “1G 40 OZ Eq PlNoYs “yy | “61 10 BT eq prnoys "yy | ‘eodna 4 ‘QT 10 Gf oq prnoys “yy "818 id qnoqe 4YySIemM ‘gy IO Cy eq pmnoys “yw "ST 10 ZT 9G plnoys. ww *Sa3 GTI-RTT ‘94 used a0 epag | “see1 Atquqoad “yy (ord) red a0 sning se ee ‘oodna f° ‘av | ° AB FUN ‘somndy UBUIO yy ur SyUO jy *yona4s yoryas UIYIIM poleg | = | SPs oe Bret | toe | rae | ot | —er | ol TeT | SI | 6831 $t | tt Sl | 9831 FI | 983- FI | 98SI | 8 | #8er at | yest ZI | ear Zl geal ne Flat Vv | . | Ww \ * w | 09 os W | 6g ss | W L eee | Lg + Ww 99 . | W | 99 ‘ | 7s “| ME fe lel ‘i - ° s a bf |, # has “| WL | 89 TOY i ee “aoreduagy | Jour., As. Soc. Beng. Vol X, 1914, PLATE IX. 8 Note POST-MUGHAL COINS OF AHMADABAD (the numbers correspond with those in the Appendix). (“‘Note” refers to the last paragraph of the Note at end of Appendix). Jour., As, Soc. Beng. Vol X, 1914, PLATE X POST-MUGHAL COINS OF AHMADABAD (the numbers correspond with those in the Appendix). Jour., As, Soc. Beng. Vol X, 1914, PLATE Xi. 2a (var) 47a POST-MUGHAL COINS OF AHMADABAD (the numbers correspond with those in the Appendix). 173 Vol. X, No. 5.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXII. [N.S] ‘g@ ‘ON 8B SI “ELV GIZL JO Aloo eyy, “9Xe} EY) UO Burpuodseaso9 Ajsvou qsou saved oy} JO OSOY} SB OUNBS O49 OA SYsEE EY T, “HV 611 SU puw -YA'y FE ‘9S ‘9s ‘OT “(LELI-) SL 'Y ‘puye—: wey, yds —! pUBY OF OUIOD OABY SUTOD BuIMOT[OS OY “48l] EAOGR OY 4no BulMBdp 1o4yV IA ON ‘G'S’ Wf wowoyddng orvuisiminN Ur opogav 8 JO[AVT, “Iq_ Wody UEHv, OV Joseduig ey} JO UOIsS990R JO SEyNp ayy, “UeAls you ere pozUTUL svar ULOO OY} YoIyR UIYIIH polJod oy} BuLUTUIAEZep SYZUOUL O44 O1QBIIE BT “Yy"Y OY} O1OYM sesvO UT *PpeoUOWIIOD So1d08 OYJ YOIYA UO oVVp O44 Fulaveq uloo JOA|IS oy} JO JoquINU oY} yuUIBSB s19}}0] [BIIos Aq pe InFuNstp ode ynq ‘Jequinu [BIIes eyeaedes B UeAIS YOU ov SUIOD — pe ’ Bical ey} 0} peu st yaw B sseyuN (‘S13 GL] gepun ysnf Ayuoavdde et) 4yZ1em paepueys voors ey9 yo seodna caw pojonb suroo [[y ‘qjosfur 20] PY PUB ‘pyqupemMly sopAvy, “Iq Joy J, ‘(onFowqwo 8 .4Yy SA, Wosy) LINESN, UBIPU] JOJ Spuyzs OWT UdATS oR uMBiIp Useq eABY Sed4y ey} YOR Wo I SJoUIqvo eoIY? OY} Jo SeUIBU OY YNG ‘ed 44 og 09 UOATS Ueeq Sey JoquInu suo AjUO ABTIUNTS 18 SJOUIGRS JUOJEYIpP UI SUJOO e1OLU JO OM} eAOYAA “poldod oY} Jo ealgvqzuesoadod ejqissod sv avy 8B eB sUIOO el,.,-—'aLON j \ *poonpo.ur | | swam oSvuioo jesoduy oy3 UeyA—gERI “CE81 lo | qyia gueproufoo Zureq “Ay §14}—Ppeso]e | Auormdde yur ‘“pesreyostp wsorwq yyy” “pe xe aD eee 19g1 °° “4 WOOL | "QO perio [[198 FULL | ** "pe ay Lo Ont ee | | (ee ‘oodna ¢ 8 “pr | ovee | ae 6FZI | oe rt | Ww | 89 ae “po pees | oe 6PZI | °° ‘6 Ww 9 | i -eodna } °° ‘pi | vee. | oe SPZI | °° ‘k | Ww 99 | j j i o* "pr | sane | 8Z SEZT o* oe | Ww | 69 ‘eodni f “pr sere o* FRET oe sé | Ww £9 "ere * "pr eene “* | wre oe “et | Ww £9 ‘oodna § .* “pr eee | * Pel .* 6 Ww | 29 - 174 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (May, 1914. 126. Gupta Go~p Corns FOUND IN THE BALLIa DISTRICT. [With Plate IT.] During the past few years a number of gold coins have been found by cultivators near a mound in the village of Kasarwa in tahsil and district Ballia. The fact having recently come to the notice of the district authorities, seventeen of the coins have been recovered and sent to the Government of the United Provinces y. whom they have been acquired for the Lucknow Museu e coins are of the time of Samudra Gupta and are of the following types : Aswamedha 3 Javelin, variety a a. 10 Javelin, variety y 2 Battleaxe e% 1 Kacha 1 The classification s Aoieed is that of Mr. V. A. Smith in ‘* The ~~ ge of the early or Imperial Gupta Dynasty,”’ J.R.A.S., 1889. ASWAMEDHA. Obverse. Reverse. l. Horse ae ho ok Female figure standing left on a pole. e hor: aband or lotus, holding fly whisk over — collar with a rege on the near shoulder. Post with — stream shoulder. The pole is adorned ers on both sides of it with long streamers above and Legend Aswamedha * paralramah. sm: ers on each side. St below the horse. There is no pedestal and no sign of pave- ment. = margin. . Rajadhiraja Lets margin . . t.v.j.mah. A’ ‘85 in., 117 grs. This coin differs in general appearance from the pee type of ASwamedha. The horse is shaped differently and “i collar is more on the greats than the neck. The female figure on reverse is more attenuated than usual. I am una is to suggest an Lnkarprotation of the Svea legend which } distinctly FL 7x =F YR Mr. John Allan of the British Museum informs me that Dr. Hoey, I.C. i isi has asimilarcoin, the legend of which has not been re 2. Horse as in the usual type. Female figure. The post — Low pedestal under ‘‘ si.” Le- streamers on one side only 96 gend missing. usual A’ -8in., 119 grs. (has been ringed). Vol. X, No. 5.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXII 175 [NV.S.] his coin has apparently been struck from the same die as that figured as No. 3, Plate XIV of the Indian Museum Cata- logue. 3. Similar to No. 2, but with Similar to 2. a higher eT ta under eS ee, and legend prithiv in right margin N ‘8 in., 120 grs. (has been ringed). JAVELIN, Var. a. These ten javelin coins are of the common variety ; but they present a number of small differences in the arrangement of the legend, the absence or presence of streamers to the standard and javelin and in the dress of the king. King left with javelin, Throned goddess and _inscrip- slime and garuda standard as tion parakramah as us ual. M U a under left arm. No. 8 of Plate XVIII of feed Indian jave is adorned with Museum Catalogue. Abo ators streamers. Th dard has copiae A he throne mien tw streamers and n legs o staff. Right margin . . Samara éa. Left margin . . vijayo 7. A’ :85in., 118 grs. 5. Similar but with staff and Similar but Mon. No. 9. no streamers = bar aruda standard. ~ Right mar . Samara sata v. Left eae . .ta vijayo Jit. . A’ 8in., 117 grs. 6. As No. 5. As No. 4, but Mon. N and Right margin. . Samara gata mark No. 47 of the same , as vitata. above cornucopiae A’ 8in., 116 grs. . 7. As No. 5, but with stream- 3 No. 4, o9e the ~~ shows mers neither to javelin nor stan- Pty legs an ac n. No. 9 dard. The javelin head at baseof and no mark over Soran iae. coin is bp sb mate shown. Right _ Samara Sata vit. . Left margin . .jayo 7. -8 in., 120 grs. (bas been ringed). 8. As No. 4, but with long As No. 4, but the throne shows staff and no streamers to garuda__ three vet & and has a back. Mon. an 176 aes margin .. Samara éata Lott margin . Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914. ay @B oo £ “Mm Ler} ao 2! 21 5 bs) | Q 30. | Ahmadabad © Ahmadabad ir 4. | Ahmadnagar | Arkat | Akbarabad | Akbarabad Akbarptr | Elich Burhanpir Burhanputr z ‘Bl = 5 ee Ceres mI uo) @! | Haidarabad oho Bunyad “eae Bunyad Sir 2 wie | Sa hahjahanabad | | ehahiahans | Fa thabad peck | Kabul | Kararébad | Kambayat @athdida: | Gwaliar Gwaliar | Lahor | Lakhnau | | Murshidabad _Mu‘azgamabad | | Mult&n | | Jahangirnagar | | j ! } | { ! oa ee Sy ae 5.| Numismatic Supplement No. XXII. S.J Emperor. 16. FARRUKH- SIYAR. Copper: 8. Minv. N : R | | Ttawa | ltawa Ajmer | Aj mer Ujjain Ujjai | A hres bad | Ahmadnagar | | Arkat Islamabad | Islimaba | A‘zamnagar A‘zamnagar Go- | |. kulgarh Akbarabad | Akbarabad kbarn Tlahaba Tlahaba Imtiyazgarh Imtiy azgarh Aurangnagar Elichpir Burhanpir ee Bareli Ba okie Pehdurgarh | Bhak Siispu i Purbanda | Purbandar Peshiw | Peshawar atta | Toragal | Jiinagarh Jahangirnagar Jhin&épattan \Haidartbad A idarabad Khujista phaeetes i Sahrind ind Shahjahanabad | | Shahjabinaba Sikakul _(Alametrpar ‘Azimabad | ‘Azimabad Fat habad Pharir | Farrukhabad | Kabul | Natak Ka arabad | Kashmir | Kambayat | | | Gulshanabad | Gwaliar } | Gati Lahor Lahor | Lakhnau | Ahmadabad Ahmadnagar | Akbarabad Bijapar | Kabul 188 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (May, 1914. Mint Emperor eee ne a | A XK AB Machhlipattan — | Machhlipattan Machhlipattan | Murshidaba Murshidabad om cames Multan | Multan Mumbai 17. RAFI‘U-D- | Itawa DARJAT. | Total: 22 | Ajmer old: a Ujjain Silver: 20. Ahmadabad - | Ahmadabad opp 1. | Akbarabad | Akbarabad urhanpar | Bareli at | Peshaw Khujista Bunyéd Ehujiste Bunyad Grat | Sal Shahjahanabad | Shahjabangbad Kabul | Kabul ra | Kambayat | Gwaliar | Labor | Lahor | Lakhnau | Murshidabad Mu‘azzamabad | Multan | Multan 18. RAFI‘U-D- | Itawa DAULA | | Ajmer JAHAN II). | Total Peele 3 Ujjain d: ; | Ahmadabad Silver: 22. Arkat Copper: 2. | Islamabad as | Akbarabad | Akbarabad Akbarabad Burhanpir | Burhanptr | Bareli | Tatta | Jiinagarh | Haidarabad ebadiets Bunyad Bhnjiata Bunyad | Str: Strat Sabri; nd | Shahjahanabad agmabad | ee Roahuyat ane I Se Vol. X, No. 5.) [N.S.] © to fo) Numismatic Supplement No. XXII, Mint Emperor. peeks Ss j PS, A R , ae Lahor | Lahor | Lakhnau | Murshidabad | | N an | | Mumbai . MUHAMMAD Shahjahanabad Shahjahanabad IBRAHIM. Total : i Gold: | Silvers (4 Copper: nil | ie rosie Itawa Itawa SHAH. Total: 61. | Atak Gold: 35. | ; Ajmer Silver: 56. | | Ujjain | Ujjain Copper : 10. George Permian ‘Telamabad | jalnnsbéd | A‘zamnagar Go- | gar | "Akbarabad | Akbarabad | | Akbarnagar Tlahabad llahabad Imtiyazgarh | khtarnagar Akhbtarnagar Awadh | Awadh _ Aurangabad | Ausa | Elichpur | Balapur Burhanpitr Burhanptr Bareli Balwantnagar Banaras (Muh) Banaras (Muh) Bhakk Purbandar | Peshawar Peshaw ‘atta Tatta Jinagarh Jahangirnagar _Jaipir aipur Chinapattan Haidarabad | Haidarabad Khujista Bunyad Caner Bunyad Zaina ila ‘Sat | | 189 Ahmadabad Elichpir | -Hafizabad | | 190 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914 MINT. Emperor Pea eee 2 eee : N R Zé | Sind Strat 5 Lon | Strat Sahrind Sahrind | Shahabad peenabed Qanauj | Qanauj | Shabjahanabad Shahjahanabad Shahjahanabad olapir | | ‘Alamgirpir | ‘Azimabad ‘Azimabad | |Farrukhabad | Farrukhabad Fi ‘Kabul ab Kabul | Katak =, es Pee 1 1 1 = 27: Bahtdur il... “ en Las 1 | 1 128. NepatesE War MEDALS. [With Plate II.] l recently received in a parcel of coins from Katmandu the following medals which possibly have not been published : — 1. Obverse. A small shield with four bosses, s surrounded by the inscription: ‘‘Sri 3 Maharaja Jang Bahadur, Rajdal Paltan.’’ Reverse. A trisul formed of the sword (khadg) and skull necklace fer emea ga: of Kali surrounded the ere 912 sal ma Gurkha Sarkar bata Bhot 2. Obverse. a No. 1 but ‘‘Chhass Kamini Paltan.’’ Reverse as before. 3. Obverse. As No. 1 but ‘‘ Kali Bahadur paltan.”’ Reverse as before. 196 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{May, 1914. — her with China, whose suzerainty both countries recognized in the treaty. According to the life of the Maharaja written by his son General Padma Jang Bahadur, Jang Bahadur held a review of the victorious troops on the 20th April, 1856, and granted two months’ leave to each soldier and officer. On their return to duty medals and rewards were bestowed. The pieces described show that different medals were struck e he regiments named still exist in the Nepalese army. The ‘‘ Rajdal’’ is ‘‘The King’s Own’’; the other two are named after their patron goddesses. W. E. M. CaMPpBELL. 129. On Two Finns or BanMmant COINS. I recently examined for the Central Provinces_Government two finds of. Bahmani copper coins from the Bhandara District, one consisting of 196, and the other of 600 coins. In bie former only ten coins were indecipherable; of the remaiming » 186, 184 were of the reign of Ahmad Shah II and of no parti- cular interest. One new date, 839 AH. for I.M. . No. 29 was among them. The remaining two coins were, curiously enough, of Nizam Shah—one dated 867 was Codrington Num. Chron., 1898, No. 2, and the other was Codrington No. 4. The find of 600 coins was more interesting but in far worse oo the coins being largely corroded together. Two undr : : unknown. The coins must therefore have been concealed in the troublous times when the last Bahmani was a puppet in the han of Amir Barid, who shortly afterwards assumed the sovereignty of Bidar. The different kings are represented as_ follows: Ahmad Shah I (2), Ahmad Shah II (102), Humayan Shah (25), Nigam Shah (1), Muhammad II (99), Muhmid II (127) Metis (5), Kalim-ullah (31), doubtful (2). No new types Jour., As. Soc, Beng. Vol X, 1914, PLATE VII. FOUR RARE MUGHAL COINS - art 130. Vol. X, No. 5.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXII. 197 [N.S.] were among these, but the following appear to be unrecorded dates :—-Muhammad Shah bin Humayiin (B.M.C. No. 474) -—869 and 870 (Ist size), for the second size of the same 877, and Kalim-ullah (F. J. Thanawala, Num. Supp. No. XI, No. 12)—-933. The coins of Kalim-ullah and Wali-ullah were in particularly good preservation. The coins have been distributed among the various Indian Museums. C. J. Brown. 130. On Four Rare Muauat Coins. {With Plate VII]. 1. Shah ’Alam Bahadur. AR Obverse. Mint A’zamnagar coi Date. + 2 RR: Lie ea) S. “95 as ~ Reverse. cnple a Lucknow MusrEum. \ This is the first A‘zamnagar coin published of Bahadur. It conforms to the type of rupees of Aurangzeb and Farrukh- sivar of this mint with the exception of the last line on the reverse which is quite unlike that on the Aurangzeb coin pub- lished by Mr. Whitehead (Num. Suppl. xv, 89, No. 10) or the Farrukhsiyar rupee published by Dr. Taylor (N. S. xiv, 84, No. 11). For the latter coin Dr. Taylor suggests Gokulgarh, and this reading is supported by No. 3 in this article. But in the present coin I see no resemblance to thisname. Th 198 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 2. A’zam Shah. R Obverse. Mint Daru-l fath Ujain sl pbe) Sl Date ——— ahd gl sevice oes 5. O65 esta bi ate as wl> pe 8) Reverse. sy?! Cagle | oal dhus : ye (May, 1914. wits! eu yio Lucknow Museum. This unique coin has I believe never been published before. 3. Farrukh-siyar. AR Obverse. Mint A’zamnagar gr et wee Pgh Wt. = 176 ob 35 ary G> ee 06 i J ; * Aww a ’ i 23 aS.co Reverse. SS on a: Cogle ye r Js,$ Lucknow Museum. I publish this coin because in the first place it seems to confirm Dr. Taylor’s conjecture Gokulgarh for the last line of Vol. X, No. 5.]. Numismatic Supplement No. XXII. 199 [N.S.] the reverse; and also because of the two dots under Be! in Museum in 1907. 4. Farrukh-sivar. AN Obverse. Mint Firozgart [ste eo? Joe a Pai ee Ke oo s. 8 er [ = ] U2 51 95 Reverse. n-—de— 0 ungle or abn ——— 7 855 59534 Gold and silver coins of this mint of Bahadur are in the Lahore Museum and were published by Mr. Whitehead in Num. Suppl. XV, 89, Nos. 20-21. No coins of any other Emperor are recorded. The casts of coins for this article were kindly made for me by Babu Prayag Dayal of the Lucknow Museum. C. J. Brown. 131. Sriver Coms or THE CHANDELLA, MADANAVARMAN. Madanavarman are fairly well known. One copper and two 5 gold coins were described by General Cunningham. ' | Coins of Medieval India, p. 79, pl. VIII, 19. 200 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [May, 1914.] Cabinet of the Indian Museum contains three gold coins, two large and one small.'! Several private collections are also known to contain Chandella gold coinage, especially those of Madanavarman and Paramarddin. But silver coins of this dynasty are very little known. Cunningham has referred to a single silver coin of Jayavarman, 2 son of Sallaksanavarman and cousin of Madanavarman #* ike the gold coinage, the silver coins also are divided into coins vary in weight from 60 to 62°75 grains Troy. The smaller also vary in weight from 14°17 to 16-07 grains. ‘They are exact copies of the larger and smaller issues in gold, the obverse having the legend (1) Sriman- Ma- (2) -dana-varmma in two lines instead of three and the reverse the seated goddess as on the coins of Gangeyadeva. R. D. BaneErsI. A, Smith, Cat. oe the Coins in the Indian Museum, Calcutta, Vol. i, Me 253. 2 Coins of Medieval India, pp. 77-78. 8 Epigraphia Indica, Vol. VIL, App. I, p. 16. Nr ee 21. The Evolution and Distribution of certain Indo- Australian Passalid Coleoptera. By F. H. Graveny, M.So., Assistant Superintendent in the Indian Museum. (Read at the First Indian Science Congress, January 16th, 1914.) [With Plate X XIV.] Australian Passalidae. In the present paper I propose to des- cribe, as briefly as possible, certain facts connected with the remarkable in that many of the species belonging to them are more or less highly asymmetrical; and a s‘udy of the dia- f Show separate lines of evolution diverging from some sym- tor onatas types respectively, atter the genera in which they severally ' Published with the permission of the Trustees of the Indian Museum. * “*A preliminary account of a revised Classification of the Indo- Australian Passalidae,” J.A.S.B. (N.S.), viii (1912), pp. 403-7. : Se us tains only one genus Plesthenus. The Precise relation of the genus Tatius to the other genera of the Gonatas termined. : he inction between the Gnaphalocnemis and Plesthenus groups rests solely on the structure of the anterior margin of the head. 202 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1914. tures (the mandibles and the anterior margin of the head) which are apt to be asymmetrical. t is evident, therefore, that the degree of asymmetry which any species exhibits cannot be regarded as an indication of affinity to asymmetrical species of another type; but that it is to be regarded rather as an indication of the degree of subfamily is found in more than one of these tracts; and in the tracts between them! no Passalids of any kind are known to exist. e countries between the mouths of the Ganges and Straits of Macassar, three genera are found. One of these (Tiberioides) is symmetrical and includes only three species, forms exists between them as to leave no room for doubt that one has been derived directly from the other. Both these genera are larger as regards number of species, more plentiful, an more widely distributed than the first mentioned; and one of them (Aceraius), in which alone the mandibles are asymmetrical as well as the anterior margin of the head, is much larger, more plentiful, and perhaps more widely distributed, than the other (Ophrygonius). Further, one species of the former of these two genera stands out from all others of both genera by reason of its extraordinary asymmetry, its abundance, its occurrence Ove! the whole of the area they inhabit, its gregarious habits,” and oO imilar characteristics distinguish the dominant species of the Indian Peninsula and Ceylon respectively from the | i.e. (1) the Gangetic Plain, and (2) probably the dry low country be- tween the hills of S. India and Ceylon, as well as the Straits between them. very few other species of the genus are the habits yet definitely usp Vol. X, No. 6.] Indo-Australian Passalid Coleoptera. 203 [V.S.] equally abundant and widely distributed. But one of them (Episphenus! indicus) is muc e variable in size than the other (£. neelgherriensis), and usually much larger; it also the Gnaphalocnemis group—the only group of the subfamily that has established itself in the Oriental Region—species be- longing to the genus Gnaphalocnemis are more numerous, are Similarly in the Gonatas group also, species of the genus Gona re more numerous, larger, and better represented in collections than those of the genus Omegarius. Peninsula; and E. indicus is itself less highly asymmetrical than Aceraius grandis on ‘he other side of the Gangetic Plain. The dentition of even the dominant Indian Peninsula form 's, indeed, less highly asymmetrical than that of the great majority of the species found beyond the Ganges; and both the Peninsular forms are more highly asymmetrical than _,! Inel. Chilomacus (part) +Bastlianus (part), see Mem. Ind. Mus. IIT, 1913-1914, pp. 316-8. 2 In both species, of course, the two parents live together with their larval offspring, as is usual’ in the Passalidae. Gregariousness,’aa hete understood, implies the association together of several such families. 204 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1914. even the dominant form in Ceylon. Moreover, although one symmetrical yenus of Aceraiinae—Tiberioides—is found in the phenus moorei—which must therefore be regarded as the most primitive existing species of the subfamily. : From this it appears that the species of Aceraiinae inhabit- ing Ceylon are less highly specialized than those inhabiting the Indian Peninsula; and that those inhabiting the Indian Pen- insula are less highly specialized than are those found on the other side of the Ganges. taking these as a whole In the Gnaphalocneminae the three most primitive genera are confined to Australia, except for one species (EB pisphenoides pectinigera, Heller) from New Guinea, the remaining genera being distributed over the East Indian Archipelago and Malay Peninsula, one species penetrating into Burmaas far as Tavoy. The line of demarcation between the Oriental and Austra- lian Regions separates, almost completely, the Aceraiinae and n order to explain the geographical separation of the favourable to the evolution of highly specialized forms ; and that these have migrated outwards, driving before them the aalf of the East Indian Archipelago, one whole group at leas (comprising the genera Hyperpl-sthenus, Labienus, Kaupiolus and Aurelius) shows a high degree of specialization, in struc tures which are perfectly normal in most of the more highly asymmetrical forms among which they live. : f There is a curious similarity between the relation © specialization to geographical distribution found in the asym metrically inclined Passalidae, in the Thelyphonidae (5€ Gravely, J.AS.B., VII [8], 1911, Proceedings. pp. ex xiii-cxx¥) d in the Crinoidea (see Clark, Echinoderma of the Indian Vol. X, No. 6.] Indo-Australian Passalid Coleoptera. 205 [V.S.] Museum. Pt. vii, Crinoidea ; Calcutta 1912; pp. 18-19). That so close a similarity should exist between groups so widely separated in the animal kingdom is sufficiently remarkable to suggest that the phenomenon may be one of more widespread occurrence. Louis Agassiz. in his ‘‘ Essay on Classification ”’ (Boston 1857, London 1859), devotes section xxviii to the ‘‘ Re- lations between the Structure, the Embryonic Growth, the Geological Succession, and the Geographical Distribution of nimals’’ ; and Cope has considered the question from an evolu- tionary standpoint in his essay on ‘‘ The Origi ra,”” > York, 1887, pp. vi-vii and 112-123). But neither of these authors appear to have been aware that the relation of distri- bution and structure is ever so detailed as it can be shown to h zoology, and I shall be greatly indebted to anyone who wi se me references to any other published work on_ these ines. With regard to the Thelyphonidae only a preliminary note has yet been published (Joc. cit.), and the details have not yet been fully worked out. The work of Austin H. Clark on Crinoids is, however, most interesting in this connection. In discuss- seas (loc. cit.), he bases his conclusions on the degree to which the centrodorsal plate differs from its primitive form, in adults of species of Comasteridae found in different regions. He finds the greatest difference in the majority of Australian and East Indian forms (especially the former), somewhat less difference in African forms, and least difference of all, in the same geographical direction, in West Indian. In other geozraphical directions relatively ‘‘ young’’ (i.e. primitive) faunas are found in Japan, in the Antarctic and thence north- ward along the American coast, and in the Arctic. He says, moreover (p. 18): ‘* This [the connection between distribution and structure] holds good regardless of the subfamily or genus to which the species may belong, and exactly the same thing may be worked out in regard to other characters in this family, and with other characters in other families.’’ Another point brought out alike by the study of Crinoids and of Passalids is the existence, in different groups of species, of one particular species which greatly exceeds all others both in its geographical range and in its variability. But both here, and in the relation of distribution to specialization, the confo:mity of the two groups seems to be less deep than the Striking character of this conformity would lead one to 206 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. anywhere, though it is equally well shown in many groups, both terrestrial and aquatic, and that is, that in all natural genera which are adequately known and sufficiently well repre- sented in the present fauna, there exists typically a single species which covers the entire range inhabited by all the other species of the genus collectively. This species is always the most variable, individually, of all contained within the genus and, if the species of the genus be arranged according to the development of the specific characters in them, this species typi- cally falls midway between the two extremes. In each family also there is typically to be found a genus which in every way Cor- responds to this species.”’ e italics are mine, and indicate the feature in which the Passalidae differ from the Crinoidea and from the other groups to which Clark refers In the Aceraiinae, the only asymmetrically inclined group of Passalidae which i m species of this subfamily occur), it is t e specialized that i more variable. n Clark's hypothesis of the ** Ontogeny enus’’ (see Amer. Na 1911, pp belongs to the genu tus, cannot be regarded as senescent , like the highly specialized Crinoid fauna of Australian waters or senescent genera ‘characterised by having but fe of the genus arranged ‘‘ according to the proportionate value 0 their specific characters,’’ and is (with the one rare exception noted above) the furthest from instead of ‘‘ probably very close to the original stock.’’ : e essential difference between Clark’s hypothesis, and that put forward above to account for the distribution of the asymmetrically inclined groups of Indo-Australian Passalidae, Vol. X, No. 6.) Indo-Australian Passalid Coleoptera. 207 [NV.S.] lies in the nature of the conditions postulated towards the centre of distribution in each cas>. ark says, speaking o potential genus as yet seareely distinguishable from a species Amer. Nat. xlv, p. 373): ‘* There is somewhere within the range of this young genus. normally at or near the centre, an area of optimum conditions, where life is easy and there is no severe struggle for existence And again (Indian Ocean Crinoids, p. 18): ‘‘ The crinoids of Australia came from the t obvious in almost all of the species along the Australian ores.”’ In the case of Indo-Australian Passalidae, on the other ge of a more or less temporary nature, to the distribu- tion of the newer forms. Clark does not find it necessary to point out the radial character of the relation between the structure and distribu- tion of Crinoids, although it exists, as deduced above from his data; but that he recognizes its frequent occurrence, and also the occurrence of a certain amount of radial pressure, is shown by the following passages from ‘‘ The Ontogeny of a Genus (loc. cit. P. 373):—‘* Here [in the central ‘‘ area of optimum conditions ’ *] various more or less aberrant types arise and are able to perpetuate themselves, spreading out in every direction as did the orginal stock, but never so far, as they are not so well prepared to encounter adverse conditions.’> And ‘ The forms occupying the limits of the range of a genus as a whole (geographical or bathymetrical) are continually trying to colo- ize new territory, both from their own initiative and as the result of pressure from behind.’ Clearly the two hypotheses are not mutually exclusive ; for the initiative of the relatively est forms living o n the mt ts of the range of the “‘genus’’ as a whole, may in ‘abl s be as nothing compared to the pressure from behind, while i in others the reverse may be the case a. Bach m may be true of certain groups; or possibly, when a * ‘ mature " group pice @ certain maximum of vigour, a ee ee increase in comp ! The exceptional richness of the fauna of the East Indian ‘eer ies — the presence there, of conditions which may we responsible ra very great anes: in the Indo-Australian area, of this pressure trent behind. 208 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. tion at the centre of distribution results in conditions such as are now found in the Indo-Australian Passalidae, a condition which might well accelerate the advent of senescence in the same area, with its accompaniment of ‘‘ curious and eccentric species ’’ and the *‘ great development of certain characters at (Amer. Nat. xlv, p. 374). Some of the most highly asymmetrical Passailidae might well be termed curious and eccentric; nor is their asymmetry known to serve any useful purpose. The occurrence both among Passalids and among Crinoids, to which the two hypotheses seem respectively to apply, of single species having a geographical range coterminous with those of all the species closely allied to it; and the occurrence in the same groups of a well marked correlation, radial in character, between distribution and specialization, suggests that some connection between the two hypotheses is likely to exist, in spite of apparent differences. Some of these differences are probably differences of inter- pretation only ; for the two hypotheses have been worked out quite independently. I had already noticed the radial dis- tribution of the Thelyphonidae before thie publication of Clark’s ‘Ontogeny of a Genus.’’ And although this paper attracted my attention at that time, my recollection of it lay dormant throughout the whole period of my work on the Passalidae: and it was only when searching for references in connection with the preparation of the present paper that I recollected it, and discovered, not only its important bearing on my work, but also that o. its author’s zoogeographical notes in ‘ Crinoids of the Indian Ocean.’’ In view of the separate origins of our respective hypotheses, and the many differences there must have been in the facts noticed in connection with each, differ- close to the original stock.’’ Its genealogical position, con- sequently is as widely removed as it could possibly be from the Vol. X, No. 6.] Jndo-Australian Passalid Coleoptera. 209 [N.S.] , position in which this species stands—at the top of the most progressive line of evolution in its group—in the Passalidae. Evidently, then, the existence of this species in many groups, both terrestrial and aquatic, to which Clark calls atten- tion, is a fact which calls for further investigation, with a view to determining in which cases it stands at the bottom, and in which at the top of the evolutionary series of the group or ** genus ’’ to which it belongs ; and whether it is ever situated between the two. For this is bound to have a considerable bearing on the interpretation of the pela deipiiied distribution of that group. 210 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914.] EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV. (From a block lent by the Trustees of the Indian Museum.) Examples of all known genera of Aceraiinae and Gnaphe- locneminae, and all known species of the genus Episphenus, are here figured diagrammatically, in a manner designed to show the evolution of the five different types of as mmetry found in the two subfamilies, and their geographical relations. All forms connected by arrows wit pisphenus mooret from Australian genera Pharochilus. Mastochilus and Episphenoides, belong to the Gnaphalocneminae. In the former subfamily representing actual ancestral ty on account of er specialised metatsterna and certain other characters. But the ancestors of all forms now re clearly to f 1 arly sought for only as fossils; and no fossil Passalids yet appear to be known. n in ° genus Plesthenus whose anomalous distribution (in Australia and Celebes) calls for further stud 1 The species of this genus from the Indian Peninsula and wes 20 appear to have much the same zoogeographical value as the genera in other parts of the Indo-Australian area. Journ., As. Soc. Beng., Vol. X, 1914. Plate XXIV. E.HIMALAYAS CELEBES TO NEW CALEDONIA BORNEO INDIAN PENINSULA TATWS. | OMEGARIUS.cam| MM Wan | Lin d eh \/ UN |} ; ‘ele ASK ooo ff \ | | (| eee ) ) UL a) \ toh, - ee ; », 'EPISPHENUS INDICUS. "ia * ff LAY ; 4 fi ‘ $ | : IS oe . { — J) ‘4 beg y i aie Th =A Pega EY ba AY - o ) \ SEK A f ‘é | f 1 '(ACERAIUSworner sppa (4, Age s\ orgies i i coven: \ = Sk ee. / ! EPISPHENUS | P z. NEELGHERRIENSIS. RR f 1. ls Nest has ay OT RETR (es 7) i eae ae i ee beats teh ANALACHES, | PARAPELOPIDES! OMEGARIUS crear. eeey Evus, 2 7 METRICAL SPP. Ics MALAYSIA Nooe ee 1h ete Sea A a VR at \\- i tee Ft, Cs ay t eo. \} me? { OPHRYGONIUS. amit ANALACHES,| CETEuUS, | SYMMETRICAL SPP. 0 XC / 0} a EPISPHENUS | \ IDES. | 2 a ae ——__, 2 eS COMPTONI. oerebateemtge ss ‘AURELIUS. | KAUPIOLUS. ° LABIENUS. | (eee ca 7 REALE | TIBERIOIDES. | EPISPHENUS 5 MOORE!) I masTOcHILuS. | £ PISPHENOIDES. CEYLON || AUSTRALIA D Bagchi, del. Relation of Specialization to Distribution in Indo-Australian Passalid. 22. Presence and Absence of the Gall-bladder in certain Rodents. By R. E. Lioyp, Major, I.M.S8., Professor of Biology in the Medical College, Calcutta. [Read at the First Indian Science Congress, Jan. 16th, 1914.] A short time ago my es Bea was drawn to the fact that there was no gall- pe in the r Reference to Owen’s Pe hein: of Vertebrates and other works showed that ého fact had long been known, though it is omitted from certain standard works on comparative anatomy, in most of which the absence of the gall-bladder from the horse is acces writes that ‘‘the gall-bladder is absent from Mus, Cri oh gi eiiaae MUS, Echimys, EFrethizon, ger theres, also that Cuvier did not find it in Sciurus maximus and in a species Pteromys, but in that dissected by Bieter (Pt. volucella) it a size. The Cape Jerboa ieeonss). had it not. In all other Rodents the gall-bladder is present. In Flower and Lydekker’s well-known work on the Mam- malia we find in the chapter devoted to the Rodents the following statement —** The gall-bladder though present in most is absent in a few.’ . ae Weber's large work on the Mammalia, 1904, w read, ‘denise the heading Rodentia, ‘‘ The gall-bladder may ie absent (Muridae The subject seemed oe as bearing on the question of the utility “of the gall-bladder, and as a number of Rodents reserved in alcohol, _ poailable | in the Indian Museum, I examined them in order ascertain whether the gall-bladder was present or absent. The cases observed were as follows Muridae. Number Species. examined. Locality. Gall bladder, Mus rattus 8 Calcutta Absent. Mus decumanus 2 Calcutta Absent Mus mettada ue { : Etawah Absent. 212 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. umber Species. examined. Locality. Gall bladder. F 2 Calcutta Absent Gunomys bengalensis . a 1 Dovinak bait Bandicota nemorivaga.. 1 Calcutta Absent. Po Present Gerbillus indicus wee Berhampore Present. 1 Travancore Present. Gerbillus meridionalis.. 2 Turkestan Present. Spalacidae. Rhizomys pruinosus .. 1 P Present. onsee Khakhyen Hills Present. Dipodidae. Dipus blanfordi ee | Persia Present. Sciuridae. Sciurus palmarum .. 3 Caleu Present. . ss . East of Trrawadd Present. Sciurus macclellandii . . 7 1 Moar y Pisanti Sciurus atridorsalis .. 2 East of Eaeniey Absent. Sciurus caniceps Oe? East of Irrawaddy’ Absent. io : 1 Preparis Isle Absent. Sciurus locroides ; a Absett Sciurus carolinensis .. 1 2 Present. Sciuropterus pearsoni . 1 Yunnan Absent. Lagomyidae. Lagomys rufesens vie we Persia Present. Lagomys roylei i 28 2 Present. Hystricidae. Hystriz leucrurus ee | 2 Present. In the above classification I have followed Blanford, but it is necessary to note that the genus aie has quite recently been sub-divided. S. palmarum now ars in the genus Funambulus. while 8. macelellandii is in de genus Tamiops. Ihave not had the opportunity of gone this new classi- fication of oe squirrels. It would be interesting to know pred ae it is in agreement with the cn of the gall- On looking through these plaardelions it will be noticed that though the gall-bladder is absent from the genus Mus Vol. X, No.6] The Gall-bladder in certain Rodents. 213 [N.S.] and its close allies, it is not ors from all the Muridae, since it is pont in the genus Gerbill rhaps the most cnteresting fact is the curious dis- tribution of the organ among the squirrels. It is present i some species but not in others It is surprising to find that the gall-bladder may be pre- sent or absent within the narrow limits of a single genus ', since this or gan has been established in the vertebrate series for a longer time even than the limbs, if we are to believe the evi- dence afforded by the Cyclostomata which have a gall-bladder but no limbs. Moat explanations of organic phenomena that have hitherto been given have started from the idea of utility. Both Teleo- logy and the Selection theory have this common origin. It is therefore worth while to consider any observations that bear on this peclatie It seems obvious that within the same genus the presence and absence of the gall-bladder cannot both be advantageous nm the moment. It is however possible to imagine that ‘there as a time in the past history of the squirrels when absence of the gall bladder might have been of advantage to one branch of the genus. It has been shown lately that the pal bladder has a pathological importance. Major E. D W. Greig found that both the typhoid and the skiers bacilli pecuinial in the gall-bladder long after they had otherwise been eliminated from the body. The ascertained fact that two distinct kinds of bacilli have a special predilection for tlie gall-bladder suggest that in certain circumstances it might be advantageous to a race.of animals to lose this organ Having demonstrated that the absence of the gall-bladder might be of advantage, the Selectionist regards its absence as thereby explained. In regard to that explanation we may say definitely, that it is satisfying to some but ot scene But let us leave this problem and return agai the facts. Tt must be admitted, 1 think, that ee ‘gall bladder has dropped out of the Rodent series on more than on2 occasion and perhaps on several occasions. If we were to believe that the loss had occurred on one occasion only we should have to believe that the genus Mus was derived from one branch of the squirrels, that which had lost the gall-bladder, and there is no reason for making such an assum ption on general anatomical grounds. Tt seems evident then that Sciurus and Mus lost their gall- bladder on different occasions and more facts would probably show that the organ must have been lost on several occasions among the Rodents alone. The loss of the organ in other kes of the verteberate series, in the horse and the saw fish olinensis is still left in Sciurus by Miller. See U.S. Nat. neg Bar. 79, p. 332 (1912). 214 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1914.] for example, must of course have been quite independent in time and place of occurrence though due no doubt to alike n conclusion I a express my thanks to Dr. Annandale for permission to segs the collection of Rodents in the Indian Museum vada. also to B. Pranaba P. Sen Gupta, one of my students who first . my a rae to the subject and dissected a number of our local Rodents, at my suggestion, in order to ascertain the state of the biliary apparatus. NNN 23. An Improved Method of using Oil Gas.! By Kenneth SOMERVILLE CaLDWELL, B.Sc., Pu.D., F.I.C. {Read at the First Indian Science Congress, January 15th, 1914.] One of the great difficulties met with in carrying on scientific work in India is connected with the question of gas Messrs. Mansfield & Sons. This apparatus is simple in con- struction, requires ne attention and no skilled Jabour. The gasis prepared by dropping ordinary kerosine oil into a red hot iron retort, and after washing with water is collected i in a ol poi unsaturated hydrocarbons than coal gas and requires in consequence a far larger quantity of air for its complete combustion (Table I). If used with the ordinary Bunsen and rire the gas unsuitable for laboratory work. This diffi- ty is in part overcome by adopting a specially made burner He af supplying the gas at a higher pressure. The a ae ment however cannot be regarded as satisfactory for tw

” i 76 25s ’ B, 8:2 ? 33°5 3”? be 8-7 31°5 ” ” 9-2 30°0 _ ,; ” 10 l My? 39 ” 12-1 TS ss » 16°0 oo 4 92 Vol. X, No. 6.] An Improved Method of using Oil Gas. 217 [NV.8.] The mixture A contains exactly the amount of air necessary for complete combustion, and it is interesting to note that this is not the mixture in which the rate of combustion has reached its maximum value. (Cf. Michelsen, Zeit. phys. Ch. 3, 493) As the quantity of oil gas in the mixture increases beyond about 9%, the rate of combustion rapidly falls off until in the mixture containing 16% it is only measured with difficulty , and beyond this limit progressive combustion does not take place and the mixture is non-explosive. comparison of the values found for mixtures of oil gas and air with those given by Michelsen (loc. cit.) for mixtures of coal gas and air and hydrogen and air is instructive. In the following table n = the volume per cent of combus- tible gas in the mixture and u = rate of propagation of com- bustion in centimetres per second. Tasce III. Oil gas and air. Coal gas and air. Hydrogen and air. n u n u u 58 21°5 11 28 15 40 cae 26°0 12 38 20 65 75 28°5 13 48 25 140 8-2 33°5 14 57 30 235 8:7 31°5 15 64 35 270 9-2 30-0 16 68 40 277 10+] 20°2 17 70 45 270 12-1 10°8 18 71 2 16-0 0-3 19 68 55 222 20 62 60 172 21 53 65 105 22 43 70 74 23 33 24 24 25 16 26 ll Tt will be observed that the maximum rate in the coal air mixture is more than twice that of the oil gas-air mixture complete combustion, it will be necessary to mix with it about 1-2 volumes of air in order to get a gas mixture which 218 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1914. shall require for its complete combustion five times its volume of air. Actual experiments show that when oil gas is mixed with an equal volume of air a mixture is obtained which Cc entirely satisfactory results. By regu sang vee air supply at the burner in the usual way a perfectly c ess flame is obtained which leaves no deposit on ents gee which can be used for quantitative and blow pipe work in exactly the same manner as coal gas. such a mixture contains only 50% of air and as an explosive mixture must contain over 80%, the margin of safety is ample. The calorific value of coal gas is about 600 B. T. units, therefore have a calorific value of approximately 15° = 675 BT. units, i.e. a value about the same as, or rather oe than, that of dvdinady coal gas. t is clear from the above that not only do we obtain a gas far more useful for laboratory oon industrial purposes, but that a very considerable saving in expense is involved. It is EXPERIMENTAL DETAILS. Analysis of oil gas.—This was carried out in the usual manner and requ ires no comment beyond calling attention to the fact that it is impossible to estimate the oxygenin a mixture of this gas and air om Lier —_ phosphorus. The w absorption of oxygen by oe oe experiment phosphorus a actually heated above its m Saciiian point in a mixture of oil gas and air containing 28% of the latter and the condbing diminution in volume measured only some 0:2%. For the estimation o/ oxygen it is necessary to use some other absorbent such as an alkaline seitbins of pyrogallol. Measurement of the rates of propagation of progress esaive in mixture of oil gas and air:—The gas mixtures Vol. X, No. 6.] An Improved Method oj using Oil Gas. 219 [V 8.] were delivered from a arrange pe of two litres capacity , to which was attached a bar er and regulating valve capable of fine adjustment for ere sitet of water. The areas of cross section of the combustion tubes were and the gas holder was found to be an efficient safeguard for the prevention of explosion in the experimental gas-holder. The stream of gas was so adjusted that the flame was just prevented from travelling against the current and remained steady at the particular point in the tube at which the area of cross section was afterwards measur In the following tables V= reading of the water level in the gas-holder in cubic centimetres. (After correcting the gradua- tions of the gas-holder for the phage epi ed by the tube delivering the water each ‘‘ 100 cc.’’ = 98°7 c = time in | seconds. R = Rate of the stream of gas in the combustion tube when equilibrium is established. a = area of cross section of the combustion tube. Experiment I. Volume per cent of oil gas in mixture =5°78 a =0°0945 sq. cm. 400 1500 V 1100 1200 1300 1 T 790 1030 1266 1504 1745 T per ‘‘ 100 cc 240 236 238 241 Average time for 98-7 cc. = 47°8 secs. Hence R= 21°5 cm. per sec. Experiment II. Volume per cent of oil gas in mixture =7-14. a =0°0935 sq. cm. - 1400 1500 1700 T ae Pe OF 411 610 T per ‘100 207 204 199 Average ond hee 98-7 cc. = 40°6 secs. Hence R= 26:0 Experiment ITI. Volume per cent of oil gas in mixture = 7°53. a=0°0935 sq. cm. ¥ 700 800 900 . 1000 1100 1200 T Oo ie. 3) 559 = 926 Sper‘ 1000,” 186. 185 188 184 Average time per 98°7 cc. =37 secs. Hence R = 28°5 cm. per sec. 220 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. Experiment IV. Volume per cent of oil gas in snuguehaas 8:14 =0°0945 sq. cm. * 3000 2100 vV 1700 1800 1 c 0 155 310 © 465 618 T per ‘°100 cc.’ 155 155 155 153 Average time oa 98:7 cc. =31 secs. Hence R=33-5 cm. per sec. Experiment V. Volume per cent of oil gas in mixture = 8°73 a =0°0935 sq. cm. ¥ 800 900 1000 1100 1 1200 1300 T 0 171 339 _ 671 838 T per ‘‘ 100 oc.”’ 171 168 166 167 Average time per 98°7 cc. = 335 secs. Hence R=31°'5 cm. per sec. Experiment VI. Volume per cent of oil gas in mixture =9°15 a =0°0935 sq. cm. Vv 800 900 1000 1100 1200 iY 0 179 3 T per ‘‘ 100 cc.’’ 179 185 ° 184 180 Average time per 98°7 cc. = 36°4 secs. Hence R= 29 cm. per sec. Experiment VII. Volume per cent of oil gas in mixture = 10°14 a —0:0 ‘45 sq. cm. V 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 fy O..286 BIT 776 1085 1288 1548 T per “100 cc.’” 255 262 259 259 253 255 Average time per 98°7 cc. =51°3 secs. Hence R= 20-2 cm. per sec. Experiment VIII. Volume per cent of oil gas in ee = 12°06 =0 683 s In this experiment a much larger cis boiabion ube iad to be used. With the smaller combustion tube the gas could not be driven off slowly enough to balance the rate of combustion. 2000 2200 T 0 133 T per ‘‘100 cc.’ 66°5 — time per 98-7 cc. = 133 secs. Hence R= 10°9 cm. per sec. Voi. X, No. 6.] An Improved Method of using Oil Gas. 221 [N.S.] Experiment IX. Volume per cent of oil gas in mixture = 16-02 =] In this experiment it was found necessary to use a still wider tube with a diameter of over 1:5 centimetres. Vv 820 920 T 0 845 T per “ 100 ce.’”’ = 845 Average time per 98°7 cc. = 169 secs. Hence R=0°3 cm. per sec. SUMMARY. 1 Gas’’ requires 12°3 times its own volume of air for its se eecabuntids whereas coal gas requires only 5 to 5°5 times its pale of air. 2. wing to these facts that oil gas cannot be used satisfactorily with ordinary Bunsen and allied types of burner, a percentage of the gas always escaping complete combus- 3. A mixture of oil gas and air in equal volumes ia es for its combustion about the same volume of air as ordina coal gas and can be used for all purposes in yt same ants as the latter with the various types of coal-gas burne The calorific value of such a gas mi neanener is S slightly greater cn that of ordinary co al g 5. is perfectly safe to mix this and even much larger quantities of air with oil gas as the explosive limit is not reached until over 80% of air has been added. using the gas diluted in this way its complete combustion is assured and not only do we get a gas far more convenient for laboratory and other purposes but a very n devised and Messrs. Mansfield & Sons are prepared to fix the necessary attachment to their older form of apparatus. 24. The Date of Chashtana. By RamesH CHANDRA MasuMDar. The scholars almost unanimously hold that the Western Kshatrapas (excluding Nahapana and Bhumaka) belong to the Saka tribe, and Chashtana is the founder of the royal dynasty. We also know from a passing remark of Ptolemy (‘‘ Oozene, the the Jaina tradition that the Sakas conquered Ujjayini in 4.D 78, and established their era, that we may be naturally led to assume that Chashtana was the first regal Viceroy (for he calls himself as such in his coins) of the Saka king on whose behalf he conquered and ruled Ujjayini about a.p. 78. But the scholars have not accepted so early a date for Chashtana. The remarks of Ptolemy have been interpreted to signify that presumption is not unnatural it is not certainly inevitable, i.e. 2 have been built on such a supposition. Pandit Bhaga- banlal Indraji at first held that Chashtana lived considerably earlier than a.p. 130, being to some extent contemporary family. Lastly Rapson in his recent book ‘* Catalogue of Indian Coins (Andhras and Western Kshatrapas)’’ has, after weighing all evidence, come to the following conclusion. ‘‘ All that is known as to the duration of Chashtana’s reign, both as Kshatrapa and Mahakshatrapa, is that it must be included, together with the reign of his son Jayadaman as Kshatrapa in the period limited by the years 46 and 72, ie. A.D. 124 and 150.’ 0h : It is with great diffidence that I maintain against this 224 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. brilliant array of formidable epee that Chashtana cer- tainly did flourish before Nahapana and as such was not the viceroy of the Andhra Kings, who conan the latter, and that there is every reason for the belief, and none against it, that he flourished as early as a.D.78. I give my reasons s below. In page 35 of the ‘‘ Progress Report of the Archaeological Survey of W. India for 1905-6, Mr. D. R. Bhandarkar describes six old inscription stones at present situated at Bhuj in the stores > the Engineering Department. ‘‘ Five of these .’ says he, ‘‘ are on the whole, well preserved and belong to the aie of the W. Kshatrapas .... Of these four po to the reign of Rudradiman and all bear the same date, v the year 52 on the second day of dark half of Falguna.”’ i This inscription conclusively proves that Rudradaman ascended the throne some years (call it x) before a.p. 130. We also know that the latest inscriptional date of Nahapana is 46 (a.p. 124); he must therefore have ceased to reign some years (call it y) after that. We further know that Chashtana and Jayadaman both preceded Rudradaman. If therefore we assume that Chashtana succeeded Nahapana it follows that :— hashtana’s reign (both as Kshatrapa and Mahaksha- trapa) + Jayadaéman’s reign + « + y = 6 pk 1 e. 52—46). Assuming « and y to be each even equal to 2 years, the with ao Such a mention SanuacLabiy. hows that Chash- tana ruled for sufficiently long time to have his name closely associated with the city which hia once been his capital. It may of course be argued that Ptolemy mentioned his name because he was the reigning king at the time Ptolemy wrote his accounts and hence such a mention does ~~ ange anything regarding the length or importance of the re Bu I shall hereafter vp that Chashtana was not fe reigning ith has of course noticed the inscriptions but then he seems ra have clung to his old opinion still. A simple statement of his chronological scheme, will, I believe, throw the pee of it into discredit nm the year aD. 126 the Andhra dived Vilivayakura I hee. enue the power of Nahapan Vol. X, No. 6.] The Date of Chashtana. 225 [NV.S.] ‘* After the destruction of Nahapana the local government ‘of the west was entrusted to one Chashtana who seems to have been a Saka and to have acted as viceroy under the Andhra conqueror.’’ ‘* Previous to a.D. 130, the satrap Rudradaman, grandson of Chashtana, had assumed the government of the western V. Smith makes no mention of Jaydaman, but know from coins that he certainly ruled between Chashtana and Rudradéman (Rapson, ibid., p.76). Chashtana ruled both as Kshatrapa and Mahakshatrapa, his son ruled as Kshatrapa, and all these are comprised within two to three years. I be- lieve every impartial mind would at once reject this scheme as wholly improbable. If then Chashtana is not the successor of Nahapana what would be his probable date? It is generally assumed that four generations of kings cover one century. We may apply this these two are known to have reigned for about 46 years. This als regarding the date of Chashtana. us we arrive at a probable date of Chashtana within 2 to 4 years of the era uniformly used by the W. Kshtr aring in mind that Chashtana is described in all the tia of the W. Kshatra as the founder of that not necessarily si at Tiastenes was a contemporary of Ptolemy. I shall now prove this beyond all doubt. Now 226 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914.} Ptolemy, mentions Siro Polemaios (King Pulumayi) in the same way as he does Chashtana. Ptolemy’s account must ° therefore have been written after the accession of that prince. This took place some years after a.p. 131 (V. Smith gives the date 138, Rapson gives the date 131 + 2, where x may be taken to be any number less than 10), whereas Chashtana must have ceased to reign some time before the year 130, as we find his grandson ruling in that year. Chashtana therefore cannot have been living at the time when Ptolemy wrote his book. It follows further from this deduction that it is not legitimate to take Ptolemy to mean that the kings whom he associated with some distinguished cities were necessarily hi contemporaries. The only cer ain and legitimate conclusions from Ptolemy’s state- ment regarding Chashtana are :— (1) That Chashtana must have flourished before and not after the death of Ptolemy, which event probably took some years after a.p. 161. (2 at he was a famous king of Ujjayini, with the name of which city his name was very familiarly associated. oth these conditions are satisfied by our assumption that he conquered Ujjayini and founded a royal line there about A.D. 78 Thus we see that the historical evidence corroborates the Jaina tradition that 135 years after Vikrama the Sakas again conquered Ujjayini ; we need only add ‘‘ under the leadership of Chashtana.’’ MONON NON NO FEI 25. Improvements in Measurements with Quadrant Electrometers. By V. H. Jackson, M.A., and A. T. Muxersesr, M.A. [Read at the first Indian Science Congress, January 15th, 1914.] [With Plate XXIII.} The difficulties connected with the use of quadrant elec- trometers in India are well known. It would be hard to suggest a more unfavourable climate for accurate electrostatic work satisfactorily under such conditions, owing to the troubles connected with its glass insulation. Though electrometers of the Dolezal:k type are much more simple in use as well as more sensitive, they do not give satisfactory results in India without special precautions, and we believe that for this reason their use in physical laboratories in t\\is country is more limited than is desirable in view of the increasing importance of electro- static measurements. e have been working on this subject in the laboratory of the Patna College at intervals extending over more than four years, and the object of this short paper is to show that work even during the dampest weather of the monsoon. These (1) Improvements in accuracy of measurement. It is unnecessary to elaborate the point that no measure- ments can be trusted unless all keys and connections which are used are efficiently screened from electrostatic disturbances. In electrometer work as in many other electrical measure- ments it is advisable, especially in India, to depend as far as possible on air for insulation and solder for contacts. ; The most serious practical difficulty is the slight shift of 228 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. scale divisions or even more, it is impossible to obtain any- thing like accuracy in measurements, such as those on capacity, in which a knowledge of the true deflection is required. Of course the zero-shift hardly matters when ionisation currents are being observed. This defect can usually be traced to the fact that the wire which makes connection with the quadrants is supported on some insulator. and that this has become electrified by some accidental] disturbance. When this insulator consists of paraf- i e usual mercury cups let into it, the shift of zero is sometimes very marked, and on several occasions we have found that after a key of this type has been merely moved from one place to another it has had to be kept with all its cups earthed for more than twenty-four hours before the effect disappears. For measurements such as the ionisation of gases due to radioactivity, the only essential key is a simple one to connect the quadrants to earth. For general work, however, it is con- venient to use a key which will give all the connections required. If this key is made up as a separate apparatus it requires its wn and a more complicated type of insulation, thus increas- ing the liability to accidental electrification. In all measurements it is desirable to have some means n should therefore be arranged on the key is five, namely :—— (1) To one pair of quadrants (the other pair al ways earthed). (2) To one pole of a standard cell, the other being earthed. (3) To earth. (4) Toa condenser of known, preferably variable, capacity. (5) To the ionisation or other apparatus used in the measurements. The only special device necessary is one to prevent a short- circuit of the standard cell by accidental connection between (2) and (3). The following arrangement which we have adopted secures these requirements, and at the same time reduces the amount of insulation required to a minimum :— A stout brass wire is screwed underneath the electrometer to the terminal of one pair of quadrants. This carries at : 2 7 loops, the insulation of the latter being further improved by sul- phur on the hooks. The pointed and amalgamated ends of the Vol. X, No. 6] Measurements with Quadrant Electrometers. 229 [N.8.] cylinders are adjusted so as to dip when necessary into metal cups containing mercury, which are carried by stout wires, entirely in air, or through small sulphur plugs, from the other parts of the apparatus. “The key thus amounts to an ordinary four-way key in permanent connection to one pair of quadrants, with lateral and diagonal connections which can be operated from a distance by threads. Practically the whole of theinsula- tion of this key is thrown on the ambroid jah sgn of these quadrants, and as it can be enclosed in the same case as the electrometer no separate drying agent is necessary Simple adjustments are ded to centre the points of the cylinders in the epitarct cups, and to prevent breaking the suspensions by sudden jerks. The connections are how in the diagram. EARTH 230 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [{June, 1914. an ordinary cylindrical air-condenser is used as the standard capacity, it is convenient to enclose it in the elec- trometer case. The standard cell may also be shut up in this case, but if the silk were to break it would be short-circuited, so that it is preferable to take the wire which supports the mercury cup connected to it through the wall of the case by means of a sulphur plug. A similar plug is necessary in any case in order to establish connection between the quadrant and the testing vessel outside. (2) Improvements in insulation. Using a key of the type just described, a series of observa- tions on the insulation of the various parts of the apparatus was made from July to Uctober, 1913, ie. at the most un- favourable season. In electrometer work, it is usually considered that the insulation is satisfactory when the rate of leak from the ? e capacity of the air-condenser used in our measure- ments was about 80 E.S.U., or at least three times as large 5 that of the quadrants and attached key. Hence when the quadrants and condeuser are connected in parallel, the rate of leak ought not to exceed 0:0025 volt per minute, if the insulation of the latter is good. The surface of the ambroid insulators of the quadrants must of course be carefully cleaned. A point often overlooked is that these insulators are hollow, and the walls o: tne cavity are usually more in need of cleaning than the exterior. When no drying agent is used, the leak from tne quad- 1 e.g. Makower and Geiger, Pract. Radioactivity, p. 13. Vol. X, No. 6.] Measuremenis with Quadrant Electrometers. 231 [N.S.] rants, except perhaps in very dry weather, is usually two or three times as large as the maximum detined above, and in wet weather becomes still greater. The tubes of the air-condenser were insulated from one another by ebonite. This substance is extremely sensitive to moisture, and the leak without the use of ying agents was from ten to more than a hundred times its proper value. Tania i. Electrometer and condenser enclosed in teak case. Quadranis charged to 1018 volt before insulating. Front of case opened only for the measuremenis. No drier used LEAK AFTER INSULATING (VOLTS PER MINUTE). | Date 1913. | Quadrants only. | Quadrants+Condenser. | — Aciiiancpcaniate pe — dics April 3rd_.. ve 0-032 Ses ee eee ee 0-023 0-090 July 3lat re ne 0-039 is August 7th .. ae gt 0-025 ‘sy bar vat 0-025 s 13th 0-032 { Calcium chloride was introduced into the case on August 9th. Table 11 shows that this had no effect four days later. It also shows that when the case was kept open for some hours on a very damp day the increase of the leak, especially on the ebonite of the condenser, was very rapid. TaBe II. August 13th,1913. Rarning. Front of case kept open — il am. Lie AFTER INSULATING (VOLTS PER MINUTE). } Time. | Quadrants only. Quadrants + Condenser. 11-0 a.m. 0-032 11-20 a.m. — 0-076 11-45 a.m. 0 ge) 11-50 a.m. | ‘Sie 0-150 2-30 p.m. | x 2-40 p.m. | : 0-300 232 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {June, 1914. DIAGRAM TI Volts /min Leak of Quedrants o'025, Sulphurie acid Calcium Chlorive c wipe O‘OL5 J 7 a nee 0'010 / 1 | | Sept, 18%26% i ea 0°005 ce Pw 4 on oO 40 80 120 160 — Hours ‘after closing case. to the mirror, and with four very small holes through which the threads passed to connect with the key. As the needle was suspended by a quartz fibre, an arrangement was added so that when necessary it could be charged from the outside of the case, by connecting the phosphor bronze strip to one terminal of a battery and then screwing it up, against a spring, into connec- tion with the suspension. Vol. X, No. 6.] Measurements with Quadrant Electrometers. 233 {NV.S.] DIAGRAM IL Volts /min Leak of Quadrants and Condenser 0'010 ulphuric acid re Sept, 62-11% Ae aicrum Chlotide 0'008 Seon a |Sept. i jg Ses 0°006 V <=] Sept 18 ager j vs a 4 \ Oct 6%-224¢ = Hours after closing case, After this alteration, calcium chloride was again introduced into the case, which was then closed. It will be seen from Dia- gram I, which shows the quadrant leaks under various condi- tions, that calcium chloride is unsuitable. Though the leak immediately after the case was closed fell to near the standard value of 0:01 volt per minute, it rapidly increased to double this value after 16 hours, after which it remained more or less steady. On the ebonite of the condenser the improvement lasted rather longer, as is shown in Diagram II. The results for the first sixty hours after the case was closed are summatr- ized in Table 111 :— a 234 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. DIAGRAM IIL Volts /min Leak of Quadrantsa Sulphur Plug. o°;025 Calcium Chloride Sulphuric acid 0°'020 | 2 | Sept, 6 thule 4 Sept, /t# 16 2 OO15 0'010 {| [ vi oe 0005 eee 3. —— / ee F Sept 156 —"c0 — ° 40 80 120 160 Hours after closing case. Vol. X, No. 6.] Measurements with Quadrant Electrometers. 235 [N.S.] TaBxeE III. Drying agent, calcium chloride. Teak case. August 26th to September 4th. | LEAK AFTER INSULATING (VOLTS PER MINUTE). Hours after ar ee, Ace en closin | Quadrants only. Quadrants + Condenser. , | 4 | 0012 00082 12 0-016 00073 24 | 0-021 0-0059 36 0°020 48 0:019 60 | 0-019 When strong sulphuric acid was substituted for the calcium chloride, the improvement of the insulation was very marked fi Afte uw only one quarter of the maximum allowed. The insulation of the condenser also greatly improved. The effect, however, was merely temporary. After forty hours the quadrant leak ex- ceeded 0-01 volt per minute, and continued to increase until after three days it reached more than double that value. In Table IV, which shows these results for the first sixty hours, a third series of values has been added, which gives the leak when the quadrants were connected to the sulphur plug through which the connection with apparatus outside the case ade. The outer surface of the sulphur was necessarily exposed to damp air. Before the measurements were made, it was lightly brushed to remove spider webs, which are frequently formed on all insulators not protected. TaBLe IV. Drying agent, sulphuric acid. Teak case. September 6th to 11th. f LEAK AFTER INSULATING (VOLTS PER MINUTE). Hours after ravates | Quadrants and Quadrants and | pcmsertyassrting sulphur plug. condenser. 4 00026 | 0-0014 12 | 0-0044 | 00100 00018 24 00065 | 00127 0 36 0-0095 00140 00041 48 0-0124 00156 0 60 | 00178 0°0195 00066 236 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. These observations made it clear that moisture gradually entered the case, so that the sulphuric acid became more and more dilute until it ceased to produce any effect. It was thought that this moisture probably entered by diffusion through the teak, so that this was soaked in paraffin to protect it from direct contact with moist air. This merely retarded the deterio- ration of the insulation. A leak of 0-01 volt per minute from the quadrants was not reached until sixty hours after the case was closed. These measurements, made from September 11th to 16th, are shown in the diagrams. In order to test whether diffusion of water vapour through the wood was the cause of the failure of the insulation, the whole of the case was protected with a zinc cover, soldered at all edges so that moisture could only reach the interior through the smail holes left for the passage of the threads to the key. Ob- servations made after this alteration showed that a satisfactory ion had been obtained, as although the wood was damp Table V:— TABLE V. Drying agent, sulphuric acid. Sealed zinc case. September 18th to 26th. LEAK AFTER INSULATING (VOLTS PER MINUTE). Hours after | Sei sr itiet ae closin: | | Quadrants and | Quadrants and | Quadrants only. | sulphur plug. | condenser. oe sand pitino ignated hails bccn } — ——— - ———————— 4 | 0-0018 0-0081 00020 | | 12 | 00027 00058 0-0012 24 0-0044 0-0052 00014 36 0-0038 0-0034 0-0014 48 00048 0-0055 00015 60 | 0°0055 0-0047 When the wood inside the zinc cover had become thoroughly dry, the improvement of the insulation became still greater. In the final series of observations, the first part of which is shown Vol. X, al o. 6.] Measurements with Quadrant Electrometers. 237 [V 8.] TaBLe VI. Drying agent, sulphuric acid. Sealed zinc case. October 6th LEAK AFTER INSULATING (VOLTS PER MINUTE). Hours after closing. Qu ee at Quadrants and | Quadrants and y | sulphur plug. | condenser. + 0-0015 0-0043 00006 12 0°0013 0:0039 00004 24 0°0015 0:0035 | 00006 36 00028 00045 00008 48 0:0035 0:0057 00010 60 0-0038 00062 | 0-0012 In all the above measurements the rate of leakage observed was slightly greater than the figures given in the Tables, on account of the diminution of deflection due to the gradual ‘loss of charge on the needle. This was found to be practically independent of the drying agent used. The apparent leak did not exceed the true leak by more than 0:001 volt per minute in any case, and was usually about 0:0008 volt per minute in excess, (3) Increase of accuracy obtained. A few examples are added to show that with a constant zero and the high degree of insulation already secured, the accuracy of measurements of capacity by the ordinary method of mixture is much increased. (a2) Effective capacity of the electrometer. Consecutive tests with a condenser of known capacity gave the following results for capacity of the quadrants and attached key, when the needle was charged to 16 volts :— February 17th, 1910. January 8th, 1914. 2°6 26°2 56°5 26°20 ‘9 26°24 57°6 26°19 53°8 26°22 55°6 26°42 54-7 26°32 54:5 26°29 Mean 3) oon 26°27 oitteeey error of a —— org observation.. 1°75 0°04 238 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1914. In the earlier series the electrometer needle was of the original paper type, and the key was separate, its capacity together with connections being about 21 E.S.U. In the later measurements an aluminium needle and the later type of key were used, the capacity of the latter being about 8 E.S.U. Measurements of capacity by the method of mixture prob- ably do not reach as a rule a higher standard of accuracy than that of the earlier series quoted above. Forinstance, the figures given by F. C. Brown,! in a recent paper on ‘‘ A practical elec- trical method of measuring the distance between parallel con- ducting planes ’’ show that the values of consecutive measure- ments varied by several electrostatic units :— 45°1 31°2 96°6 36°71 35°7 100-9 32°9 30°0 99-1 Mean... 380 32:3 98°9 (b) Variation of the effective capacity of the quadrants with the potential of the needle. In February 1898 Prof. Clifton at the Clarendon Laboratory, Oxford, first noticed that the effective capacity of the quad- rants of an electrometer depended very largely on the charge dle. By i stability was almost reached, Clifton found that the effective capacity of the quadrant system was increased practically ‘git fold. The capacity of the parallel-plate air-condenser, whic given to the needle, were not measured, but a summary of his results shows the effect very clearly :— oe Tice sig oa aa Date, 1898. | “ Sensttivenese. Capacity of quadran | (Air condenser = 1). Cee Aes Bet nce February 2nd 100 0°51 oa tga 264 2°54 je ce | 190 1°62 5th 163°5 | 1-30 Owing no doubt to the very high values of the charge 02 the needle, the sensibility was not proportional to its potential, and the true connection of the latter with the variation of the capacity was not apparent. The measurements summarized in the following Table 1 Phys. Review, 2nd Series ; II, 4; Oct. 1913; page 317. Vol. X, No. 6.] Measurements with Quadrant Electrometers. 239 [N.S.] show that in accordance with the theory first given by Sir J. J. Thomson,! and since developed by Stewart,” Beattie,’ and others, the effective capacity of the quadrants, as determined by the method of mixture with a known capacity, varies as the square of the potential given to the needle. The figures in the third column of this Table have been calculated from the equation C=24'5+0°0114 V*. In order to make the initial deflection of the electrometer approximately constant, the potential applied to head quadrants was varied, but in no case exceeded 1-018 volt. Taste VII. Needle charged to | Capacity observed. Capacity calculated. 2-0 volts | 24°6 E.S.U 24°5 E.8.U. 58 25-71 24° 15°6 270 27:3 19°7 | 28-4 28 23°8 | 30°3 30 26°0 32°2 32°2 29°6 33°9 34:5 34° 37°3 38°3 37-4 41-1 40°5 41-4 43°5 44-0 46°5 49°2 49°2 49-4 53°4 52°5 Allowing for the capacity of the key, that of the quadrant system with an uncharged needle was therefore about 16 E.S.U. ments described in this paper, made from November 11th to 18th, 1913, gave the following results :— Quadr. + key .. 0:4 to 0°6x 10° megohms. Ebonite of condenser .. 20 to 60x 10° is Sulphur plug .. .. 0:2 to 0°6 x 10° i; Though ebonite is much affected by moisture, its insulation resistance is extremely high in a thoroughly dry atmosphere. The arrangements descri in section 2 of this paper cannot be regarded as entirely satisfactory, as moist air is still allowed free ac to the inside of the electrometer case to the key. Temperature differences amounting to four or five egrees are set up when the laboratory doors are kept open. As the capacity of the case is about forty litres, a difference of five degrees at a mean temperature of 30° C would set upa flow 1 Phil. Mag. 46, p. 537, Dec. 1898. 2 Phys. Review, Ist Series; XXI, 4; Oct. 1905 ; p. 229 3 Electrician, LXV, No. 18; Aug. 12, 1910; p. 729. 240 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914.] of about 600 c.c. of air in or out of the case, and this, if saturated, would carry about 0-02 gm. of water with it. In course of time the sulphuric acid would become too dilute to exert any influence on the insulation. It is evident from the diagrams that this actually takes place. About twenty-four hours after fresh acid has been introduced and the case sealed, the insulation com- mences to deteriorate, and in damp weather it would be neces- sary to reopen the case after about a month in order to renew the acid. t would of course be easy to make arrangements to renew the acid without opening the case. As we wish to test the effect of more powerful desiccators than sulphuric acid, such as phos- phorus pentoxide (or metallic sodium), we think that it would be better either to make the case absolutely airtight, or to allow the free circulation of air to continue, whilst ensuring that any air which enters the case is thoroughly dried. By passing the threads through small U tubes containing mercury, direct com- munication with moist air can be prevented. This point is now under investigation. SN 2 OOS Journ. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. X, 1914. PLATE XXill. CASE OF ELECTROMETER. 26. Jhalrapatan Stone Inscription ot Udayaditya [Vikrama| Samvat 1143 (1086 A.D.). By SAutryacHarya Pror. Pr. BishwesuwaR Nats, Suastri, Jodhpur. [With Plate X XII.] This stone inscription lies in Sarvasukhiyakothi at Jhal- rapatain. It contains ten lines of writing which cover a space of 8” (in breadth) by 64” (in height.) It is well preserved. The characters are Nagari. The letters in the first seven lines are bigger than those in the last three.! The language is Sanskrit and the whole of the inscription is in prose. The inscription is dated the 10th of the bright half of by Udayaditya. A detailed account of these has been pub- lished by me in the issue of January 1914 of the Saraswati Magazine. TExtT.” . za aif’ aa: faraTa |) SAT pres qa are vo H- Me. Pe ae Cc oe a ae staqzafeataamiafaaatisd | a- faatau(a) usta afeagaugiaaag | & |- a whit: uratefad atfed’ | vat fafafemae a- ma Ow wo | It is probable that the last lines may have been engraved after- wards. . 2 From an impression kindly supplied by Mr. G. H. Ojha. 3 Denoted by a symbol. + Read 3urq: 5 Read yefas | § Read ysfaw i 7 Read STaretsa atic | 242 Oe SO Ne) Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {June, 1914. sratentuanaareanat: Saxe sat wy | santa ufea'euaqa fa | * | STaTEAT- at uefa: gaafa | Siatfaneatfatae’ afc’- aaa aauctaeateagaucae'saga | | Ua Sqye- afafaa’ Suaeaqad aa qa HteT” vat afea ufa a()faat- Sa) 8) ant agatie Text. '? 1. Om! namah Sivaya i! samvat 1143 Vaisa(sa)kha Sudi 10 a- vat davsha Stimad 4 Aivel Tai- 3. likanvayé PER anna-[ké}- 4. na Sambhoh oe karitamm'®, Tatha Cirihil- latalécha- 5. da gheush4-ke ika isakayoh antaralévapicha 6. utkirnn-éyam Padita'® Harsukénéti'" * Janasitkama- 7. ta Dea pranamati 1 Sri Ldligasvamidévassa ” kéri 8. eink guces » PattakilaCahilasutaPattakilaJannake- na i Sri Séndhavadévapar 9. -va"! nimityam”™ dipateilya*® catuhpalam-ékam muda- kam** kritva tatha varisam” prati savi-[jna]- 10. © tam*’ i @y Mangalam Mahasri i ¢ 1 Read twa | 2 Read eo ati 8 Read °@a@ | 4 The ee Cg is not clear: perhaps Ba is meant. 5 Read #fware | 6 Read qefae | . 7 Read qsfare ) 8 Read qatatam | 9 Read wa-! 10 The ony is not clear: perhaps @T@& HAT is meant. 'l Read 4y 12 From an i impression kindly 0 ey by Mr. G. H. Ojha. . Denoted > a symbol. 4 Read p a 5 Read karitah. 16 Read maine Read Harsakens, is Read Devasya 19 Read krité. 20 Read Tailikanva. 21 Read parv: 22 Read nimittath “: Read taila. 24 Read Modaiark. 25 Read varsam. 6 Read Sarhvijnatem. Vol. X, No. 6.] Jhalrapatan Stone Inscription. 243 [N.S.] TRANSLATION. Om! Reverence to Siv: In Sanvat 1143 on the ‘10th of the bright half of the month Vaisakha. To-day in the prosperous reign of sen bes manhhig Taili Patéla Chahila’s son Patela-Jan Erected “a temple of the god Siva and also in Chirihi Between Chidichanshs Kapikaé and Vruvasaka (dug) a Vapi (tan This inscription is sites ee by Pandita Harsuka, the mother of Jan Dhaini bows. oe Sti Loligasvamidéva. Taili atala Chahila’s son Patela-Janna at the cere- mony of Séndhavadév pee ael four pala (a measure oil and a ball of sweet to be offered every yea Prosperity! Great Soreans —— ae oor ees CC V OQOT) SFTT ieameg (uesytA) edypedepy jo uoydiosur auojs uejedesjeyp mS —.. : — . * ae eS : ‘ : 4 ei + Meer? WX Id ‘PIGL “&K TSA ‘Buegq ‘909 ‘sy ‘usanop . 27. NUMISMATIC SUPPLEMENT No. XXIII. Note.—The numeration of the article below is continued from p. 200 of the ‘‘ Journal and Proceedings ’’ for 1914. 132. An Unissugp Ruprsr or Epwarp-VII. It gives me pleasure to submit the following fev ies eee we a noteworthy rupee which I have had an opportunity of ing. It is of standard weight and diameter, ao with aeeuignt milling. Obverse : Broad rim with inner fringe of small semicircles. Crowned bust of King to right; surmounted by an orb a cross : embroidered collar and tippet: star at throat : sash-bow on right shoulder: two chains pendent on breast. Legend : to left of bust, ‘‘ Edward VII’’: to right of bust, ‘‘ King and Emperor.”’ Reverse ; Rim as on obverse. Interior to fringe of rim two linear circles. Area: Circle with legend. Sada) Margin containing wavy line, and enclosing at top: side view of lo ; at bottom: lotus viewed from to right: rose and shamrock and “thistle, each to left : same as to right. It is matter of common knowledge that the design adopted for the rupees that were struck as currency during the reign of Edward VII did not in this country meet with popular wed ae val. The bust on the obverse was not merely uncrowned, it was emphatically pald-headed, and to the Indian mind bald- ness does not ate with the majesty that should attach to a asics ite so exalted as a ‘‘King and mor ea The of the essence of royalty. it is thus not surprising that the mint authorities at Calcutta decided to impress a new design. 246 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1914. In due course fresh dies were prepared, and all the material necessary for a new issue was collected. On the eve of the fateful 6th of May, 1910, everything was in complete readi- ness, when alas! further action was stayed, for the mourn- ful intelligence flashed across the wires that our beloved King was dead. It would seem, however, that a dozen or so rupees were struck, but none were issued as currency. The new coin, had it been issued, would, I am confident, have won immediate acceptance, inasmuch as the blemishes which in popular esti- mation had marred the earlier rupee had all been happily avoided. On the obverse King Edward appears as a King indeed, royally robed and crowned. e new design is for the numismatist of special interest, since clearly it was adopted, mutatis mutandis, for the later struck rupees of George V. Of both the reverse is identical, ave that on the Edward rupee the date is 1910. We have the same circular area with the same legend, and the same wavy margin, exhibiting at the top and at the bottom the Indian oon while on either side come a rose, a shamrock, and a thistle. the unissued Edward rupee is but an ‘‘ advance copy ”’ of King George’s. Both exhibit the same imperial crown surmounted by a Maltese cross, both the same ermine tippet, both the same two chains distinctive of the Orders of the Star of India and of the Indian Empire, and on both we find that same diminutive representation of an elephant which, curiously misapprehended, was to become the storm-centre of so much hostile criticism. Gso. P. TAYLOR. 133. A New Corn or Saag Aram II. [Plate XXI.] Mint: Muradabad. Metal : Copper. Size: ‘8 inches = 21 mm. Weight : 290 ors. =18°8 grms. plc gle jie slob — ghee Sue Vol. X, No. 6.] Numismatic Suppiement No. XXIII. 247 [N.S.] Reverse : ka lero “F : Brae Lys! Lo ee ok tote 2 wv (m. 91. I.M. Cat., vol. 3, p. 359) to the left of r. L in the (w of cpyile Provenance : Amroha, District Muradabad. No. 2441 in the Indian Museum Catalogue, vol. 3, is a Muradabad rupee of the same king. Rupees of this mint are also known of Aurangzeb, Shah ‘Alam Bahadur, Ahmad Shah Bahadur, and ‘Alamgir II, but a copper coin seems to be a novelty Panna Lat, I.C.S. 134. A New Tyee or AUDAMBARA COINAGE. [Plate XXI.} Thirty copper coins were made over to me for examination by Dr. A. Venis, C.I.E., of the Queen’s College, Benares, which he had received from Mr. Nelson Wright, I.C.S. Subse- ree very little known variety of the tribal coin of the Audumbaras, which has never been described before. The earliest notice of a type of Audambara coinage approaching this type was made by Cunningham.' He esta lishes definitely that the Odumbaras or Audambaras were a North-Western tribe because they have been twice coupled by Varahamihira with the Kapisthalas, who were the Kambisthioli of Arrian’s Indica, and with the Traigarttas and Kulindas in Markandeya Purina. He then proceeds to describe this particu- lat type of coinage :— ; ‘The coins are thin pieces of copper, either square or oblong, with a temple on one face and an elephant on the other. Beside the temple are the Buddhist symbols of the Swastika and Dharmachakra, and beneath it, a snake. Before the elephant there is a tree surrounded by a Buddhist railing, ith an Arian legend on two sides, of which one-half reads distinctly Odumbara. I conclude therefore that the tree represented is an Udumbara.’’* | Arch. Survey. Rep., Vol. XIV, p. 116. 2 Ibid., p. 117. 248 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (June, 1914. In his ‘* Coins of Ancient India’’ Sir Alexander Cunning- ham has dwelt on the tribal coins of the Audumbaras at length.! In his account he has described only one coin which bears some resemblance to the variety which is being described in this paper. But even in this case the specimen was in such drawing instead of a photograph® from a cast. The following are the points of resemblance between the type published by Cunningham and that under discussion :— (1) On the obverse, we have in each case (a) a sacred tree inside a railing, (b) an elephant walking towards it, and (c) below these two a snake. The only points of difference are the position of the Kharosthi legend Odummbarisa which is placed under the snake in Cunningham’s coins, but which is and the figure of the elephant. In Cunningham _ entire body of the elephant is to be found, but in the new variety, the head, trunk and the fore-legs only are to be found. The entire body must have been absent even in the die as the word Odumbarisa in Kharosthi is to be found to the right of the elephant’s forepart. 2) On the reverse we have in each case a temple. The one in the new variety appears to be a three-storeyed one, and slightly different in shape from that in Cunningham’s coin. To the right of this we find a trident (trisula). It differs from Cunningham’s drawing in two respects; (a) we find a shaft surmounted by a wheel instead of the trisiila, and (6) we find a svastika on a pillar to the left of the temple. ne hundred and three coins out of this find of three hundred and sixty-three bear names of three of the rulers of the tribe, viz. Dharaghosa, Sivadisa and Rudradasa. Out ot these three the coins of Dharaghosa have been described before,° but the other two names are new to Numismatists. Cunning- ham has included coins of Rudravarman, Ajamitra, Mahimitra, Bhinumitra, VirayaSas and Vrsni among the coins of the Audumbaras, but none of these seem to have had any connec- by Cunningham expressly mention the name Odumbara along with that of the King. So on the coins of Dharaghosa, Sivadasa and Rudradasa, belonging to this find, we invariably find that the name of the tribe is associated in the legend an 1 Coins of Ancient India, p. 66. 2 Coins of Ancient India, pl. IV, 2. 8 Ibid., p. 67. Vol. X, No. 6.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXIII. 249 [V.S.] Obv.: M ow, Rajia Dharaghosasa Odumbarisa (Kha- Rev RG Peat ey Raia Dharaghosasa Odumbarisa (Brah- mi). In the coins of Rudradisa and Sivadasa, the names of the kings, spelt Rudradasa and Sivadasa, are introduced into the Kharosthi and Brahmi legends without any further change. The Brahmi letters belong to the Ist century B.c. when angular forms had taken the place of the more cursive alpha- bet of the inscriptions of ASoka. The letters of the Kharosthi eta would also point to the same date. In the legends the e of long vowels such as @, % @i and aw seems to have been wecided both in Kharosthi and in Brahmi, so we have Sivadasa for Sivadasa, Rudradasa for Rudradasa, Odumbart for As the names of een ees are very often incomplete I have illustrated eight co I. Dharaghosa. l. Obv.: Sacred tree within railing, and front part of elephant ; traces of Kharosthi legend to left. Rev : Trident with banners and traces of temple to left. Brahmi legends : on top, Mahadevasa ra (iia), to right, pneesoho (sasa ). Obv. : Sacred tree. Kharosthilegend: on top (Maha) devasa rana ; + left Dharagho (sasa Brahmi legend to left (Dha) raghosasa. ” Oby. Sa wae tree within enclosure; front part of ease to right. h. legend ; on top rafia, to left Dhara- ghosas(a). Rev.: Mlegible. Il. Sivadasa. 4, Obv.: Kh. legend Odumbari (sa). Rev.: Temple and trident, snake below. Brahm! legend to ee Sivadasa Obv. : Sacred tree within enclosure ; front part of ele- cee to right. Kh. legend to left. Sivadasasa Rev. : Three-storeyed temple and trident. ' Fragmentary Brahmi legend on top (Maha) devasa. Ill. Rudradasa. Obv. - Sacred tree and front part of elephant. Kh. ane to right Odumba (risa); on top Mahadevasa raia; to left Rudrada (sasa). Rev. : Three-storeyed temple and trident Brahmi legend : te top, Mahadevasa raia ; to rig ht, Rudra (dasasa). 250 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. 7. Obv.: Sacred tree within enclosure and front part of elephant. Kh. legend, on top, (Ma) hadevasa. Rev.: Three-storeyed temple, trident, with banners, below snake. Br. legend: on top (Ma) hadevasa ra (ia); to right Rudradasasa. 8. Obv.: Sacred tree inside enclosure and front part of elephant. Kh. legend: on top Mahadevasa rana; to left Rudradasa (sa). Rev. ; Three-storeyed temple, below snake. Traces of Br. legend on top ; to right Odu (m) barisa. R. D. BANERSI. 135. Barrata or BaRAR 2 [Plate XXI.] Some time ago M. Muhammad Abdus-Saboor, who is en- gaged in cataloguing the coins of the Nagpiir Museum, sent me a cast of a rupee of Akbar of the type hitherto supposed to have issued from the Bairat Mint. He expressed some difficulty in reading the mint name as Bairat and suggested that the word looked more like ‘‘ Barar.’’ _Yeason to prefer the reading Barar to Bairat or Bairata. This view was strengthened by the comparison of the coins with rar was ceded to the Mughals by treaty in 1004 4.#.,' the 41st year of Akbar’s reign, and as far as I know there are no so-called ‘‘ Bairata ’’ rupees which bear an earlier date than 42 Llahi. On the other hand fulis from the Bairata mint are known of the mint name on the rupees in question. Further the 1 Burgess, Chronology of Modern India, p. 58. 2 LM.C., Vol. III, No. 169, Journ. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. X. 1914. Plate XXI. t ART.135. 8. A New Coin of Shah Alam II. (Article 133). A New Type of Audambara Coinage. (Article 134). 'Bairata or Barar ? (Article 135). Vol. X, No. 6.} Numismatic Supplement No. XXIII. 251 [NV .8.] *‘ye’’ of 4 is also clearly present, whereas on the rupees there is no separate stroke for that letter. The similarity of the ‘‘ Bairata’’ rupees in type and lettering with those struck at Elichptr is most striking. is also a coin of Jahangir’s first year 1014 4.H. which Lieut.-Col. Vost has ascribed to ‘‘ Bairata.’’? !' The coin is in the Lucknow Museum, and I have recently seen it with the result that I am satisfied that on it too the mint name can unhesitatingly be read ‘‘ Barar.’’ In this case also the type and lettering—even the rather unusual position of the date—are identical with the earlier coins of Jahangir of the Elichpar mint. Taking all these facts into consideration the arguments appear to tell strongly in favour of the reading ‘ Barar.’’ reading ‘‘ Barar ’’ in preference to ‘‘ Bairita pe of Akbar hitherto ascribed to the latter mint It is suggested, therefore, that Bairata be excluded from and Barar be included in the list of silver mints of Akbar and Jahangir. H. NELSON WRIGHT. 136. Nore oN THE DATES OF THE MauLipi Era or Tiret ULTAN OF Mysore. ! Num. Supp. to J.A.S.B., No. XI, art. 65. 252 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. Several writers puzzled by the difference of fourteen years between the two systems at the time the w The true explanation was, however furnished by Marsden (Numismata Orientalia, Part I1, p. 701, 1825) who pointed out, that if the year of the Prophet’s birth in the Christian reckoning be subtracted from the Christian year in which the innovation was introduced, the result is 1215. For this purpose Marsden takes the date of Muhammad’s birth as 571 a.D., and the first year of the new era as 1786 a.p. (1786 —571 = 1215); ut as we shall see, Tipi Sultan, for some unexplained reason, appears to have assumed that Muhammad was born in 572 4 D., as the first year of the new era certainly commenced in 1787 A.D. The correct formula is, therefore, 1787—572 =1215. All writers on the subject since the time of Marsden have, so far as I know, without a single exception, assumed, no unnaturally, that because the fourth regnal year terminated in 1786 aD., the year 1215 a.m. also commenced in the same examined by the Hon’ble Diwan Bahadur L. D. Swamikannu Pillai, MA., LL.B., author of Indian Chrenology (Madras, 1911) and a well-known authority on the subject. He reports coins, are exac e same as those of the South Indian cyclic years. To take an illustration which is of more than ordinary interest, the date on which Tipi Sultan signed the preliminary articles of the treaty framed after the capture of Seringapatam by — Cornwallis, is recorded by Kirkpatrick (appendix p- ll) Ws :— Vol. X, No. 6.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXIII, 253 [V.8.] 28th of Jamadissany, 1206 a.uH. Ist of Rubbany, year Zuburjud, 1219 a.m. 22nd February, 1792 a.p. Mr. Swamikannu Pillai finds that of the three dates thus given as equivalent, the first and third correspond, but the second, ic d moon day, the #itht ending about 3 a.m., #.e. before sunrise on submit. They were sent to him on the 22nd, and returned by him, signed and sealed, the night of the 23rd February.”’ examination of these dates shows conclusively that the Maulidi year 1219 corresponds to 1791-92 a.p., and not to 1790-91, as has so often been assumed. reign, he records the year correctly. With reference to this coin he states (Numismata Orientalia, part II, p. 724) :--** This is probably the latest sperimen of his coinage that has been preserved, and must have been struck within about a month 1226 a.a., coining was in full operation at Seringapatam and two other mints, in 1227 a.M., which commenced less than a month before Tipa’s death, only a single type of coin was 254 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914. struck, and that at a remote mint, lying outside the sphere of the military operations which terminated in the capture of Seringapatam. , a8 appears certain, the Maulidi year 1215 commenced on 20th March, 1787, the first day of the Indian luni-solar year which was numbered 41 both in the Indian and in Tipi’s The following table, which shows the date according to the Christian reckoning of the commencement of each year of Tipt Sultan’s reign, will make clear some of the foregoing references :— i 2 in ) | e 3 i mrs First day of i oe Pe har Ps aos Maulidi year 4 First day of g = | 8 | 398} (Hindu New oe Hijri year. g Bs o@ | 2") Year’s day). ped G 6) | od Gg | 1 37 | | 1197 | 7th Dec., 1782 2 38 | 1198 | 26th Nov., 1783 3 39 | 1199 | 14th ,, 1784 + 40 eee | ‘“ 12 ; 1785 age | “a bas 1201 | 24th Octe, 1786 5 41 | 1215 | 20th March, 1787| 1292 » We 6 ly eae | 1216 | 7th April, 1203 | nd ,, 1788 7) 43 / 5. | 1217 | 27th March, 1789| 19204 | ist Sept., 1789 i a | 1218 | 16th ,, 1790| 1205} 10th ,, 1790 9 | 45 -- | 1219 | 4th April, 1791] 1206 | sist Aug. 1791 10 | 46 | .. | 1220 | 23rd March, 1792] 1207| 19th ,, 1792 Bo} ay | aes | th ~~ ,, «1793 | ie | om, bs 2 | 48) .. | 1222 | Ist April, 1704} 1209 | 29th July, 1798 13 | 49 | .. | 1223 | 2st March, 1795| 1210 | 18th » pane 14 | 50 | | | 1224| 8th April, 1796| 121; 7th » 1 | 51 w | 1225 | 29th March, 1797] 1212 | 26th June, 1797 16 52 at | 1226 | 18th 1798 | 1213} 15th , a yo] i | 1227 | 6th April, 1799] 1214! sth ,, ‘1799 ad _- Notes.—The letter years are those on which the tee ee co letters of the Arabic alphabet are found on the coins. Vol. X, No. 6.] Numismatic Supplement No. XXIII, 255 [V.S.] column cara ah = commencement of each Maulidi year is taken from p. of the Indian Calendar, by Sewell and Paes ehne Dikshit (1896). Hai r ‘Ali died on 7th December, 1782 (lst Muharram, 1197 a.H. ri Tip Sultan died on 4th Ma ay, 1799 (28th Dhu 1- qa‘da, 1213 a.H., or 29th Ahmadi, 1227 a.m.). n conclusion, I desire to thank the Hon’ ble Diwan Bahadur Sw Miitaand Pillai for the assistance which he so generously rendered in clearing up the question of dates and thus peter tied me to state that the year 1215 a.m. of Tipi Sultan commence in 1787 a.D. J. KR. HenDERSON, Supdt., Madras Government Museum. 137. Tue Lecenp or SamupRAGUPTA’S ASVAMEDHA COIN TYPE. The legend of Samudragupta’s ASvamedha coin type has survived only in fragments. In the Catalogue of Gupta Coins in the British Museum I was unable to illustrate coins giving the complete legend. The portion there given from the coins illustrated Rajadhiraja (h) prthivim vijitya (or vimavitva) Divamjayaty is ‘egshae haae to show that the legend is an Upajati couplet. 1. V.10, two aksaras follow the tya of which the second is bertailly ts thinking of expressions like apraitratha Aid aprativaryavirea, etc., I read the first of these two charac- as pra and suggested the latter epithet to complete the cotiplet. Dr. Veuis has recently examined the coin and pointed out to me that the first aksara is really hr (with Eastern h as on Pl. V, 1-7). Having established this reading he su ggested vocalising the — consonants Hager on the Ballia coin, a cast of which I owe to Mr. W. M. Campbell, I.C.S., as vajime We still satis a syllable oe complete an Upendravara Hie: Dr. Venis calls my attention to Thomas’s statement in Records, p. 22, that the restored se of the Asvamedha illustrated anywhere, which eae t-v-m dh, This supplies the g dh, and we need have no hesitation in agreeing with De. Venis that the epithet is dicaewimeihas, to be translated a Bahuvrhi, ‘‘he who has restored the horse-sacrifice.’ Although not as common as asvamedha its synonym vajimedha 18 pemetes established ; it is hardly necessary to recall the cirot- nasvamedhaha rtr, ‘the restorer of the ASvamedha long in ibapeanes of Sam udragupta’s s Allahabad inscription, and it is significant that the same root a-hr is used in both cases. It 256 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [June, 1914,] have exhausted the space at their disposal before shit had specimen may be found with dh like the coin seen by Thomas. The Ballia coin is not unique in containing the latter part of the legend, for there is a duplicate of it in the collection of Dr. William Hoey, I.C.S. (retired), of Oxford. The ending of the first line presents some difficulty. The last word on the coin in the Bodleian library and on one in Dr. Hoey’s collection is vijitya : one form of the legend therefore is Rajadhirajah prthivim vijitya Divam jayatyahrlavajimedhah. The king of kings having conquered the earth Wins heaven, being the restorer of the ASvamedha. On the majority of coins however the last aksara is clearly iva; vijitva is of course an impossible form, and as on some not j but seems to be v, I have suggested prihivimavitva as 0 form of the legend. It is poss ble that other coins have jitva preceded by some synonym of prthivim. There can be no doubt however that Dr. Venis has established one form of the legend with certainty. J. ALLAN. PS.—Dr. Venis asks me to add that his pupil Pandit Hariramachandra Divekar, M.A., drew his attention to the use of the root @ hr in connection with ASvamedha in the Allahabad sti, and that he owes the reference to Thomas to Mr. W. E. M. Campbell awe € pe ee 28. Spirit Belief in the Jataka Stories. By Nitmanr CHAKRAVABTI. In this paper an attempt has been made to give a brief account of spirit belief as can be gathered from the Pali Jataka stories which form the oldest and largest collection of fables in the world. The origin of the belief in spirits can be traced back to the Pan-Indian Soul theory of the Upanishads, etre: to which every being, whether ional or irrational, possesses a soul, which never dies bat Sunes from one body into another. Even the Ne is not without a soul; when the soul leaves the tree it die Of ret various Vedic gods only the following names are to be found in the Jatakas, viz., Sakka—a ph rine of the Vedic Indra Pajjunna ' the rain god, and Aggi? or the fire god. Of these, Sakka otibie in every now and then. He is the pro- tector of the righteous and scourge to the peractte of Secies: wicked. It ae his order that Visva- karman, the celestial architect, comes down to the earth for constructing a hermitage for ri righteous men renouncing house- pre “ang Sakka is not however an eternal god like the Vedic Ind He was originally a righteous man, raised to that dblndciss in his next wlees through his merit. According to the Dadh ivahana Jataka® there were once four brothers who The origin of the Vedie ¢ gods mentioned in the Jataka stories. Bilara Kosiya Jataka we find that righteous men after their death became Sakka, Canda (the moon-god), Suriya (the sun god) and Paficasikha Devaputta.* It is Bagign! to see pe onaike Paficasikha mentioned as a i Hafereike Devepntie. “sy known as a teacher S6 une Sarhkchya philosophy. He is the fourth in succession from Kapila, the founder of the system. He has been mentioned also in the Culladhanuggaha Jataka® and as a ga cedhabhopales in the Mahagovindasutta of the cmp be If Pajicasikha of the Samkhya philosophy is the as Paficasikhya gandhabba- putta of the Nikaya or Paneasikha Devaputta of the Jatakas, we have some data for ascertaining his time. Unfortunately 1 Jataka, Vol. I, p. 331. 2 Jataka, Vol. I, p. 235. 8 Jataka, Vol. I, P. 101. 4 Jataka, Vol. III, p. 222. 6 Jataka, Vol. III, p. 222. Ps 258 Journal of the Asvatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914. e there is no other means of establishing the identity. The rain- god and the fire-god have been mentione Coming to the world of spirits we have a host of them, Two classes of spirits ; good and evil. of the evil spirits is Vessavana Kuvera. They have to attend on him by turns and they have to live on whatever is enjoined on them by (the order of) Kuvera. They are supposed to live principally on human flesh, but occasionally we find that when they are instructed by the Bodhisattva, they abstain from the practice and some of them continue to be worshipped by the villagers like good spirits. In one place! we find that a Yakkha obtained, in return for the service rendered to Vessavana, the privilege of eating any men entering a certain house, provided they failed to utter the word ‘‘ jiva’’ (live) immediately after one had sneezed, and likewise those who would not say “ Patijiva,” i.e. ‘live on your turn,’’ being told ‘* Jiva’’ after sneezing. The practice of saying ‘‘Jiva’’ after sneezing is still prevalent, but the significance of it cannot be clearly given. In another i of destiny comes to write the fortune of the child. In another ~ place we find a Yakkhini detected in the act of stealing a child for the purpose of eating, but at last desisted, being influenced by the teachings of a wise man. In many places Yakkhinis have been described, disguised as beautiful women, beguiling ship- The good spirits. the Mahasamaya Suttanta the gods were present in myriads, also at the time of his parinirvana. They are not spirits of sibseiaut heaven. They are inhabitants of this spirits. earth. They generally form three classes, -. viz., (1 ete.; (2) spirits dwelling in trees; (3) spirits of rivers, the sea, etc. a eden eine 1 Jataka, Vol. II, p. 15. 2 Jataka, Vol. IV, p. 491. Vol. X, No. 7.] Spirit Belief in the Jataka Stories. 259 [NV.S.] First about the spirits living in houses and cities, etc. We d e introduction of the Khadi- rangara Jataka! that a spirit lived in the portal of the 4th gate of the house of Anathapindika. The house of the merchant was constantly Spirits ae in h om he tried a remedy. apathashianiion nearly exhausted his ealth in his liberality towards the Buddhist ood. The god thought of advising Anathapindaka not % spend any more on the monkhood to save himself from penury and thus to put an end to thee onstant visits of the monks. So one i and asked him who he was, and what was his ons re He said that he was the god dwelling in the 4th gate ~ the house and he came there to advise him not to spend any more on the monkhood, for by doing so he would bring ruin as himself and his family. At thisthe banker was highly ‘incensed and ordered him to quit his house at once. One peculiar characteristic of Their similarity to ods is this, that they are always the 6 Nis gota. afraid of the Buddha and his followers. In this respect they are similar to the epic ae who are in constant fear of men practising austerities. Now the banker was a follower the Buddha and reached the was not bold enough, so he went to the four nec scab — Bpiite fp renting So the These deities were in their —— births the mothers of the They are represented as looking after the welfare of their sons. In the Willhuieudite Jataka,’ the king vlays dice with a Yakkha. He is being guided by his guardian deity. The Yakkha per- ceiving this casts threatening looks at the deity, whereupon she fled to the top of the Cakkavala mountain and stood trembling there. Besides these domestic spirits we meet with another 1 J&taka, Vol. I, p 227. 2 — Vol. VI, p. 4. 8 Jataka, Vol. VI, p. 255 260 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914. ‘body of them, viz., the guardian deities of a town. The watch over the towns and look after the doings of the inhabi- tants. They dwell in the city Bae and offerings are made to them. In the Takkariya Jataka! we find that a new gate of a town was to be rear rie. the former aay being abandoned as inauspicious, and t the new one was to be consecrated by offering a human levis to the great “deity presiding over that gate. In the Matanga Jataka® we find the guardian spirit of a town tormenting the inhabitants for insulting an ascetic. In addition to these there was a belief that there were guardian deities of kings. When the kings engaged themselves in fighting with one another their guardian de.ties used to fight. In the Odlinkalinua Jataka * mention is made of a battle between the Kings of Kalinga and Assaka The hiasdiae had a settlement on the Godavari and their capital was Potana. In this battle the guardian deities of the kings Guardian deities of kings. victory feli to him whose guardian deity was viciorio We now come to:the second class of spirits, the spirits in the trees. These spirits are more important than the others and their number is very large. Not merely the big trees are the abodes of | spirits, but even the casior tree has its spirit. In the Kundaka piva Jataka* andin the Anta Jataka® we come across spirits in the castor trees. In the former there The gaia in the and eatables to the tree-gods. It must be noted here that every oy vidual had his own god to look after. A poor man wanted o take charge vas a tree-god and for that purpose he went with sah made of scum of rice and water to the castor tree in which the Bodhisattva was born. But nearing the tree he began to think: ‘* The gods live on celestial food; my god will not accept this cake of scum. at is the use of vane these ? Rather | would eat them myself.’? Thinking thus he was turning bis back, when the Bodhisattva seeing Ehat his devotee was going away, appeared in a visible form, and calling the man said that as he was not = there was no barm in his offering the coarse cake. He too had nv other alternative but to receive Lie offering. e details of a ree-worship have been givenin the Palase Jataka.’ The foot of the tree used to be Details of a tree worship. | Jataka, Vol. IV, p. 246. 2 Jataka, Vol. IV, p. 383. 3 Jataka, Vol Lip: 3. 4 Jataka, Vol. I, p. 423. 5 Jataka, Vol. II, p. 446. 6 Jatake, Vol. Il, p. 23. Vol. X, No. 7.] Spirit Belief in the Jataka Stories. 261 [V 8.] cleared, the grasses removed and the teem levelled. The tree used to be surrounded by a fence and sand scattered round the tree. Offerings of flowers, chstarida: and sandal pastes were made and flags hoisted. Lamps were placed near the tree and food used to be offered. According to the Dum- medha Jataka ! men used to kill goats, lambs, pigs and cocks and offer their flesh and blood to the gods. In the same story there is reference to human sacrifice before a tree-god. The King in Pace story promises to sacrifice a man if a certain desire of his is fulfilled. In the Dhonasakha Jataka?” wel in the Maha- sutasoma Jataka® we find the details of human sacrifice before tree gods. After killing the victim they used to wash the trunk of the tree with the blood flowing from the neck and marks of five fingers used to be made with the blood. The tree used to be surrounded by the entrails of the victim and the five sweet parts from the victim’s body used to be offere to the tree-gods. The five sweet parts or ‘‘ fleshes,’’ as I have been told by a modern Tantrik. are those from the head, the two sides, the breast and the neck respectively. In modern times there is the practice of performing a homa with the five sweet ‘‘fleshes,’’ according to the tantrik rites, whenever the at offered to a god is not killed by a single stroke. Kings to have in their gardens Mangalarukkhas or auspicious nese and worshipped them with offe ena Whenever a tree _— up a spirit comes and takes its Human sacrifice before tree-gods. Phase Sint of thc die. e there. These spirits are in con- truction of abodes i - abodes. In the Bhaddasala Jataka* as realm. The god in great difficulty goes from place to place and at last succeeds in persuading Sakka to grant sons to the king. In the Rukkhadhamma Jataka’ we find that the Bodhi- sattva was born asa tree-god. He warned his kinsmen not to take their abodes in the trees growing near human habitations. Some of his kinsmen took his advice, but others thought that they would be gainers by taking their abodes near human habitations. They would be worshipped and respected and would receive offerings, and accordingly they took their abodes near houses. One day there was a heavy storm and 1 Jataka, Vol. I, p. 259. 2 Jataka, Vol. III, p. 159. 3 Jataka, Vol. v, p- 472. : Jataka, Vol. IV 154. 5 Jataka, ¥Vot..1, rE 441. 6 Jataka, Vol. II, ?. “474. Jataka, VoL. I, p. 327. 262 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914. all those trees that stood singly near human habitations rather peculiar. Most probably the spirit residing in the tree has to Eranemigrate . & as soon as a tree is destroyed. In the Vyaggha Jataka,! it has been said, that in a certain forest there were a large number of tree-spirits, and Boddhisattva was one of them. In that forest there were lions and tigers. Men clearing jungles iO cultivation could not approach that parti- cular forest for fear of the animals and so the spirits were safe in their abodes. fine day, however, one of the gods not being able to endure any longer the stench of putrid flesh assumed a terrific appearance and scared them awa After some time men not finding any trace of those animals began to clear the forest. The gods were in a sorrowful plight. They went to their former protectors, the lions and tigers, to request them to come back to the forest and to save them from destruction. But they did not come meh and to the great grief of the gods the whole forest was destroyed. ? The gods had a Pager dislike for unclean places. This ppeEn? from the Vyaggha Jataka referred the Samuddavanija Jataka,” find that a number of men being pnabist by their creditor left their country in a boat and rrived at an island in the sea. There they lived happily on oF fruits and roots, and the sugarcane and paddy which sation there of themselves. But they were warned by a man Ww Their dislike for unclean things. to cov.r up the filth. They continued to dwell there happily for some time. But subsequently some of pais ods ea the The spirits are ocasionaly aeveeestal as will appear rigs The: In the Mahavanija Jataka” we co givvimereneag d find that a number of merchants, in course — There of their journey, came to a desert. they found a banian tree. In utter distress for want of water, they cut off a beaneh of the tree and there came out a stream \ Jataka, Vol. IL, P- 856. 2 Jataka, Vol. IV. p. 16]. 5 Jataka, Vol. IV, p. 351. ee , No. 7.] Spirit Belief in the Jataka Stories. 263 cr | cutting down the tree. We now come to the third class of spirits. These are the spirits of seas and rivers, etc. The spirits of this class are of less importance and The spirits of seas rivers. $ numerous than the former ones. In to the river Ganges and to the fishes living in her. The river goddess was pleased with him. One day the virtuous man’s brother wanting to cheat him of a purse containing a thousand coins threw it into the river. The purse was swallowed by a big fish. But the grateful Ganga-devata took the fish out of water and in the guise of a fisherman went to his house with the fish and sold the same for seven Kahapanas. In many places in the stories we find that lakes are inhabited by spirits , but they are seldom good spirits. They are generally Yakkhas or rakkhasas. They used to drag into the lakes the animals that would touch the water, and eat them up. 1 Jataka, Vol. II, p. 111. 2 Jataka, Vol. IT, p. 441. $ Jataka, Vol. V, p. 3. + Jataka, Vol. II, p. 423. 29. Further Descriptions of Stone Implements from Yiinnan. By J. Coaein Brown, M.Sc., F.G.S. [With Plates XXV-XXX.] Presented at the First India January cite _ Published with the permission of the Director, Geolog Survey of India. In the year 1868, John Anderson was the first to discover i and fifty specimens were procured by different members of the expedition which he was accompanying in the capacity of medical officer and natura sy Mom were obtained in Téng- yieh, and a few in the Santa Valle Following in Anderson’s a in 1909, I was able procure numerous specimens of the same kinds of danse in Téng-ytieh, and I have described and figured a representative series of twelve of these artifacts. Nine of the specimens were fashioned from various varieties of jadeite, the other three being cut from a slate-like rock, a fine- grained white quartzite and a basaltic rock. During extensive travels through Yiinnan in 1909 and 1910, I succeeded in making a large collection of stone imple- ments from other eR These I propose to describe here, after which i shall discuss the mye which they have on the vexed question of the stone age in China as a wh a Figure 1 represents one of ile largest s collection, a heavy, broad axe of ee basalt ban so ' An account of the + Gach of this expedition is to be found in the following works : ish Report on the Expedition to — Yiinnan, 75 h x Anderson’s 1871 report is entitled, The Stone Implements of Yiin- nan, with the description of a bronze, axe-like weapon from the Sand y. a J. Coggin Jen Stone Implements from the Téng-yieh District. Renee — e, Western China, wi th a short account of the —- of ppthtihorrmaey these Dae . Astatic Soc. Bengal. Vol. Vo Ne ow Tae, No. 8, 1909, pi * 266 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914. kuan near Ta-li Fu. It measures 19 cms. in length by 9 in breadth, at the maximum point just above the cutting edge. Its thickness is about 55 cms. The sides which are smoothly marks of use. Long continued exposure has resulted in the Indian Neolithic types from the United Provinces and the Shevaroy Hills. It is abnormally long for its width and thick- ness and measures 23 x 7 x 6 cms. e front face of the speci- men is distinctly convex and the back one much flatter. The sides are very broad and well rounded in to the faces. They taper gently to both edge and butt, the broadest point being just below the middle of the specimen.. The edge takes polished originally but has now a pecked appearance due to Nmeipiaiie The material appears to be a trap rock of some ind. tinting under which the light grey decomposed rock is visible. 1 am unable to state its nature without seriously injuring the sides commence cl to d, where they have their maximum development, and extend fully three quarters of the total length of the stone, tape radually outwards. A A-lu-shih. ‘ Figure 5. Small cylindrical pounder or pestle. The spect men bears an excellent polish, though somewhat pecked 10 places by weathering. The ends are well flattened. Dimen- i Vol. X, No. 7.] Stone Implements from Yiinnan. 267 [NV.S.] sions, 8 x4x3 cms. The stone is not perfectly cylindrical and the Santer ye: may have been intentional for convenience in ho Fig 6. Large stone hammer, with rounded butt, and broad, ‘flattened cutting-edge. This specimen appears to Ww are bevelled off. Dimensions, total Lene £16 Gun ems., breadth 5°5 cms, , greatest width across flattened cutting edge—I ‘5 cms. The hammer is fashioned from a coarse diorite and has been excellently polished. Purchased in Lao-niu-kai. igure 7. Stone hammer, of the same general type as figure 6 with the following minor differences. An oval instead of a cylindrical section, and more symmetry in the angles be- tween the faces and the flattened edge. The latter is worn and broken. The sloping of the Sapte to the edge commences well polished. Dimensions, length—11°5 cms., width across edge—6 ems., shorter axis of oval section—4°5cms. Purchased in Lao-niu-kai Figure 8. Stone hammer, very similar to figure 7. The section is still more ue and the sides have more tendency to taper to the rounded butt. The specimen is damaged near the butt and the e, though sufficient of the latter remains to show that it was intentionally flattened as in the previous two examples. Fashioned from a basaltic rock and _ polished. Dimensions, length—12°5 cms., longer axis of oval—6 cms., shorter axis—4-5 cms. Purchased in Mi-chih igure 9. This broken hammer from Mi-chih exhibits a more strongly arched edge, sharper than that in any of the preceding examples. - is ovoid in section. The butt is entirely missing. Dimensions, breadth across s top of snl oe length of short axis apr sc bi oval—5 cms. Materi arse dolerite ? Fi igure 10. In this form we have a iver from the cylindrical or slightly ovoid stone hammers with round butts, flattened edges and more or less parallel pee to the commoner, polished stone, axe-like celts, with smaller, more pointed butts, sharper edges and more tapering sides, the type in fact which is so prevalent in Indian Neolithic finds. 1 Jade, a study in Chinese Archaeology and Religion by Berthold Laufer. _— Col. Mus., Pub. 154, Anthrop. Ser., Vol. X, Chicago, 1912, Pp. 40, plate 268 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914. rock and was obtained in Shun-ning Fu. Figure 11. A celt in which the peculiar characters of the one shown in Figure 10 are still more pronounced. The edge is sharp and forms the same kind of angles with thefaces The sides are more tapering and the general outline more triangular. The butt is small and rounded. General section, a well deve- loped oval. Dimensions, length—1I-5 cms., greatest breadth —6 cms., least breadth 3-3 cms., shortest axis of oval section at centre of specimen, i.e. thickness—3-5cms. A polished sur- face pecked by weathering. Material basaltic. Purchased in Mi-chih. Figure 12. In this specimen the same characters are surface is now indented and pecked b weathering. The material appears to be doleritic. Dimensions, greatest length —Il2 ems., greatest breadth—6 cms., greatest thickness—3'5 ems Obtained in Mi-chih. sions, length—13 cms., breadth across the edge—5'5 cms. r- in Mien-ning Ting. Figure 14. This and the following specimen are the most rritories in Indo-China.! They recall vividly the bronze hoes found both in that country and in Yiinnan,” and they o ! Mission Pavie, Indo-China, Vol. III (Anthropologie), 1904, PP- 27-38, pl. vi. . ‘ * I hope to describe a series of bronze implements from Yiinnan ir this Journal, shortly. Vol. X, No. 7.] Stone Implements from Yiinnan. 269 [N.8.] exhibit a distinct family resemblance with the spade or shoul- dered celt of the Mon-Hkmer country in Burma, Indo-China and peeia for several years, they are both badly damaged, though in both cases the beautifully polished surface still partially remains. The rock used in the manufacture of this the larger specimen is @ greyish quartz porphyry. Its dimensions are, greatest length—15-5 cms., greatest breadth across the edge—10°5 cms.., average diameter of stock—5°3 cms. Figur Fashioned from a brownish volcanic rock. Dimensions greatest length—1l0 cms., greatest breadth, across edge—/ cms., average diameter of stock—3°3 cms The latter measurement is taken before the stock commences to swell out to form the shoulders. The questions which present themselves to my mind are, have we here a prototype o: the rounded butt shows signs of much use. The stone is a fine grained quartzite and bears a high polish. Dimensions, length —llcms., breadth—5 cms., thickness—3 ems. Purchased in Shib-tien. cms., — 25-3 cms., thickness—-75 cms. Made from an indurated Slate and finely polished. Locality, Shih-tien. Figure 18. Rectangular chisel, with short well-polished blade, formed almost entirely from the front face. The sides are flat and the angles which they make with the faces are only slightly bevelled. Considerable fracturing has en place near the edg s and butt, which appears to have resulted om the fissile nature of the material, a hard, dark greyish- blue, siliceous slate. Dimensions, length—9 cms., breadth—4 1 Mission Pavie, Vol. IIT, Anthropologie. Loe. cit., pp. 10-27, pl. i. 270 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1914. ems., thickness—l cm. The blade is slightly convex. Pur- chased in Shih-tien. Figure 19. Chisel, formed by obliquely grinding away one end of an elongated pebble of siliceous slate. On the convex back surface there is a scratched outline which bears a remark- Massie collection. Dimensions, length—85 cms., breadth across edge—3 cms., thickness—1°5 cms. Purchased in Shun- ning Fu. Figure 20. Broad chisel with sloping sides, the edge is formed by bevelling off the front face and is only slightly curved. The flat sides, slightly bevelled off where they meet the faces, slope towards an irregular butt. Both faces are very slightly convex. Material, a brownish, siliceous slate with a ish. Dimensions, length—8 cms., breadth across ems., across butt—4 cms., thickness—2 cms. Pur- hih-ti Figure 21. This example so closely approximates figure 20 that a separate descriptionis unnecessiry. The only note worthy differen :e is found in the sharp edge made by the side with the back and front faces, near one corner of the edge. Material, a drab, siliceous slate; somewhat broken. Dimen- sions, length—8 cms., breadth across the edge—5 cms , across the broken butt—4 cms., thickness—1°5 cms. Purchased in Shih-tien. Figure 22. Chisel celt with rounded sloping sides meeting in a straight butt. The portion of the sharp edge which re- mains is straight. Material, a fine-grained basalt. Dimensions, length —95 cms., breadth across edge—5 cms., across butt —3-5 ems. The slight conchoidal fractures which this spect- men bears are attributed not to accidents after its manufac- ture but to the pecking which preceded the polishing of the stone. Locality, Wa-tou-tien. : Figure 23. This polished stone chisel represents a type 1? which both back and front faces are ground down to produce stone with a high polish. Purchased in Shih-tien. Dimensions. length—6-5 cms., breadth across blade—4 ems., across butt —3, thickness 1-5. : Figure 24. Another example of the same type with a still broader blade e of the sides of this specimen appears to be @ natural joint plane. The back face is slightly convex: Vol. 74 No. 7.] Stone Implements jrom Yiinnan. 271 N.S. Material, dark, indurated, siliceous slate. Purchased in Shih- tien. Dimensions, length—5-5 cms., breadth across blade—3°5 cms., Cross butt—2°5 cms., thickness—1°5 cms. e 25. A polished stone nevi with the same type of Stas eee lanie well marked. The sharp edge has been ground down and replaced by a flat surface. The flat sides are bevelled off to meet the back and front faces which in this Heohdth across blade—3 oms., across butt—2°5 ems., thickness near blade—1°3 cms., near butt— 9 cms. Purchased i in Yung- chang Fu. ee 26, 27 and 28. Chisels of the same general type. The photographs show their natural sizes. They are made of the usual kinds of rocks and come from Yung-chang Fu, Shib- tien and Shun-ning Fu respectively. Figure 29. A broken rectangular chisel in which both faces partake equaily in the formation of the blade. Locality Wa-tou-tien. Photographed in natural size. Figure 30. Thick rectangular chisel, with convex back, i hg to both edge and butt. Sharp angen edge. Mate- tial, sil.ceous slate. Locality Mi-ti. Natura igure 31. Thick chisel with flat sides pv ve to a flat butt. Material, fog aca siliceous slate. Locality Yung-chang Fu. Natural siz Figure 32. Lae. thick chisel with slightly convex sides bevelled to meet the faces, except along the steeply sloping edge. Flat butt. Material, brownish-grey, fine-grain ained quart- Locality, Shun-ning Fu. Dimensions length—7 cms. breadth across brig ae cms., across butt—3-2 cms., thickness at top of edge 2°2, at butt somewhat t less Figure 33. Polished chisel celt with rounded hatchet edge and butt. The convex faces almost meet in a slightly flattened side. Material, brown, aeonic tinted basalt. Locality, Shun-ning Fu. Dimensions, length—10 cms., breadth across top of euge—5°5 cms. , thickne ss across centre of specimen— red. i 34. Broken celt, similar figure 33, though Snes thinner. Locality Witten tan: Bee ions, length —+ 6-5 cms., breadth—5 cms., thickness—1°5. she sides do not taper as rapidly as those of the previous specim Figure Very weathered celt of the mene general type. Locality, Western Yiinnan (exact locality lost). Mate- tial, shale. Dimensions, length— +8, breadth across edge 4°5 cms., thickness—2 cms. gure 36. Broken celt with crescentic edge, flattened vag slightly tapering to a broken butt and very slightly con- aces. Dimensions, length — + 7°5 cms., breadth across 272 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914. edge—6 cms., across top—4'3cms., thickness—2°5 cms. Mate- rial, weathered porphyrite, originally polished. Locality, Wa- tou-tien. Figure 37. Large polished celt with flat sides bevelled truncated butt. The e is m ken. Material hard, laminated, siliceous limestone?. Locality, Wa-tou-tien. Di- mensions, — ems., breadth across edge— specimen. Locality, Wa-tou-tien. Dimensions, length—10 ems., breadth across top of edge—5 cms., near butt—3°5 cms., thickness—1°3 cms. igure 39. Small polished celt, with straight edge meet- ing flat sides in sharp corners. The latter are bevelled to meet the slightly convex faces waich terminate n a crescentic butt. Material, indurated slate. Locality Shih-tien. Dimensions, length—5 cms., breadth across edge—4 cms., across butt—3 ems., thickness—1°5 cms. Figure 40. Hatchet edged celt in polished grey and brown jadeite. This specimen is of beautiful design and finish. The sides are flat and barely rounded off to meet the faces, which are convex. The butt and sides form one conti- nuous uninterrupted band of equal width, which terminates In sharp angles with each end of the crescentic blade. The latter bears no sign of use though it is slightly injured in one ace. Locality, Mien-ning Ting. Dimensions, length—*‘5 ems., breadth across top of blade—5°5 cms., thickness across centre of specimen—2 cms. icure +1. Polished hatchet celt in streaked black and across centre of collars ~2°5 cms. Figure 42. Broken celt used as a polishing and sharpen ing stone. The celt itself is of the elongated chisel variety with thick, flat and very slightly tapering sides. Both edge and butt have been completely broken away. Both faces bear hollows and grooves due to polishing or sharpening oper tions. Locality Wa-tou-tien. Material, slate. Dimensions, Vol. X, No. 7.]. Stone Implements from Yiinnan. 273 [V.S.] length— + ny breadth at bottom—2°5 ems., at top—3°5 cms., thickness — THE RELATION OF THESE TO OTHER CHINESE FINDs. The list of stone implements hitherto discovered in China is a small one, which may be briefly summarised— 1. Anderson’s specimens . Colborne Baber iu 1886 reported the discovery of polished axe-heads and chisels from stone coffins in ng- ing, Ssu-ch’ uan. n 1884 J. Edkins described a stone hatchet found by Williams in a grave mound near Yu-Chou, 110 miles west of Pe nib ~ Descriptions of two flint arrow heads found by Armand David in Mongolia were published in 1886. Giglioli has published an account of a stone imple- ment found in 1896 by Coltelli near Yen-an Fu, in Shensi nthe Bishop collection there are a few jade imple- ments whieh Bushell has ote ed. 7. My own first collectio 8. Laufer has collected roe described 15 jade implements from Sin-ngan Fu in Shensi, where they were obtained from ancient graves of the Chou dynasty (1122 B c.-249 B.c), and has also described maton s collection of 12 siphios finds from Tsing-chou Fu in Shantung. rnew dealer show the intermingling of two groups, one containing forms similar to those from Shan-tung in N orth China, and the other very like certain Todi Oahiine ienpilepiantts: It is practically certain that they were produced rather by an aboriginal non-Chinese race than by rom a study of the available avidedale Laufer! has sum- marised our present knowledge of the Chinese stone culture, and as our collections help to prove his conclusions still further e. 1. ‘All stone implements so far found in China are polished, and they therefore belong to that class which so far as prehistoric India, Egypt or Europe are concerned, is ithic. he finds can be divided into two groups. Those from the atlas and those from graves. The former are rougher and more primitive than the latter, which are often of perfect design and exquisite finish. Whether there is any chrono- logical difference between them is still an open ques stion. 3. The prevailing types so far — are chisels, Spongnge and hammer-shaped axes and mattocks. No stone shud. eet astee or traces of 1 Loe. cit., pp. 54-55. 274 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914.] an extensive industry in stone, carried on by, and for the bene- fit of. a large local population, have been found. It is there- fore not justifiable in the present stage of knowledge to speak of a stone age for China or still less of a stone age of the Chinese. 5. The burial of jade implements was much practised during the historical period of the Chou dynasty (1122 B.o- 249 B.c.) and continued down to the spoch of the two Han dynas- ties (206 B.c.-a.D. 221), but this only shows that in those early days a pronounced symbolical cult had gathered around ~ these objects, which were probably then regarded as relics of a forgotten past. ing its end, and being gradually replaced by iron. PNP OPO I ODI LI STONE IMI dD i ] a EMENTS FROM YUNNAN. (Cakutts Photo: ol Journ, As. Soc. Beng., Vol. X, 1914. PLATE AY. 6 8 STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM YU NNAN, “hotos by J.C. B, | Endrewed t Pronted ty| [Cakutte Photoryp Ca} Journ, As. Soc. Beng., V — i — a, O14, PLATE XXVII. | Engraved & Pretec by| [Gokvece Piet ot my 4 Journ. As. Soc. Beng., Vol. X, 1914. PLATE XXVIII STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM YUNNAN, Photos by J, C. B, Journ. As. Soc. Beng, Vol. X, 1914. PLATE XXX STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM YUNNAN, Photos by J. C. B. &Proted Photot vA 30. Note on the Application of the Principle of Isostatic Compensation to the Conditions prevailing beneath the Indo-Gangetic Alluvium, By H. H. Haypegn, C.I.E., D.Sc. The appearance last year of a paper by Colonel S. G. Burrard on the ‘‘ Origin of the Himalaya’’ has drawn a considerable amount of attention to a theory put forward by him to the that there is at present no valid reason for discarding the is a perfectly normal phenomenon, being merely a wedge-shaped ; i ; the Peninsular rock-mass to perhaps 20,000 feet at the moun- tain foot. Colonel Lenox-Conyngham’s note reached me a few days more within reach of libraries. This, however, I cannot do, in consequence of the imputation conveyed in the third paragraph of the note, to the effect thatin acknowledging my indebtedness to the Trigonometrical Survey, I had given cause for the inference that my results were accepted by that office. I need hardly remark that nothing was further from my intention; attribute to my remarks any such designs as that implied, or would mistake them for more than the usual acknowledgment demanded by scientific etiquette. The hypothesis usually accepted with regard to the nature of the Indo-Gangetic depression was not discussed by Colonel 1 Records of the Survey of India, Vol. V. 276 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914. Burrard in his paper, but was tacitly dismissed in favour of his new theory of a deep rift, a theory based on the fact that certain anomalies had been observed in the deflection of the plumb-line and in the attraction of gravity, which could not be accounted for on the assumption that isostatic compensation occurred at a depth of 113°7 kilometres everywhere beneath India and the Himalaya, while the postulated rift was regarded as capable of producing these anomalies. e summary rejection of the generally accepted hypo- thesis without any attempt to discuss or combat the results dant hypothesis of isostatic compensation on the mere ground that the assumption of its occurrence at a depth of 113°7 km. beneath India failed to explain observed geodetic anomalies was not justifiable and savoured of that commonest of all of the theory of isostasy generally and as resting on no ‘‘ con- the earth’s erust.’’ With regard to the first criticism, I can only say that my conception of the theory of isostasy is based on the original idea as enunciated by its author, Dutton, and that any difference in our respective points of view may be due to the Vol. X, No. 7.] Isostatic Compensation in India. 277 [V.8.] to the distribution of those materials are concerned, they certainly appear to differ from Colonel Lenox- Conyngham’ 8, bu pe real issue, which is the ‘probability or otherwise of the presence of an immense rift along the foot of the Himalaya. ever, that my views are based partly on m at any rate would have the temerity to dogmatize with regard to the exact distribution of matter below the surface and stigmatize as impossible the suggestion of the comibte occur- rence of conditions other than those that they themselves believe to exist. For myself, I must confess that I have not the faculty of being able, undeterred by the extreme paucity of the information availa to marshall the component parts of the earth with the Seticclous precision of a drill-sergeant. In making the suggestion that the results of my calculations Sieben the possibility of isostatic compensation occurring at ne depth under India and at another under the United States, tion. I hold no brief for the ae of isostasy and am by no means Scena that it will prove, in its more restricted aspect at any rate, to be the panacea for all geodetic ills, but I endeavoured to plead, and do plead still, that it is premature to reject on a partial a of the evidence for and prea it, while it is still m ag gee = reject the accepted hypothesis as to the se of the Indo-Gangetic depression with no —— of the evidence at ‘all If isostasy is appears to pulse it must fail even for the tates, e7] 1s megs S me Fh 4 E a Bs % Cad 5 et o @ a. an _cot be a! oe ° 5 Be matter at considerable eae beneath the surface is so sma that it would require no little hardihood to say what conditions are or are not possible. What oue generation of scientific enquirers has declared to be impossible has become to the next a household truth. To condemn an hypothesis supported by : long series of careful investigations parely ause it does no fall in with certain views of our own, based on analogy ca supported by no direct evidence, is to i gtaaed the experience of past generations; and the anaes recent instance of 278 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (July, 1914. the discovery of the properties of the radio-active minerals and Himalaya should lead us to expect some difference in their respective conditions of equilibrium. Colonel Lenox-Conyngham rightly points out that a table by means of which I attempted to compare the effects of isostatic compensation in adjacent areas at different depths is of no real significance. He omits to mention, however, that we had some considerable correspondence on this as well as on most of the other points with which he deals, and that I agreed with him that the table in question, as it stood, some of the data were derived from the published work of Colo- nel Lenox-Conyngham himself, but lest I should be suspected of a design to imply that he agrees with the results observed, I hasten to add that I have no reason to suppose that he does his Permission ; I must plead as my excuse the improbability of my able to receive answers to correspondence during the next five months . Vol. X, No. 7.] Isostatic Compensation in India. 279 [V.S.] The probability of the approximate correctness of the results arrived at by me with regard to the form and depth of the Indo-Gangetic depression has recently been most strikingly confirmed by Mr. R. D. Oldham, who had taken up indepen- dently an investigation into the effect on the plumb-line of a depression of the above type filled with alluvium ; in a paper pointed out that such a phenomenon 1s capable of producing the observed anomalies. The rift postulated by Colonel Burrard thus becomes superfluous. With reference to Colonel Lenox-Conyngham’s last criticism on my paper, namely that in dealing with the deflections on the basis of isostatic compensation occurring at a variety of depths, I ought not to have employed the algebraic sums o the residuals in the respective groups, but the sums of their squares, it ought not to be necessary for me to repeat the reason for the course that I adopted, since it was stated clearly Crosthwait. The sole object that I had in view, so far as mv calculations were concerned, was to ascertain how the effects of isostatic compensation occurring at depths other than 113-7 km. would compare with those given by Major Crosthwait for that particular depth. Such comparison would not have been legitimate if I had deduced my results by a method different from that employed by him. Even apart from this, the fact that the algebraic sum had been employed in the most recent publication on the subject issued by a body of geodetic experts would seem to show that it had been deliberately employed as being the most suitable method and therefore worthy of adop- tion by others dealing with the same subject. Colone Lenox- Conyngham’s endeavour to justify its use in that particular instance does not appear to me to be very convincing, since way. In another region out of 17 figures two have no sign at all, while of the remaining fifteen 20 per cent have one sign and 80 per cent the other. In yet another region the 280 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [July, 1914.) corresponding figures are respectively 66°6 and 333 per cent. In certain cases no doubt all the figures have the same sign, but I think—I cannot confirm this, as I have not the paper with me—that similar groups will be found among my figures. But in neither case—tbat of Major Crosthwait’s results or that mine—would my temperament be sufficiently sanguine to allow to me to say, as Colonel Lenox-Conyngham does of the ees that ‘‘ there was a very strong tendency to persistence of sign.’’ In my discussion of the ‘rift hypothesis,’ I purposely avoided confusing the issue by any detailed consideration accounting for the various geodetic anomalies. The new bypo- by the postulation of a suitable crack: unfortunately, it is unsupported by other evidence and until the accepted hypo- the same time 1 Burrard’s interesting application of his idea to tectonic processes cannot fail to attract attention and will no doubt receive careful consideration is suggestion of investigation to the extent re to remove it from the realm of conjecture. Subterranean cracks are of course fami liar phenomena ; those that would s of sufficient importance 31. Sirhind or Sehrind. By H. BeveRipGe. The Indian Gazetteer says, xxiii, 20, that the spelling Sirhind is modern and due to a fanciful derivation. But Khafi Khan I, 402, Bib. Ind. ed. , says that Sirhind is the old name and that Shah Jahan, early i in his reign, changed it to santa He adds that the style Sirhind was applicable in the of Ghaznavi princes because their kingdom extended as 2 as Sirhind, or the Head of India, but ceased to be appropriate when the Indian Empire included Afghanistan afi Khan can hardly have been mistaken , and he supported by the fact that in the earlier Persian histories, such the Tabagat Nasiri, the Akbarnama, and sy Persian tra fition of Babur’s Memoir s, the name is commonly ound Sirhind. The Badshahnama of ‘Abdul Hamid j is a remarkable instance. In the first volume, Bib. Ind. ed. 65, in recounting the events of Humayun’s reign, the word is twice written Sirhind, put in the second volume, which contains Shah Jehan’s reign, itisSahrind. See the Indices ; see also the quotation from neral Cunningham in Jarrett’s translation of the Ayin Akbari II, 231. Blochmann also seems to regard Sarhind or Sirhind the old Hindi name, and that this was why Shah Jehan adopted it, but it does not seem correct to say that Sirhind is modern and of a fanciful derivation. I might add that the alteration might be found useful as a means of tracing the ages of undated MSS. Thus if we find Sahrind written in a Persian S. it cannot be older than Shah Jahan’s reign. Thus it MS., viz. 257, h : ave, however to Ricemsctat that at p. 289 of Ilminsky, near the as it is written Sahrind, just as in the Haidarabadi, p. 2255. The latter invariably has Sahrind (see Index II), whereas Ilminsky oscillates between Sirhind and Sahrind. NOTE. On reflection, it seems to me doubtful that Shah Jahan would revive a Hindu name for the city of Sirhind. It is also doubtful if there ever was a Hindu city called Sahrind or 282 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1914.] Is it not more probable that the change was like that which converted Pirishpira into Peshawar? Sihra means a Tht ee ete 32, The Date of the Death of Shah Beg Arghiin, the ruler of Sind. By H. Beveripes. t is curious that there should be any doubt about the exact date of Shah Beg’s death for he was a distinguished man, well-known part of Sind and so late as the first quarter of the sixteenth century. But there is a conflict, and one that extends to years, and not to days and months, for Ferishta and Erskine say he died in 1524 ber A.H.), whereas the local historians, and Elliot (vol. I, Appendix 502), and Aitken in the new Gazetteer of Sind, hold that he died in 1522 (928 4.x.) n looking into the sources we find that the earliest authority for the date 1524 is Nizimu-d-din Ahmad in his Tabaqat Akbari. Near the end of his history he has a chapter — on Sind, and at p. 637 of the Newal Kishore edition he gives ay date of the death as 930. He does not mention where t took place. His history was completed in 1594 (1003 a.n.), Elliot V, 183, and is thus a few years earlier than the work of Mir M‘asiim Bhakhari, the local bistcaeti of Sind, which was completed in 1600. But Mir M‘asum had long meditated his history, and had collected materials for it for several years, though he only finished it in his old age. He was Nizamu-d- ee contemporary and assisted him in writing his history. the Maasiru-l-Omara which speaks, vol. III, 327, of the wmodation of the two men. Niz&amu-d-din Ahmad also mentions in his preface the Tarikh Sind as one of his sources, and this can hardly be any other book than M‘astim’s. It follows that as regards date of information M‘asim is as good an authority as Nizamu-d-din, and he had a far better opportunity of knowing the truth, for his forefathers had been for some ~~ rations in Qan dahar , and he himself was born and bred i Bhakkar. He is also far more circumstantial than Wigkinn-d. din for he gives Shah Beg’s last words, and he tells us where © he died, and gives — And and the month as well as the year, and adds a chrono Ferishta, it is bora gives 930 a.H. as the date, but his statement adds nothing to the authority of Nizamu-d-din for merely copies him, and is equally vague about the place and date of the death. He is also a later writer than M‘asiim. evidences, we may rest assured that the chronogram is correct, and that Shah Beg Arghiin, the conqueror of Sind, died at 284 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1914. Tarkhannama as giving the date of 926 whereas MSS. show, and Elliot himself tells us at p. 312 of the same volume, that its being a comparatively modern work, but by its giving the impossible date of 924.1 It is remarked by Elliot that the author of the Tuhfta-l-kiram gives satisfactory reasons why the statements of the Tarikh Tahiri should not be accepted. On referring to the Tuhfat I find that the author says that the Tarikh Tahiri in one place says that Shah Beg Babur had taken Qandahar from Shah Beg, and the latter had taken Shal and Sibii; how in so short a time could Shah Beg go back to Qandahar?’’ To Elliot’s authority may be added _ ~ne only real ground for doubting the date 928 is one which is not taken by Erskine, and is the circumstance that _Khwandamir is, no doubt, a valuable writer, and he is Shah Beg’s contemporary, but his subject was not Afghanis- tan, but Persia, and Shah Ism‘ail. He does not give details of the sieges of Qandahar, and does not even mention the fact that Shah Beg sent the keys of Qandahar to Babur in 923 by 8 (Khwandamir’s) grandson Ghiasu-d-din. If he ind thought that Shah Beg was in Qandahar in 928, he may have * It also gives the chronogram Khar&bi Sind for the conquest of Sind. garb = quest o Shah Beg 927, and all the other authorities say that the conqueror was Vol. X, No. 8.] The Date of Shah Beg Arghin’s Death. 285 [V.S.] been mistaken. That he was there, is exceedingly manga os) he had given up the keys and said farewell to the place in and in 926 and 927 he was at Tatta in Southern Sind 1 au long way fale Qandahar. He may very x wel have encouraged the Qandaharis to resist Babur, without being there himself. As regards the Qandahar inscription which says that the place was taken on 13 Shawwal 928, it has to be stated that this differs from Kh ’s account which makes Babur report the capture e earlier in the year. Erskine considers M‘asim’s chronology as confused, and Malet’s translation makes Shah Hasan eae ah Beg’s son) be present in Qandahar in 921, whereas he seems to have been with Babur at that time. But the Paral original places Shah Hasan’s presence at Qandahar in 922, and one . of the Tarkhannama says, Shah Hasan was two or three years with Babur. I do not find M‘asiim’s dates confusing. He gives them year by year from 9!3 when Babur first conquered Qanda- har, and 1 do not think that they conflict with Babur’s Memoirs. He mentions how the Arghtins recovered possession of Qandahar, and how Babur tried for successive years to recover it. In 922 the Arghins were hard pressed, though Mehtar Sambhal contrived to get supplies of food into the citadel. In 923 Shah Beg went to Shah and Sibii, and endured great privations there for two years. Then he went further south and fought two battles with the Jam and his son. 8 Payanda Moghul was put in charge of Bhakkar by Shah Beg, and the latter went on to take Gujarat, but died on the way at Agham in the Hyderabad district. There is not a word in any 7 historian about his going back to Qandahar in 927 or 928. may be remarked here that ehodan Abul Fazl puts the con- ba of Sind (by Shah Beg) into 929, Ferishta agreeing with the local authorities, and the chronogram Kharabi Sind, puts it into 927. Ee te Ol ae 33. The Action of Nitric Oxide on Metallic Peroxides suspended in Water. Part I By Barun Cuanpra Dutt and Surya Narayan SEN, Scottish Churches College Laboratory. [Read at the First Indian Science Congress on January 15, 1914.] as able to repeat the experiment with lead dioxide before study- ing the action of the gas on other peroxides. he nitric oxide was prepared by dropping a solution of sodium nitrite into a saturated solution of ferrous sulphate in strong hydrochloric acid. It was stored up in gas-holders, and before being allowed to come in contact with the mixture of lead peroxide and water it was washed thoroughly by bub- bling through caustic soda solution contained in two wash bottles. A small quantity of lead dioxide with about 50 cc. of water was introduced into a flask which was placed in connec- tion with a three way stop-cock. Of the two free-ends of the stop-cock one was connected with a hydrogen generator and side. The air in the flask was first displaced by a slow stream of hydrogen solved air. After cooling to the ordinary temperature (29°-30°) of the laboratory in a current of hydrogen nitric oxide was bubbled through the mixture of lead peroxide and water for several minutes with constant shaking. The whole of the 288 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [August, 1914. lead compound was not allowed to react with the gas, and after displacing the nitric oxide by means of a current hydrogen the contents of the flask were vigorously shaken to facilitate the oxidation of the dissolved nitric oxide by the lead peroxide left over. The cork closing the mouth ‘of the flask was then removed and the liquid filtered, when a pale yellow solution was obtained. This answered to the metaphenylene diamine test for nitrites and gave a white precipitate of lead sulphate 3NH,NO, = NH,NO, +2NO + 2NH, + H,0. They were led to this conclusion by the result arrived at by Lord Rayleigh and Prof. Ramsay while endeavouring to i lum chloride and potassium nitrite. It was pointed out that the crude gas from this source always has an ammoniacal smell. potassium nitrite—so that we are not justified in assuming without experimental proof, that the ammonia in the above oO cated above, is inconclusive. We, accordingly, proceeded to study the action of heat on a solution of ammonium nitrite. in excess. Th by filtration and the clear solution of ammonium nitrite boiled ng as it gave a yellow colouration with a solution of meta- phenylene diamine hydro-chloride in dilute hydrochloric acid. On now applying the brucine test for nitric acid no red coloura- tion was obtained. It, therefore, follows that by the action Vol. X, No. 8.] Action of Nitric Oxide on Metallic Perowides. 289 [V.S.} passing nitric oxide through water containing lead peroxide measuring cubic centimetres of this solution haken with concentrated sulphuric acid over mercury in a Crum mitrometer g 30 cc. of nitric oxide measured over vapour at 30°50 C = 32463 mm.). Ten cubic centimetres of the solation similarly treated gave 6:8 cc. of nitric oxide. For the estimation of the weight of nitritic nitrogen present, the Rupp method was employed. Twenty-five cubic centimetres of N/10 potassium permanganate solution were added to 10cc. of the diluted liquid and a few crystals of sodium carbonate dissolved in the mixture. The solution was warmed on the water bath for fifteen minutes, cooled, acidified with ; u (24°6-20°6) cc. or 404 cc. 1 cc, of N/10 KMn 0,=-00345 Na NO,. Consequently the weight of nitritic nitrogen present =°0028 gram. It will be seen that this is less than -0036 gram., the total weight of nitrogen contained in 10 cc. of the diluted liquid by -0008 gram. 6. We must now proceed to explain how lead nitrite and lead nitrate are formed by the action of nitric oxide on a mixture of lead peroxide and water. The former is evidently obtained according to the equation :— PbO, + 2NO=Pb(NO,), dilute acids without evolution of nitrous fumes and the clear solution gives a white precipitate with 290 = Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. {August, 1914. dilute sulphuric acid, but no colour reaction with Griess’s re- agen t, therefore, appears that during the formation of lead nitrite and lead nitrate a part of the peroxide is reduced to lead monoxide. - If a little of the yellow solution obtained by the action of nitric oxide on lead dioxide in presence of water is shaken Barium PEROXIDE. The apparatus used was the same as that employed in the case of lead dioxide. On filtering the liquid in the flask after passing nitric oxide through it a colourless solution was obtain This answered to the metaphenylene diamine test for nitrites and gave a white precipitate of barium sulphate with dilute sulphuric acid. On exposure to air it became turbid that when nitric oxide is passed into water containing barium peroxide only a nitrite is formed. BaO, + 2NO=Ba(NO,).. ing with concentrated sulphuric acid over mercury in a Cr Nitrometer, 5°5 cc. of nitric oxide, measured over water at This conclusion was confirmed in the following manner :— Ww u @ Phate solution required was 22-lec. This was evidently due to the oxidation of a part of the lead nitrite into lead nitrate by the peroxide. Vol. X,No.8.] Action of Niiric Oxide on Metallic Peroxides, 291 [V.S.] 30°5°c and 765 mm. pressure (tension of aqueous vapour at 30°5c = 32°46 mm.). It will be seen, therefore, that the total weight of nitrogen present =-003 gram. nearly. For the estimation of the weight of nitritic nitrogen pre- sent the same method was employed as in the case of lead per- oxide en cubic centimetres of the solution of barium nitrite, 10 cc. of the diluted liquid were titrated with N/10 Na, 8, 0. 34. Notes on the Fat of Garcinia indica, the so-called kokam butter. By Harotp H. Mann and N. V. KAnitKar. of Western India, obtained, as is well known, from the seeds of Garcinia indica. Full details with regard to this tree and the method of extraction of the oil will be found in Watt’s Dictionary of the gurla) of the Ratnagiri district, Thirty-two villages in the for- mer taluka and at least i ted in the laboratory and the other purchased in the bazaar. These gave the following constants, which we place side by side with those given by Hooper for the sample (from the Indian Museum) which he examined : — Mann & KANITEKAR. Sample pre- | Sample Hooper. paredin | boughtin — laboratory. —s bazaar. Specific Gravity at 50°C. we 896 ‘826 “910 Melting point es cs 41°C °C | 43°C Acid value ih oe 4:9 24°8 | 413 Saponification value ic ae 194 | 1915 Iodine Value ma . 33-2 353 | 250 Reichert Meissl value si , , 98 Percentage of fatty acids me 95:1 | 94:2 | . 93°56 1 The Fats of Garcinia species by David Hooper. Journal, Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol. I1I, page 257 (1907). 2 Vol. III. 294 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (August, 1914] There is little difference in the figures except with regard to the acidity, and this is obviously due to the fat turning rancid on keeping. Our freshly extracted sample was hardly acid at all, and the fresh product we rari in the bazaar was much less acid than Ho ooper’s museum sample. We separated the non-volatile fatty Rem and these gave the following constants :— Iodine value veiceen Mean Molecular weight .. 278 Our results confirm those reached “4 Heise | (1897) and et “The been denied snag Watt’s nit Mack but from the high saponi- fication value, there was reason to suppose that volatile or soluble fatty Lads were really present. On saponifying and distilling with forty per cent sulphuric acid in a current of steam, a quantity of acid was obtained in the distillate equivalent to 084 per cent of acetic aba: On standing, this distillate separa- a ems an oily layer in very small quantity, probably Lauric d (vide Heise, loc. cit.), and a watery layer amo a noah rahi quantity of the soluble fatty acids. These proved to be free from butyric acid,—and on examination by “Das laux’s frabiGbint distillation metho d, the proportion distilling with each fraction is shown in the following table :— Lower Volatile Fatty Acids. | Figures eee for a maistate ve ot Figures actually equal quantities of Acetic an Propionic Acids. rs) is) lst fraction bo. ey st & 2nd ” 18-4 19°6 st to 3rd 53 27-8 99°3 st to 4th 39°5 39°1 st to 5th PP 48°1 48°8 st to 6th ae 56-5 58°6 st to 7th Fe 65-1 68°4 st to 8th a3 74-9 78°4 to 5 86-9 88-7 ist to 10th _,, 100-0 100°0 The volatile and soluble fatty acids in kokam butter are therefore a mixture of acetic and propionic acid in approxi mately equal proportions | Arbeiten aus dem Kais. Gesundheitsamte, Vol. 13, part 2 (1897). 35. A [Comparative Study of the Marriage Customs of the Cochin Castes. By L. K. Anantua Krisuna Iyer. [Read at the First Indian Science Congress, January 17th, 1914.] In encyclopedical and philosophical works, several differ- ent definitions of the word ‘ marriage’ are met with, and most , oured with the name of marriage.’ arriage and Celibacy.—So indispensable does marriage seem to man, that a person who does not marry is looked upon with contempt or is at any rate disdained. Among the happiness in the next world depends upon his having a con- tinuous line of male descendants whose duty it is to make the periodical offerings for the peace of his soul.‘ Hence it is that marriage has become a religious duty, the twelfth samskara incumbent upon all.? Until he finds a wife, a man is only half of a whole; and among the Hindus of the present day, a celi- bate is considered to be a useless member of the society ; ‘ and is looked upon as beyond the pale of nature,’ and all women without exception are boun rry. Maho consider marriage a duty both for man and woman. declared to be an institution ordained for the protection of society, and in order that human beings may guard themselves from foulness and unchastity.* Among the Hebrews also celi- bacy is unheard of, and marriage is, as amon ked u & 8 Ibid. ii, verse 66. + Islam by Ameer Ali Syed, page 29. 296 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. man. The desire for offspring, particularly sons, had its root in the religious belief, and is the outcome of the idea that the spirit of the dead would be made happy by homage received at the hands of the male descendants.! t must be noted that the number of celibates in all Hindu castes is very small; and this is a marked contrast to the in- creasing number of them, in European and other countries, r t dings take place after a good harvest, and very few in the absence of it. In the higher castes marriages are compulsory before girls come of age. Liberty of Choice.—In all the castes of the State from the Nambuthiri Brahmans down to the Pulayans, the liberty of choice in matrimonial alliance is seldom allowed to the con- prejudice of the infant. Any act of the father prejudicial to the rights of the minor is considered illegal, and entitles the judge to prevent the completion of such an act or, if com- pleted, to annul it.* Prohibition of Marriage between Kindred.—As a rule, the selection of persons for marriage is guided mainly by two rules: first, that they must be outside the family; secondly, that pi ae Snr i ! Cochin Tribes and Castes, vol. ii, pages 407-408. 2 The History of Human Marriage, ch. x, pages 225-231. ; Bs & * Ibid., page 235. Maine, Early Law and Custom’, page 224, Vol. X, No. 9.] Marriage Customs of the Cochin Castes. 297 [NV.S.j they must be inside the caste. According to the Hindu Sias- tras, persons who are related as Sa@pindas'! cannot marry. allowed.: Among the Nambuthiri Brahmans, the members of a ianlete in vogue, and ee among the us i sabivis sions of the non-vedic community is st ey Among the restrictions prevail Among the latter, a young man y fee marry the daughter of his maternal uncle or paternal au with the hair or grain. According to this usage, a Nayar woman consorting with a man of the higher caste, follows the hair, purifies the blood, and raises the progeny in social esti- or caste, she would be guilty of Prathilomam; and if the differ- ence of caste were admittedly ae she would be turned out of her family to prevent the whole family being boycotted. In many cases, the Nambuthiris, Peheeen Podthis, and Tamul Brahmans, Kshatriyas and Am balavasis form ailignaes with Nayar women; but the latter and their children cannot touch their husbands and fathers without polluting them. Children of this union belong to the mother’s family. In the clan sys- tem, descent was at first reckoned in the female line; uterine ties ‘aléne constituted kinship. The father was not regarded as related even to his children, nor was he considered as a mem- clan name, and the clan name hesomias the test at blodd rela- tionship. Among the Nayars, Ambalaviasis, and Malayali from the bride or bridegroom, and counting exclusive of both papers ro degrees upward according as the relationship with = common ancestor is reached, with the aforesaid degrees—on both sid the person so related are known as sapindas. 298 Journal oj the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. Kshatriyas, the same customs are in force, and kinship is reckoned through the female line. ‘* The womb dies the child.’’ Marriage is endogamous among the low caste Sudras ; it is strictly prohibited even in the case of two persons belonging to e same family or whose relationship cannot be traced to its origin, but it is only traditional. A man cannot marry the sister of his deceased wife, nor from the family of his deceased wife. These customs are slowly-changing. € marriage custom above referred to is applicable to the Izhuvans also. The best form of marriage among them as ing among the Dravidians of Southern India, is more wide- spread, and on the whole more deleterious than the custom of premature marriage. This is the Dravidian custom by which @ man marries his mother’s brother’s daughter, his sister’s daughter, or father’s sister’s daughter. The custom is not confined to any particular caste, and is creeping into Brahman- ism.! Speaking broadly, marriage among the fishing castes {Valan, Arayan, Mukkuvan and Marakkan), the Kamméalans (Asari—carpenter, Musari—bell-metal worker, Kollan—black- smith, Tattin—goldsmith, and Th3él-kollan —leather-worker), Panan, Vélan, and Kaniyan—astrologer—is exogamous as regards alam or kiriyam (house) which corresponds to gotram. In certain parts of the State, the Pulluvans marry in the same family, and this custom is also dying out The agrestic serfs follow the customs of their landlords, those serving the Nayars and Izhuvans observe the marriage prohibitions of the Nayars, while those under the Brahmans observe the exogamic rule of illam and kiriyam already re. ferred to. Among the jungle folk, the Kadars donot marry a gir! related to him on the male side. Asa rule marriage between persons descended in a direct line from the same parents 18 forbidden if the relationship can be traced to any extent. The Same custom prevails also among the Kong Among the Jews and Jonakan Mapillas, cousins of all degrees intermarry. Prohibitions of intermarriage between kindred are based on the fear of complicate relationship, concentration of affec- tion within too narrow a circle, inducement to keep the pro- perty within the family, violation of God’s law as they outrage 2 Ge = tnd 5 oO a 2 =] mg oD he Ee] Smad S me ° o RZ =. hag a sg ° > ca) ° ' ! Census of India, 1911 vol. xii u : ; : , part |, e 107. ? Cochin Tribes and Castes, vol. ii, page vO7, Vol. X, No. 9.} Marriage Customs of the Cochin Castes. 299 LWV.S.] ber of physical and mental defectives among them. Many writers on the pathology of the Jews say, that the excessive proportion of the deaf, mute, blind, insane, idiotic, imbecile marria Age of the Contracting Parties.-—Religious compulsion to marry, the obligation to marry girls before the attainment of r tion, an appreciable percentage are children of consanguineous ages prominent in Cochin as elsewhere in India. Nearly cent of the population of the State follow the Marumakkatha- yam law of inheritance, and among them seorenee ye is ee com- p from a religious point of view as it is mong the several other classes of the Hindus. Child marriage in the form of irrevocable betrothal is unknown among them, nor is while the Christians and the Jonakan m@pillas, who form a third of the population, marry their girls only after they come of age (though exceptions are often met with), and freely allow remarriage of widows. Tamul Brahman girls and those of the Konkanis are married before they come of age. pee among them the marriagable age is gradually rising. Among the rest of the people, girls are seldom married before they attain the twelfth parts of India. The different religious communities of the 1 The Jews, Contemporary Science cocaine pages 250-251. 2 Census of India, vol. xii, part 1, page 1 300 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. followers of other religions. No Jew male under 15, and only 31 females between 10 and 15 in a thousand of each in that age period are married.! In this respect the various castes yana Aswalayana, Jaimini, Bauddhayana, and others,* it also the Smrithis of Manu, Narada and Puranas,* bear unmistak- modified into three ritus 6; if left unmarried beyond that time 1 ‘Census of India, 1911, vol. xviii, part 1, pages 40-42. 2 Marriage after Puberty, by V. S. Srinivasa Sastri, pages 24-27. ages 28-37 puberty, he ohpreparg (¢) Vide Fs incurs sin of embryo murder, she is asurda. (¢) V! Samhitas of Sankara, chap. 15. Angir as verses 126-128. Vol. X, No. 9.) Marriage Customs of the Cochin Castes. 301 [NV.S8.] they might themselves arrange a marriage with a suitable youngman. The whole question, however, is one of conjecture. It is said that during later times, an influential sect had rown up who approved of early marriage. The view that the that the neglect of parents to provide husbands for their daughters who were fit to conceive, and who, being eligible for marriage, was tantamount to an embryo murder at each ritu Considerations such as these began to assert themselves, and were laid hold of by the later Smrithi writers, who began to ay down elaborate rules regarding matrimonial alliances before puberty; and the idea of the embryo murder, already “sae to, was much — gerated. The custom of post-nubile marriage was not yet condemned wholesale, but gradually owing to the altered conditions in the later periods the view that marriage should take place before puberty became gener- rewards that went to parents who gave their daughters in mar- riage before they reached puberty and emphasized the gifts of portance of the oxide of birth, and the — of the our soeae grandmother, great-grandmether, whose names a Brahma as to pronounce on the Sradha day, Poncdtea this, ahadaeet Thus, the gradual lowering of the position of women from the standard of the vedic times, and the distrust of their vir- are not obscurely hinted at in the literature of the subject, and girls were, as at present, married before puberty in — to avoid the — of causing scandal later on.!_ When once The practice of infant ra has spread much further, and had more deeply taken root among the lower castes than the prohibition of widow marriage. Both customs appear to nd are now par ience, and con nfers on them some consideration which may attach to religious orthodoxy and social propriety. Among the l Marriage after Puberty, pages 75-89. 302 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. primitive ‘‘ Animists’’ and low caste peoples, the practice of early marriage is probably a lingering survival of the ancient promiscuity ild or premature marriages have their own advantages and disadvantages. The validity or propriety of a marriag is solely determined by the standards of society to which the although theoretically immature marriage on the male side is not a necessary compliment to that on the female, practically it must be so t : Yocial Reform by Legislation.—The views above set forth were taken advantage of by the enlightened State of Mysore for the introduction of a regulation to prevent infant marriages in its territory. The main provision of the Mysore Act is that any person who causes the marriage of an infant girl or aids ' Papers relating to Infant Marriage and Enforced Widowhood in India, pages 3-8, Vol. X, No. 9] Marriage Customs of the Cochin Castes. 303 [NV.S.] or abets such a marriage is liable to be punished with imprison- ment up to six months. No restriction is placed upon infant i i law is mainly intended to stop the practice of aged widowers from marrying child wives. Any man who has completed 55 years of age marries a girl who has not completed fourteen years of age, is liable to be punished with fine or imprisonment, which may extend to two years, or with both,! that the present legislation in Baroda is much more advanced than in Mysore, and is far ahead of the current notions and alliance with the women of other castes. Consequentiy, the difficulty of procuring a husband for the daughter of a Nambuthiri is very great. He has to pay a heavy price for an securing a bridegroom. In other cases he either allows 1 & 2 Census of India, 1911, vol. xvi, part I, page 153. 8 Cochin Tribes and Castes, vol ii, pages 308-309. 304 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (Sept., 1914. (3) the bridegroom should be older than the prospective bride; (4) they must be of the same caste and sub-caste, but of different gotras, and pravaras; (5) he must be prepared to pay a lump sum and presents of cloth, which the bargaining ability of the bridegroom can command in the matrimonial market. On the last the enlightened opinion is unanimous, and yet the prac- tice does not follow theory.! arriage Ceremonies and Rites.—Among primitive men, of time on the body and mind of either partner. These or her personal taste and happiness. Here the children are the by-products of a ‘ conveniency alliance.’’ The question of the ownership of the offspring has to be judged from the history of the human marriages, which have often arisen as a separ question. The marriage customs of the Cochin Hindu castes may, lie ' Cochin Tribes and Castes, vol. ij hiss Ss , vol. ii, pages 210-214. * Laws of Manu, chap. iii, pages 27-30. 8 Ibid., pages 31-34. Vol. X, No. 9.]|. Marriage Customs of the Cochin Castes. 305 [NV.8.] at first sight, appear to be different, but on a closer examina- tion, it may be seen that most of the customs of the Nam- other lower castes. The formal advent of the bridegroom with his party after due invitation to the house of the bride, in hand the right foot of the bride and placing it on a mill stone (Saptapadi) which is the essential and binding portion of the wedding ceremony, looking at the Ursa major are common both to the Nambuthiris, the Tamul and other classes ‘of Brahmans. Among the former the fali-tying is done by the father, while among the latter, by the bridegroom alone. Consummation (stkam) takes place among the Nambuthiris on the night of the fourth day; while that among Tamu Brahmans, on a auspicious night after the bride comes of age. A Nambuthiri returns to his illam (house), if it happens to be near to that of his bride, on the same day for adoration of the sacred fire, while a Tamul Brahman youth, on an aus- picious day after four days’ feastings in the bride’s house. The above rites are more or less being adopted by the groom in the act of capture. : The religious ceremonies connected with marriage are not limited to prayers, sacrifices and other means of pleasing the gods. Efforts are made to ascertain their will beforehand. Among the Hindu castes, astrologers are often consulted before- hand as to their agreement of the horoscopes; auspicious 306 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. days, even hours, are selected. Among the Hebrews, marriage was no religious contract, and there was no trace of a priestly consecration took place on the day of betrothal or wedding, though the particulars have not been preserved in any ancient description. Among the Muhammadans also, marriage, though a civil contract, is concluded with a prayer to Allah. ‘‘ Chris- tianity gave back to marriage its religious character. The founder of the Christian Church had not prescribed any cere- monies in connection with it, but in the earliest times, the Christians on their own accord asked for their pastor’s benedic- i his was not indeed a necessity, and for widows, recognized in the twelfth century, marriage was consl- dered valid without ecclesiastical benediction till the year 1563, when the Council of Trent made it an essentially religious ony. Protestants do not regard marriage as a ivine institution.’’ Hence the sacerdotal nuptial remains as indis- pensable as ever.! The Nayars who follow the inheritance in the female line observe matrimonial customs different from those above before puberty, and the second, the real adult marriage, is the performance of this ceremony (tali-tying) in the family for - 2) the cocoanut t oa y of Human Marriage, by Westermarck, chap. xix, pages Vol. X, No. 9.] Marriage Customs of ihe Cochin Castes. 307 [N.S.] the formal beginning of the ceremony; (5) a feast during the previous night (athazham); (6) the worship of the Sun on the next morning; (7) ¢ali-tying for each girl by a separate member of the caste, or by a Thirumalpad for a number of temple close by; {11) their eating together from the same amo tion with their religious observances, such as exists under the ordinary Hindu law, though several of the details bear a resemblance to a portion of the marriage ritual of the Nambuthiris.’’ ! second or the real marriage of the Nayar girls is the Sambandham (the customary union of man and woman) whic & maternal uncle and his nephew; but, as a rule, the girls are grown up, and they enjoy very much freedom in the choice of their husbands than other classes of people. As in the tali-tying ceremony the consent of the Karnavar, parents and maternal uncle of the contracting parties, the selection n a sumptuous dinner in the house of the ride, the presen- tation of cloth to the bride at the auspicious hour, and the 1 Malabar Marriage Commission Report, page 87. 308 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. ([Sept., 1914. gifts to the Brahmans who pronounce their benediction upon the conjugal pair, and their cohabitation during night, and the departure of the bridegroom to his house next morning are the chief characteristics. they do not look upon it as a marriage, because the husband cannot eat with his sudra wife, and is therefore unable to join with her in the wedding feast. It is the same case with other classes of Brahmans also. The aristocracy of the District of Malabar, the Rajas who are admittedly the heads the Nayar caste, and the Nambuthiris who are the expoun- ders of religion, opine, that chastity is not'one of the duties pre- scribed for the Nayar community, and slokas (verses) are quoted to prove this. This view is not held in the Cochin State. depended for his continuance on mutual consent.” _ The views expressed above are those of the landed aristocracy, and the rulers who were admittedly of the Nayar . wife for life, and with them sambandham is the real marriage, and Travancore, as well as in British Malabar. The present and growing tendency in nearly all cases, in which a man, im : of such unions are looked upon as theirs and duly provided for, so far as their means permit. ................s2.+s eee per ae rrtseeeeeeeees- Nevertheless, the existing state 0 ! The Cochin Tribes and Castes, vol. li, pages 30-38. 2 Malabar Marriage Commission Report, pages 38-44. Vol. X, No. 9.] Marriage Customs of the Cochin Castes. 309 [N.S.] things in the community did not quite satisfy the sentiments r refo d a permissive law, Act IV of 1896. The main provi- sions of , that, when a sambandham has bee registered, it shall have the incidence of a 1 marriage maintenance by the husband or father respectively and to succeed to half his self-acquired property if he dies intestate, while the parties to such a sambandham cannot register a to the State. The fewness of the number of marriage registra- tion shows how little the Nayars, as a community, have availed themselves of it. The principal objections urged against it are:—(1) that it ignores caste and customary rearevtne on marriage and thereby interferes with caste; (2) that it sanctions what according t ial usage is deemed to be incestuous marriage; (3) that marriage before the Registrar is obnoxious to the people, and that no one has any scruples about going through the customary form; (4) that the provisions relating to divorce are ill-adapted to the present state of Society in provisions relating to the giving of the w of the self- acquired property to wives and children amount to violent interference with the customary law e mass of the people continued to regard the marriage law with aversion and suspicion, and even the educated members of the community who are in favour of the measure, the elderly members of their tarwads wee and all the powerful Nambuthiris and other et landlords. The Regis- trar of Calicut also points out, that e power conferred by the marriage law, to make provision cs. one’s own wife an children, has hitherto acted as some inducement to pers to register their sambandhams, but as Act V of 1898 sities the followers of the Marumakkathayam law to attain this object without registering their sambadhams, and ‘‘ unneces- sarily curtailing their pay of action, and risking the ie of divorce proceeding,’’ he thinks it unlikely that registrati under the marriage law would increase in future. amy.—Among Hindus, though the Shastras as as four wives. He resorts to this either when the first wife is barren or sickly or to dispose of the sa ogner ips daughters and sisters. Among the Tamul Brahmans and other higher 310 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914 castes, a second wife is allowed not as a luxury at the mere is entitled to join the husband in religious ceremonies, an that the second or subsequent wife has no status here except with acquiescence and consent of the first wife. Thus the than handmaids or eo class of concubines, like those of a me — patriarc du law books ‘do not restrict the number of wives : h meth, Jacob married Leah and Rachael.” In later times, we read of Solomon who had ‘‘700 wives, — and 300 concubines, and of Rehoboam who too k 18 wives and three score concubines.’ According to the Talmudic “right also, it was permitted no longer, though the number of legiti- mate wives was restricted to four. The Cochin Jews are now mostly monogamous. The Koran allows a man to have four legitimate wives, and he may take as many concubines as he likes. Between a wife and a concubine, the difference is tae ed not very great. The former has her father as her protector, while the latter is defenceless against the husband.‘ amy is very much in vogue among the Jonakan ras ee of the State, as well as amongst those in the Ern an amongst them have even four. The wives all stay with him in the same house, and disunion amongst them is a perennial source of uneasiness to the husband, and frequently leads to divorce. Disparity in age is never considered objectionable. It is evident that Islamism arose amidst the full polygamic regime. Its founder could not dream of establishing any other. . Polygamy was therefore established by divine right among the faithful, and as at the bottom it is in accord with primitive instincts of man, it has maintained itself in Mussalman : Code of Manu, chap. ix, verses 149-151. 2 Genesis, chap. verse 34; chap. xxiv, verses 23-28 8 Westermark’s History of Human Marriage, chap. xx, page 442. Vol. X, No. 9.] Marriage Customs of the Cochin Castes. 311 [N.S.] countries from the time of Muhammad to our own days.' It is absolutely unknown among the Syrian Christians Polygamy was at one time the privilege of the princes and the great, and now the custom tolerates a second wife only in the case of sterility of the first. Polyandry.—Among the Nayars of ancient times in Mala- bar, Cochin and Travancore there was polyandry of the matri- archal type, with the primitive family form—matriarchate — which corresponds to a system that takes no account of pater- nal filiation and leaves the children to the family of the mot Another form of polyandry prevailing in the Nor- takes a woman of the caste as wife, and allows his younger may be used, ‘‘ the male concubines.’’ Fraternal polyandry is said to be superior to the polyandry of the Nayar type; because the paternal filiation assures them a sort of collective paternal parenthood, since the fathers are of the same blood. The custom is prevailing to a certain extent in a few low castes. people pic could not get sufficient food for their maintenance. Another cause of polyandry is the desire to keep the common patrimony from being distributed among the number of brothers Leverite is the name given to the fret imposed by custom or law on the brother of the deceased husband to marry his sister-in-law when she became a sith The custom of the’ leverite, which for a long time has been thought ce liar to the Jews, is very widely spread, and is found among ante most widely differing from one another. The custom is vogue among most of the primitive tribes all over the werld. The code of Manu imposes the leverite even on the brother of a betrothed man who dies: when the husband of a younger girl happens to die after the betrothal, let the brother of the husband take her for wife. The object of this legal precept : Islam by Ameer Ali Syed, pages 29-30. 2 The History of Human Marriage, chap. xxi, pages 483-485, — 312 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept. 1914. the widowed fiancée, and it seems that all commerce is to cease after the first pregnancy.! Eres leverite among the Hebrews is twice alluded to in the Bible It was a sort of obligatory and fictitious adoption of a nephew by the deceased uncle. It was rather a moral than the latter would go up to the elders, and say that the husband refused to raise up unto his brother a name in Israel, and that made known among the people. The principal object of the Hindu leverite was to furnish the dead man with a fictitious _ Among the Izhuvans, Thandans, Valans, Kaniyans, Panans, Pulayans and Parayans the custom of leverite is still in vogue. € woman after the death of her husband mates was expressly stated to be entitled to have the widow, and i see i th ey her, he had the guardianship over her, and e might give her away or even sell her t body. se oes y er to anybo 8 eo me n 2 ct oF ie] = a z ° ? 336 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. honour of Behula. The Ganges flowed by the side of the town, but within the course of the last fifty years it has receded about a mile to the north. Of all the places that claim the honour of being the residence of Cand Sadagar, as Campanagari on the Damuda in the district of Burdwan and Candnia or Candmaya in the district of Bogra, about four miles to the north of Mahasthanagarh, Campanagari in the district of Burdwan has the most preferential claim, inasmuch as it is situated near the Damuda on which the story and the tradition place the Campanagar of Cand Sadagar. The Ubbai Sutta, a Jaina work, professes to give a des- cription of the town of Campa at the time of Kinie or Ajata- Satru, who is mentioned there as its ‘‘ king.’’! It was then anks and avenues of trees on the road-sides. Its prosperity did not diminish by the lapse of time: even at the time of the Pala kings it was in a flourishing condition. From the pada, as of Campa, * and he has been referred to as ‘‘ Sutra- a > “sare wate gfqu aracrar afeaaz”, p. 6 ka. 2 See Catal. of Sans. Manuscripts by M. M. Haraprasad Sastri, C.LE., 1892: Notices of Sans. Manuscripts, vol. iii, p- 176, by Dr R. L 1tra, s wesc Asvacikitsitarn, ch. 2. j aghuvamsa, vi, v. 26—Commentary by Mallinatha; Refutation 0 5 a alld Theory by M. M. Haraprasad Sastri in J.A.S.B., '910, 5 Mvg., v, l—see Dr. Rhys David’s Note ] oe Bee Lankavatar a Siitra, ch. 10. It is atticult to say whether the sa Breas was a@ his name or simply an adjective meaning . “ gi Vol. X, No. 9.] Notes on Ancient Anga. 337 [V.8.] of the sacred doctrines of Jainaism! in the 4th century B ©. The town next in importance to Campa in the country of nga was Mudga-giri or Monghir. It was the Modagiri of the Mahabharat,’ which was conquered by Bhima. Mudgalaputra or Maudgalya, a disciple of Buddha, converted Srutavimsatikoti, a rich mer- chant of this place, into Buddhism.* Hence it was called Maudgalya-giri. Buchanan says that it was the hermitage of ‘‘Mudgala Muni who lived long ago.’’* The tradition still Monghir. Kunda, a spring of hot water, four miles to the east of Monghir. The priests, however, say that the sanctity of the ghat is mentioned inthe Kurma Purana, though we could not trace it out in any of the published work. Monghir was no doubt under the sway of the Karna kings whose governors had their head-quarters in Campa, at the place called Karnagarh, as the tradition about Karracaura, the highest peak of the Monghir hill, is associated with Raja Karna. Bhagalpur is a modern town, but eight miles south of it Bhadariva there is a large village c Bhada- eat riya which in the 6th century B.c. was called Bhadarika, where Mahavira, the last of the Jaina Tirthankaras, spent two pajjusanas or rainy season retirement after he attained the Kevaliship.?_ It must have been a very wealthy and populous town at that period, as it was also visited by Buddha, and in the Buddhist works it is called by « 1 Dr. Buhler: Sthaviravali or Parisistaparvan. : , 2 ii, ch. 29. 3 Beal: Records, ii, 186. + Martin: Hast. Ind., ii, 45. 5 Ind. Ant., vol. xxi. _ 6 Arch. S. Rep., xv, 15, 16. 1 Dr. Jacobi: Kalpasutra. 338 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. to Saketa, where she was married to Purnavarddhana ae Punyavarddhana, son of Migara, the treasurer of ieee: king of Sravasti. She, like Sumigadha, the pm iore Pe Anathapindada,* was the means of con erting her fa or mother of Migara. She constructed the senior at Sravasti and gave it to Buddha; it is now called the . . It zr Important place in ancient time. Egor is i tists nile of iuen peer Buddha is said to have resided here for three months, an St. Martin to u aginary.® Nevertheless RS which is evidently a corruption of Rohit nala or cies exists and is five miles to the north-east of Kiyul an . i t miles to the north-west of Urain. There are many agen and other ancient remains at Rehuanala and also a twelve Bhatis of Bangala (Bengal).’’ It was perhaps os on the Ganges when it was visited by the Chinese trav yids ¥> 8; vi, 34; Mah@-Pandda Jataka, in Jat. (Cam. ed.), ii, 229, 2 Kern: M.I.B., 29, Fee § Mvg., vi, 34, 50, 12, 13: for Kriyaévada doctrine see ibid., vi, sa. 1, 2, 5. a, * Avadaina-Kalpalata, ch. 19. 5 Movg., iii, 13; vill, 15; Spence Hardy: M.B., 226. 6 Arch. 8. Rep., iii, 152, 156; xv, 14. Vol. X, No. 9.] Notes on Ancient Anga. 339 [N.S.] Rehuanala was in the dominion of Indradyumna who is supposed to have been the last king of the Pala dynasty, defeated by the Mahomedans.! At a remote period, Aiga was considered to be a holy place, and three celebrated Rsis [Rishis] lived several years, wheedled away this young ascetic of miraculous birth from the hermitage of his father Rsi Bibhandaka and omapada to send Rsyasra \ his ally DaSaratha to perform an ASvamedha sacrifice in Singhesvar in the subdivision of Madhipura and Singhol hill, about 7 miles to the south of Rehuanala, which also claim to be the hermitage of the Rsi. But the position of the Rishi- afforded facility to the women sent by Romapada to entice away in their boat the young | Martin: East. Ind., ii, 26. @ J.A.S.B., 1852, p. 204, 8 iii, ch. 110, vs. 21, rae 340 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. east,! and that its distance was three yojanas or twenty-four miles’ from Campa where the houses of the women were situated, make it highly probable that Rsyasrnga’s hermitage was at this spot rather than in any other. ust in front of Sultanganj, which is about 15 miles to the Jahnu-asrama. covered with the the images of Nrsimha Surya, Ganga and ty other deities of the Hindu pantheon cut in high relief. On the tures were executed in the 3rd century A.D. under the early Gupta Emperors, as Supposed by General Cunningham,* though Sultanganj itself contains many sculptures and remains of @ tion of the Bhagirathi and the Jahnavi, and also at Gour, Sib- 5 a arn ae nce a 3 ee bie aac alae en a ' For the movement of the river Kusi see J.A.S.B., 1908, p- 465; also vol. xliv, p- 2 MDh.., iii, ch. Eid, v, 11; 3 Arch. S. Rep., xv,.24. : J.AS.B., XXxill (1864) 360. . 5 Rim. ra a : Arch. S. Rep., xv, 24. _ 1J.A.8.B., xxxiii (1864), 361. a Vol. X, No. 9.] Notes on Ancient Anga. 341 [N.S.] ganj and Jahanagar near, Nadia, where the Ganges is likewise said to have been drunk up by the Rsi.! Jahnu is an oT al representation of a change in the course of the Gang The hermitage of Rsi Durvasa is pointed out on ‘the highest Tree Bad Rhein. peak of a hill called Khalli-pahar or Khadi-pahar, a limestone rock which is now worked for chalk. A temple of Mahadeva occupies the site of the hermitage. The hill is situated on the bank of the Ganges, 23 miles to the east of Bhagalpur and two miles to the north of Kahalgaon (Colgong) or Kalahagrama, a sobriquet ae the place has received on account of the irascible temper of the Rsi. The hermitage of Durvasa, however, is also shown at Dubaur in the sub-division of Nowadah in the district of Gaya have are two famous shrines in the country of Afga: one is the temple of Baidyanatha at Deo- garh, and the other the temple of Madhusidana on the Resmi hill. The former contains a Jyotirlinga of Mahadeva, and the other an image of Visnu. The phallic image of Baidy anatha is said to have been estab- lished by Ravana, king of Lanka, at a place which was variously called by ‘the names of Citabhumi, Briksa-Khanda,? Jhac handa,* Paraligrama corrupted into Palu-gaon, and Pampapuri.® It is described as a place of pilgrimage in the Padma Puran.6 The sanctity of Baidyanatha as containing one of the twelve great Lingas of Mahadeva is very great, but its sanctity is further enhanced by the fact that it is also one of the fifty-two Pithas. Sati’s heart is said to have fallen at this place and therefore it is called Harda Pitha. ‘lhe temple of Parvati faces that of Baidyanatha, and the pinnacles of the two temples are connected by a piece of cloth stretched from one to the other to indicate their union.?. According to a local tradition recorded by Dr. Pare ince the temples are said to have been built by a Raja of The Mandara hill is _stuated in the Banka sub-division, é o or three miles to the west of Ban- napus en ane : nae thirty miles to the south of Bhagalpur. It is an isolated hill about seven hundred feet high with a groove all round the middle, the chisel marks of which are still visible, indicate the impression of the coil of the Geen Basuki which served as a air for churning the Baidyanath. Fraser: Himala Mountains, 476. Grierson’ s Notes on the igs trict of fags : : 38, + Maha-Lingesvara Tanitr oted by Prancklin i in his Ancient Palibothra, p. 21. Teen Khanda: ch. 59. or aeons on of the temples of Baidyansth see Dr. R. Mitra’s Se On oe Temples of Deoghar”’ in J.A.S.B., 1883, p. 164. Martin: Hast. Tad: ewes 1 2 3 ) 6 7 342 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. ([Sept., 1914. ocean with the hill as the churn-staff, the gods holding at the: tail and the Asuras at the mouth of the serpent, the hill itself resting on the back of the tortoise, a form which Visnu had as- sumed. The hill is sacred to Madhusidana. There are two Jaina temples on the highest peak of the hill. Ona lower bluffon the western side of the peak was the original temple of Visnu called Madhusiidana now in ruins; but the idol is now kept at Bangi, the Balisa of the Mandara-mahatmya, whence it is brought every year to a temple at the foot of the hill on the last day of Pous. On the western side of this is a dark low tave containing an image of Nrsimbha carved in the rock, and near it are situated a colossal image Vamana Deva, a huge but rude sculpture of Madhu Daitya,' and a cave containing some hill and on its eastern side are extensive ruins of temples and other buildings, and among them is an old building called Nath-than which was constructed in a.p. 1589. Flights of in the 7th century 4.p. The Hindus consider it to be an act of great merit to see Madhusiidana on the Mandara hill’® like Vamana on the car, and therefore its sanctity has been ex- tolled in many Puranas.‘ The Mahabharata,? however, does not recognize any other Mandara Parvata except the Mandara of the Himalaya range. The Varaha Puran® and the Mandara- The Pala Kings were Buddhists. Their powerful and judicious administration put an end Their kingdom comprised the ancient countries of Magadha, A these ! For a description of the figure see J.A.S. B., sx, 272. 2 Martin: East. Ind., ii, Bf ait Hugea” (Garuda Puran, ch. 81). 4 Varaha P., 143; Nrsimha P., 65; Skanda P., Yogini T., pt. iis + 6 xiii, ch. 19; iti, 162. 6 Bk. iii. + Vol. X, No. 9.] Notes on Ancient Anga. 343 [NV.S.] countries when they were governed by the Pala kings: namely, ‘ Bae ie i e e universities of Nalanda, Bikramasila, and Jagaddala res- given there in religious literature, arts and sciences, including medicine, grammar and logic, and also in the Madhyamika and Yogacharya doctrines * of the Mahayana system, and other doc- trines of philosophy. The Tripitaka was taught and the doc- trines of the Sarvastivada school were principally followed. As the Bikramasila university was a later institution, it must Nalanda university, an account of which we get from I- s work.’ The Bikramasila university became a renowned centre of the Tantric doctrines, whence they spread over all parts of India, especially to Tibet. Its superintendents were all Mantra-Vajracharyas.* The sculptures which adorned that is, the rock-cut caves at Patharghata with those at Brambanan in Java dedicated to Buddha, that similarity of worship obtained in the two places. ° 1 See my article on The Vikraméila Monastery in J.A.S.B., 1909, 2 The Madhyamika an Madhyamika is a Buddhistic form of the Vedanta philosophy and Yogicharya agrees with the Yoga system The Yogacharya school was Aryasanga or Asanga who lived in the latter part of the 4th century 4a.D. (Monier-Williams: Buddhism, 157; Bhandarkar’s Peep: xx, S. + Prof. Kern: M.I.B., 133. ; : 5 Francklin: Tenets and Doctrines of the Jainas and Buddhists. 344 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. CHAPTER III. MISCELLANEOUS. We have stated that at the time of the Atharva Veda the aaiiehighabitiasite. people who ah in the country of Anga y the name of Angas. The contemptuous manner in which they have been spoken indicates that they were an aboriginal tribe and did not belong to the Aryan race. Though we are not aware by what name their descendants were called, yet from the tradition a the Santals ' we know that they were the aborigines of Campa or rather of the country of Anga, as the Cherus were the aboriiedl inhabitants of the neighbouring country of Magadha. It appears that Rsi Dirghatama was the first to colonize Anga and the neighbouring countries with Aryans and introduce Aryan civili- zation into them.” The name of Campa is associated with Campa trees (Michelia Champaka) which ovieeney grew wild in this untry. Even in the 4th century B.c., the country in many parts abounded with forests, and the sloobants of Anga were the most famous. Canakya, who set up Candragupta on the water and rendered the lands highly productive. The Candan, which is also called the Andhela* from one of its two principal branches, is the Andomatis of Arrian, which he describes as @ tributary of the Ganges. It falls into the Ganges near Campa. The Campa river is mentioned in the Paap as forming the boundary between Anga and Magadha. alte H. Bompas: Folklore of the Santal Parganas, 406, 447, but adley-Birt places this Campa to the north-west corner of Hazari- bogh (Story of an Indian Upland). 2 Visnu P., pt. iv, ch. 18; Max Miiller’s Hist. of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, p- 57. 5 Kautilya’s Arthasastra, ii, ch. iS afeste Asn: Sor: sreqrefa waar: | cb taacet fearat awyaaar: |i 4 Martin: East. Ind., ii, 12; McCrindle : Ptolemy, 98 and Arrian. 5 Jiaiaka, iv, no. 506 (Cam. Ed. ). 6 Ram., ii, 10. Vol, (v. a 9.) Notes on Ancient Anga. 345 as the nobleman was called. Bimbisara is said to have visited Sona at Campa, and Mudgaliputra or Maudgalyéyana, the celebrated disciple of Buddha, himself came to Anga to procure the rice for the sage when the latter was ~ From the Buddhist works we get a glimpse of the reli- gious practices followed by the people nga at and before the time of Religion. of Buddha’s attaining Buddhahood. The stories of the Jatila U Kassapa people of Anga also followed the ee practices that prevailed at the time, and it is related that they went with the people Magad! ith Fete leche to help the Jatila Uravela Kassapa Vedic sacrifice; and : perf it is mentioned in the Ubbai Sutta i that Banaprastha ascetics lived on the banks of the ~ — at Campa.’ In most part of Anga, Brahminism gave way to Jainism by the Sapna influence of Mahavira himself who was related to the royal house of Magadha, Bimbisara and Ajatasatru bes his early disciples; and the hold that he obtained upon the people was kept alive by the revival of the memory and worship of Basupujya, the twelfth Tirthankara, at Campa, the capital, where he lived and died. But the superior genius of Buddha, who personally visited Anga and made frequent excursions to pa,® served to a great extent to establish his system and : Hardy: M.B., 254. 2 Mvg., v, 1. 3 Beal: Hy & 4 Ch. 27, vs. 3,6; Rockhill, 72. Kutadanta Sutia. 8 Mvg., vi, 34: Rockhill, 70. 346 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. ([Sept., 1914. contributed much to the decline of Jainism in that country. uddhism gave a turn to the thoughts and ideas that pre- vailed at the time, shaped the character of the nation, and sent Hindu civilization running through a new channel. A new era dawned, which lasted for five hundred years or so, as the Jaina and Buddhist doctrines, and w. ‘ re ¢ the fact that according to Manu the Bra e hmans and Ksatriyas Sankaravijaya, ch, xv, v. 161. Ind. Ant., vi, 176—On the Krishnajanmdstami by Prot. A. Weber. 1 g 8 ii, 52. + wrerafery shugaadeg | aearat faaaeea ga: dencasia u 5 Pras. i, ch. i, Khands 1, 2, vs. 13, 14 (S.B.E., xiv). Vol. X, No. 9.] Notes on Ancient Anga. 347 v.S of Babites: Odra, etc., who gave up the Lniascenipt rites and doctrines became Sidras and were called Das The Angas had the peculiar custom of abando oning their ad and selling their wives and children, as supe an in the Maha- bharata.? This was evidently a survival of the old primitive practices, which confirms the idea that they were originally Manners and customs. were subsequently absorbed into the Aryan stock. Hence the Angas are said to be of mixed origin by Baudhayana. Not- withstanding the frequent predatory inroads to which Anga was subjected, it appears that it was a very flourishing country up to the 11th century, and its capital Champa all along main- ampa described in the 6th century A.D. nd a resort of gamblers, swindlers, rogues, roughs and footpads.® 1 Siiamcgueeey x, 43-45. 2 viii, ch. 46. Daésakumar., ch. 2. ~ oe Me Ne n o em N 2 ae 37. Magic and Witchcraft on the Chota Nagpur Plateau. By Sarat Cuanpra Roy, M.A., B.L. [Presented at the First Indian Science Congress, January 17, 1914.] Although among the Chota es tool aborigines, I have not yet come across any term rene ent to the mana of the Melanesians or the orenda of the Iroquoian tribes, the idea of a mysterious impersonal force connoted by such terms is fully recognized by the Mindas and the Oraons. It is this mysterious ene or ma hat, for the Oraon and th ) Munda, gives the leaves of the mango-tree or the twig of the pial (buchania latifolia) its fertilizing influence, which gives the bheloa (semicarpus anacardium) twig its power of averting the ‘ evil eye,’ which gives the small perforated rati-jara stone its power of curing fever by its contact, which abi the vegetable love-charm or hate-charm, sometimes use he Ordon youth, carried as a fetish tat an Oraon hunting-party, its power of bringing luck in the chas means ado ted b y the Chota psn aboriginal, as by other peoples of the lower culture, for securing alliance with the helpful impersonal powers, has been Sympathetic Magic. through .contact, direct or indirect, and through imitative Suggestion. The means adopted by him to avoid the harmful rities are eadivd n opinion. Am the aborigines of Chota oh * ete: we find the nite methods often combined in pract I otell now — to fiche a few illustrations of t rene at ine kinds of magic prope practised by the eniane the Oraons ot Chota Nagpir. 350 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. I. BENEFICENT MaGic aND THE PRINCIPLE OF SYMPATHETIO ALLIANCE, (a) Beneficent Contagious Magic. e sun lightning-strokes. Among other instances of beneficent con- tagious magic I may refer to the various customs relating to fire-lustration, or rather purification by fumigation, in vogue amongst the Ordons and the Mandas. Water, fire, and sacrificial blood are beneficent powers, and contact with them is believed to counteract the evil influences of harmful powers. (6) Beneficent Imitative Magic. Spring of the village. Arrived at the tree, they all simultane- ously pour the water of their pitchers over the foot of the tree. It is believed that after this ceremony has been duly per- formed, the needed showers of rain are not long in coming. custom which requires the women of every Ordon family to put a live crab into their burning hearth, on the occasion of the spring festival known as the sarhiil. As the crab crackles in the fire, the women exclaim, **May our urid (Phaseolus Roxburghii) lentils burst their pods like this.’’ Vol. X, No. 9.] Magic and Witchcraft in Chota Nagpur. 351 [N.S.] Il. Evit Magic AnD THE PRINCIPLE OF AVOIDANCE. rom a fear of the mischievous effects of contact with vague and indefinite evil powers arose the various tabus im- race or tribe, but is s wildly pretaet among eaacies of the lower culture. Although the idea has been greatly on dat upon by the Hindu with his higher culture, it is among su peoples of the lower culture as the Miindas and the Orions that should he chance to walk across a plat ora cup from which an alien has taken food, he is sure to get pain in his gullet. of evil powers ; in some cases, it is the fear of harm through unskilful or untimely handling of the mysterious and the sacred. This is illustrated by an interesting custom in vogue amongst the aborigines of Chéta Nagpir. An Ordon of a village in hich } he —and, if limits—of a village where the sarhil has been already cele- brated. Even if unavoidable necessity takes him to such a village, he will on no account eat, or drink, or even smoke, or into activity, and this is why Oraons who have not yet renewed their alliance with the gods by celebrating the sarhul in en Blerc0s are eae of Seer otk — where the ous practices of the witch said os sorcerer of Chota Hiei Superior spiritual energy or mana, partly natural an ly acquired through occult practices, ‘he help of a familiar spirit, and the mysterious force of the mantram or magic spell ,—these account for the occult powers of the witch and the sorcerer. 352 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (Sept., 1914. It is believed to be a common practice with the witch or the sorcerer to injure a person in health by secretly mixing with his food a bit of a bone or a nail-paring over which some magic spell has been pronounced. This bit of bone or nail is believed to grow in bulk inside the stomach of the man who swallows it unawares, and finally to kill him unless he secures the timely off their grain. Although the grain thus taken away be no more than a mere handful, the magic touch of the witch soon exhausts the granary in question; and, through sympathetic magic, even the fields of the owner of the granary cease to yield their wonted produce. Ithough the Chéta Nagpir magician or mati has always his sadhak-bhit or familiar with whom he has entered into @ secret compact to enable him to effect his mischievous designs, yet, when in a case of spirit-possession he has to exorcise an evil spirit, he must invoke the help of all the good and benefi- evil spirit. Sometimes the tikli is affixed to a copper-coin which is then left on a public thoroughfare in the belief tha whoever takes up the pice will be ‘ possessed’ by the spirit. Sometimes, again, the tikli is attached to the wings of a pigeon or other bird in the belief that the evil spirit will Vol. X, No. 9.] Magic and Witchcraft in Chota Nagpur. 353 [N.8.] go to the house where the bird first goes or is taken to. As for the singhi, after an evil spirit has been confined i bringing disease to himself or his people. This sort of ‘ traffick- ing with the devil’ is, however, held in as much abhorrence _ and detestation by savage and barbarian societies as by the civilized man. he Ora so that the evil spirit may thenceforth trouble such enemy b 1 e Mindas and the Ordaons of Chota Nagpir believe that a witch and a black magician, though they may prosper in the world for a while, are sure to end their lives in misery as a divine punishment for their nefarious practices. The principle of Avoidance by diverting the attention of an evil power is illustrated by the use of certain amulets such as cowrie-shells worn on the neck or waist of a child. The Chota of driving cattle-diseases. By previous appointment, the young bachelors of the village and the village-cowherd assemble at the village dancing-ground or @khra@ at dead of night. A tharki or wooden cow-bell is tied to the neck of the cowherd. Thus n the conviction that their village is now rid of the spirit. h a case, it is not the fear of physical force but the pressure of the cumulative spiritual force or mana of the batch of naked bachelors that compels the disease-spirit to take flight. Such are a few illustrations of the principles and practice of Magic and Witchcraft on the Chota Nagpur Plateau. It is evident that it is the intellect and not so much the heart of the man of the lower culture that is at fault. He too is in quest of the good,—the good as he vaguely and sometimes erroneously understands it. And thus amongst these younger brethren of humanity, as amongst their elder brethren of the higher culture, we meet with the same ceaseless striving after what they consider to be the good,—the arduous striving which ced when Time began and will continue till Time shall A REPORT ON THE BIOLOGY OF THE LAKE OF TIBERIAS. FourtsH SERIES. List of subjects dealt with in Fourth Series. Page Hydrophilidae Fig. 4. Philoscia couchii, Kin., » 5. om ., distal joints of first gnathopod of male. oo 6. > ,s y, inner ramus of first pleopod of male. 7. ., second pleopod of male. 9? ba especially the propodus much more swollen and expant re here the distal joints of the first gnathopods in both 366 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Sept., 1914. sexes to show this difference. The figure of the male gnatho- pod here given agrees closely with that given by Dollfuss (1897) for this species. I am not aware that so marked a sexual gure inner branch of the first pleopod and the second pleopod of ns. Dollfuss (1897) identifies Philoscia longicornis, Biidde-Lund, with this species, but Biidde-Lund (1909) does not agree with this opinion. He suggests that P. couchii is identical with P. cellaria, Dollfuss, and that P. longicornis is a distinct ee couchit has not before been found in Palestine, nor, indeed, in the neighbourhood of fresh water. Hitherto it has the shores of L. Tiberias. The habitat in which it was found, under stones at the edge of the lake, is exactly the kind of situation in which one would expect it to occur. Leptotrichus, sp. Localities: Under stones near the margin of the lake—eight specimens. hree species of Leptotrichus are known from Syria,— L. panzeri, Aud. &. Sav. tauricus, B.-L., and L. pulchellus, Dollfuss. The present specimens do not belong to the first: of useum. ave, however, not been able to see specimens of the other two species. I, consequently, do not feel certain Vol. X, No. 9.] Amphipoda jrom the Lake of Tiberias. 367 [W.8. of the identity of the present specimens and prefer to leave the matter until I am able to co mpare them with authentic specimens of L. tauricus or L. pulchellus LITERATURE CITED. Biidde-Lund (G.), 1885:—Crustacea Isopoda terrestria per fom Chevreux, E., Dollfuss, A., Lortet, L., ilias et genera et species des- auniae. ripta. 1909 .—« Derrestrial Isopoda from Egypt’’ in Results of the Swedish Zoolo- direction of L. A. Jiagerskiéld. Part III. 1895: a Biol du Nord de la France, 1892 utes. sur les Isopodes terrestres et fluviatiles de ihe oe principalement par M. fe arrois.’’ Rev. Biol. 40 * ent de France, Vol. 4 la 1894: Webs del Dr. E. Festa in Pales- Libano e regoni_ vicine. x. _Crastaces _Tsopodes Terrestres et d’eau dou Boll. Mus. Zool. Anat. Conse: “Torino, Val. ix. No. 177. 1897 :—‘‘ Tableau iconographique des. Phi- loscia d’Europe. La Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes, Ill* Ser., année, nos. 7 2 1883 :—Arch Mus. d’ Hist. Nat. Pica t. LH... p. 190. te i ec ia le cin dl li al i ea eli rr rat gies ips ee. eh havoc, a 40. Chironomides du Lac de Tibériade, Par J. J. Kierrer, Dr. Phil. nat. (Bitsch). (Communicated by Dr. N. ANNANDALE.) S espéces mentionnées ou décrites dans ce petit travail, ont été recueillies en Palestine, au Lac de Tibériade, en Octobre 1912, par Mons. N. Annandale, Conservateur 4 |’Indian Mu- seum de Calcutta. Pelopia cygnus, Nn. sp. 3. Blanc; flagellum brun, 4 bandes raccourcies sur le mesonotum, et le metanotum roussatres, un faible anneau Antennes de 14 ou 15 articles. Ailes poilues et tachetées de brun, une tache bien distincte sur la transversale et une autre sur l’extrémité du radius, une 3° sur le bord postérieur Vis-a-vis des transversales, une trace de tache a l’extrémité alaire, cubit n dépassé par la costale. Pattes antéri- eures seulement pubescentes, leur tibia d’un tiers plus que le métatarse en brillant, a poils blanchatres ; articles basau ] e a poils dressés, trés longs et de la p denses ; articles terminanx ayant la forme du cou et de ka téte du cygne. L. 3,5 mm.—Lac de Tibériade. Pelopia monilis, L. Cette espéce existe dans toute 1’Europe et au Sud de ‘Afrique. Une 92 a été capturée au lac de Tibériade. Trichotanypus tiberiadis, nN. sp. D’un brun sombre; pattes blanchatres comme les balanciers, sans tache, bo postéri egmen abdominaux, blanchatre. Antennes- du <@ de 15 articles, dont - 2° et le 3° sont ee 14° un peu plu s long que 2-13 réunis. Antennes de la @_ blanchatres, sauf Varticle terminal. Ailes ianobhbies: oilues avec une tache d’un.brun noir sur les transversales, partie distale depuis la bifurcation de le posticale jusqa 4 Jl’extrémité de l’aile d q e radius bifurqué; les ailes de la femelle sont conformées comme sath le mile, sauf que, le long du bord airincrrigh sous les tra sversales, se trouve un grand espace mé. Tarse sin brun. Articles basaux de la 370 Journal oj the Asiatic Society of Bengal. (September, 1914. pince gros, articles terminaux gréles, ad Pebees: graduelle- ment amincis de la base au sommet, finement pubescents. L. ¢ 2mm. 2 1,5 mm.—Lac de Tibéri ae. [This is the species I iar to in a note on a former paper (J.A.S B. (n.s.) IX, p ers A arene a troublesome blood-sucker at Tiberias. oy. uae nda, Polypedilum genesareth, N. sp. 3 2. Brunnoir; antennes blanchatres sauf, chez la femelle, le 6° article qui est assombri; mesonotum ayant de chaque cété, dans la moitré postérieure, une bande longitudinale un co verticille | eres long, Siciphine Vextrémité du 6° article; 5° article fusiforme, & col plus court que chez les articles 3° et 4°, verticille dépassant de beaucoup l’article terminal. Ailes blanches, ciliées, avec des taches petites, brunes et irrisées, dont trois entre le cubitus et la discoidale, a savoir: la plus petite située & la base de la discoidale, une 2°, en ellipse, acs ord postérieur de Vaile; une - derniére tache est située entre le pass de la tige de la posti- cale et le bord postérieur de l’aile; bifurcation de la posticale située sous la transversale. Métatarse antérieur du maximum 4 pulvilles aussi minces et aussi longs que l’emp elle la pince a arriére sans pointe; article si de ince ht — er partout, non wi sain: Semele supérieur mince, pot che tg ei uae nant pas l’extrémité de l’article basal: appendice eva Vol. X, No. 9.] Chironomides du Lac de Tibériade. 371 [NV.S.] dépassant faiblement I’ article ye n’ayant que la demie largeur de l’article terminale. L. ¢ 3,5 mm., 2? 2 mm Lac de Tibériade. Polypediium tiberiadis, n. sp. Blanchatre ; article terminal des antennes brun; eson et des tibias sombre ; un exemplaire a le thorax brun en entier. Antennes de 5 articles, dont le 2° est rétréci au milieu, son col transversal, le 3° et le 4° oven avec un col ayant un col qui atteint les deux tiers de leur longueur, verticilles trois fois aussi longs que l’article avec son col; 5° article composé d’un et d’une piece distale, cylindrique, fendre latéralement, plus ue que le renflement basal mais plus mince et couronné de quatre soies gil longues qu’elle. Ailes longueur, la 2° située sous la 1°, plus étroite mais pres trois fois aussi longue, longe le bord inférieur de la discoidal et dépasse de chaque cété la 1°; une 3°, située sous la 2° trouve dans l’angle formé par les des rameaux de la ieticats et ne dépasse pas le milieu de ces rameaux; une 4°, située sous la 3°, est adjacente au bord inférieur de laile, contre Vextré- relie le milieu de la tige de la posticale au bord inférieur de Vaile; la 3° et la 4° taches sont parfois réunies en une seule, en forme de bande transvers ale; nervures jaunes, bifurcation de la posticale notablement distale de la transversale. Méta- tarse antérieur deux fois aussi long que le tibia, celui-ci bien plus court que le fémur, a hi pulvilles aussi minces et aussi longs que l’empodium. L. 1,5 mm.—Lac de Tibériade. Tendipes bethsaidae, n. sp. ?. D’un jaune pale; antennes blanches, oaeiags terminal brun; mesonotum parfois avec une trace de trois bandes un peu plu us sombres; tarses assombris. Yeux ae loeeuce, trés amincis au vertex ou ils sont ta ge ge distants aera ellipsoidaux, & col pas plus long she ‘gros, le 6e article is articles 2 et 3 subégaux, 5° égalant la moitié du 4°, pulvilles larges. L. 4,5 mm.—Lac de Tibériade. 372 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [September, 1914.] Tendipes galilaeus, n. sp. D’un jaune pale; antennes blanchatres, 6° article assombri; trois bandes raccourcies de mesonotum, metanotum et mesosternum bruns; pattes blanchatres, tibia antérieur tarse antérieur de moitié plus long que le tibia, les quatre tibias postérieurs avec le peigne caractéristique des Tendipes, pulvilles larges. L. 1,5 mm.—Lac de Tibériade. 4t. A Scheme for the Bardic and Historical Survey of Rajputana. By Dr. L. P. Txssirori. INTRODUCTION. austed, and the necessity was felt of immediately ask or a grant from the Government, so that the work might proceed. é eme, in which an annual grant s. 9,000 was demand- with my applying to the Society to be allowed to go to Raj- putana and what with the Society asking the consent of the Government of India and the delay necessarily invo in these proceedings, it was only on the 22nd July I was able to >: Scheme and to prepare a new one. ‘The three months I was detained in Calcutta were almost entirely wasted for my work, as I had neither helps nor materials to work upon there. The foolscap-copies sent from Jodhpur were found to be 374 Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. [Nov., 1914. poem of the seventeenth century referring to the battle of Ujain between Jasvant Singh of Jodhpur and Aurangzeb (4.D. in Appendix to the same. Many years have been wasted in sterile talks and fruitless attempts, and it is time to set to for the publication of the Bardic literature is nothing more than a mere show and will never lead to any practical results. a year. Deducting from this sum Rs. 2000, it may possibl or more, which will be contributed by the Jodhpur State, the annual sum to be contributed by the Government tions of the Survey. however, should begin from the Ist January, 1915, and therefore an additional further non-recur- ring grant of Rs. 1000 necessary for starting the Survey and continuing it for three months, exclusive of the editor’s stipend, which has been already paid as far as April, 1915, will have to be sanctioned for the period Ist January to 3lst March. PRELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS. sions in regard to them, that I was able to realize the course Vol. X, No. 10.] Bardie and Histl. Survey of Rajputana. 375 [N.S.] and means to be adopted. These conclusions have not only a certain interest for themselves, but actually form the basis of the present Scheme and contain the reasons for all techni- cal points and items in it. I therefore think it necessary briefly to explain them, before entering into the discussion of the plan of the work. It is well known that there are two languages used by the bards of Rajputana in their poetical compositions, and they are called Dingala and Pingala. These are no mere ‘